The of Sydney

Faculty of Handbook 1997

Editors Mary Ferguson Richard Holden GregPatmore Faculty of Economics Handbook 1997 © The 1996 ISSN 1034-2621

The University of Sydney N.S.W. 2006 Telephone (02) 9351 2222 Facsimile (02) 93514433 (Faculty of Economics)

Semester and vacation dates 1997

Semester Day 1997

First Semester and lectures begin Monday 3 March

Easter recess Last day of lectures Thursday 27 March Lectures resume Monday 7 April

Study vacation -1 week beginning Monday 16 June

Examinations commence Monday 23 June

Second Semester and lectures begin Monday 28 July

Mid-semester recess Last day of lectures Friday 26 September Lectures resume Tuesday 7 October

Study vacation -1 week beginning Monday 10 November

Examinations commence Monday 17 November

Set in 10 on 11.5 point Palatino by the Publications Unit, The University of Sydney and printed in Australia by Printing Headquarters, Sydney.

Text printed on 80gsm bond, recycled from milk cartons. Message from the Dean iv

Introduction vi

Merewether Building vii

1. Which degree? 1

2. 6

3. Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) 20

4. 32

5. Postgraduate studies 47

6. The Faculty of Economics 49

7. Departments and courses of study 52 53 58 Anthropology 60 Computer Science 62 68 72 Economics 76 Economics/Law 89 Education 90 92 Geography 96 Government and Public Administration 100 Industrial Relations 110 Interdepartmental courses and programs 112 Marketing 114 School of 116 120 School of Studies in Religion 122 Social Work and Social Policy 123

8. Other faculty information 127 Enrolment 127 Discontinuation 127 Computer facilities 127 Lecture and seminar rooms 127 Examinations and further tests 128 Restriction upon re-enrolment 129 Prizes and scholarships 130 Societies 132 Libraries 133 Publications 134 Research units 134 Professional organisations 136

Appendix: explanation of symbols 138

Main campus map 140 The Department of Finance has developed world- class research facilities to analyse the stock , the futures exchange, and address such problems as regulating insider trading in these institutions. The Department has established a highly successful foundation the Asia-Pacific Capital Markets Foundation (ACMF) which in turn has had a leading role (along with the Departments of Marketing and Econometrics) in building research infrastructure. In 1996 the Department took a leading role in winning a co-operative Australian Research Council Industry grant for a research facility called the National Microeconomic Modelling Laboratory (MEMLab).The original grant of $700 000 has been augmented by funds from the University and from the various exchanges and banks to bring together almost $2 million to establish MEMLab as a world-class computer research facility. While this is of critical importance to our postgraduate students, it also has great significance for undergraduates. Honours students in Finance will be able to work in the Laboratory helping to solve real problems. Their efforts will not only further their education but introduce them into the heart of the financial and commercial world, thus making them I welcome cordially all new and continuing students highly employable and, better yet, the training and to the Faculty of Economics! The year 1997 will see acquaintances made in such research should provide momentous changes to the Australian higher the foundation for a significant long term career in education system. Government fundingis contracting, finance. student contributions are increasing, and rumours and dire predictions abound. While I do not want to In the Department of Marketing similar oppor­ underestimate the challenges facing the University of tunities abound. It has recently established the Sydney, I am happy to observe that the Faculty of Australian Asia-Pacific Institute of Retailing and Economics has a bright future and offers many Studies (AURASS). This organisation stresses opportunities to students. innovation, excellence in retailing and services For the last seven years the Faculty of Economics marketing and has key links with the European has been restructuring its undergraduate and Institute of Retailing and Service Studies, the Canadian postgraduate programs. The emphasis has been the Institute of Retailing and Service Studies and a similar continuous introduction of new courses while we also organisation in the United States, headquartered at retain our long standing fields of excellence in subjects the University of Florida. AURASS focuses on real such as Economics, Economic History, Government, problems, especially innovations in the areas that are Industrial Relations, and Econometrics. Currently we directly relevant to understanding and predicting have, in addition to our traditional Bachelor of market processes in the retailing and services sector. Economics degree, the relatively new Bachelor of Of special are such subjects as consumer Economics (Social Sciences) together with wholly new demand forecasting, competitive analysis, new programs in the field of Commerce: the Bachelor of product introduction and pricing. As in the case of Commerce and the degrees. We Finance, senior Honours students have the opportunity have also vibrant double degree programs with the to absorb a wealth of both theoretical and practical Facultiesof Engineering(BE/BCom), Arts (BA/BCom knowledge as well as to make contacts, not only in or BA/BEc), Law (BCom/LLB or BEc/LLB), and Australia but across the world. Science (BSc/BCom). The Department of Industrial Relations provides Over the past four years new majors have arisen in similar opportunities through its Key Centre, the Finance, Marketing, and Human Resources Australian Centre for Industrial Relations Research . We hope to start a new major in the field and Teaching (ACIRRT). This body works closely of Management of Information Systems. All of these with employers, unions, and government, to solve new ventures have been staffed by world-class scholar- major problems in such fields as enterprise bargaining teachers and opportunities available to students have and also to accumulate data of use to business and never been more varied or taught at a higher quality. union managers. To give students some idea of the progress being Research and study opportunities in the new made in the Faculty I give the following examples. departments augment a long, on-going, tradition of research in Government, Economic History, Economics, and Accounting. For example, the Department of Government is currently involved in researching microeconomic reform, the role of the state in economic development and government business relations in East Asian countries. Other research in the Department analyses the of Australian childcare. In Economic History, research is being undertaken in the fields such as the industrial development of Japan, the evolution of the German economy, the growth of big business in Australia and the role of the French in the South Pacific. The Faculty of Economics, therefore, not only provides a wide range of courses of study but an opportunity to become an expert in an important area which can lead to job opportunities and enormous personal satisfaction. The problem facing students is to find out about all of these opportunities. Many of them will not be chronicled in the handbook. The best place to start is at the departmentlevel. All departments will be happy to explain what they are doing and how students can benefit from current ongoing scholarship. Every lecturer and professor is a goldmine of information and students should take time to ask questions and find an area of interest that satisfies them. I urge each and every student not to miss these opportunities since the long-term benefits are so great. In this quest for knowledge and self-growth I wish every student well in the year ahead.

Stephen Salsbury Professor of Economic History Dean, Faculty of Economics The Faculty of Economics handbook is designed to provide a complete guide to the Faculty and its courses. Undergraduate students should turn immediately to chapters 1 to 4 written with their needs in mind. Prospective postgraduate scholars should find most necessary informationinchapter5.Allstudents should read the sections later in the handbook devoted to the Faculty of Economics itself and to each of the teaching departments within the Faculty. For further information about the University, see the separate publication University of Sydney Diary which is available free from the Student Centre or from the University of Sydney Union outlets. MEREWETHER BUILDING

LEVEL2 LEVEL 1 Note: T/;e Departmental Offices for Finance, Industrial Relations and Marketing are in the Institute Building

Bachelor of Economics, Bachelor of which are of central importance to the academic Economics (Social Sciences) or Bachelor of discipline of economics and to some of the specialised Commerce? career patterns for graduates in economics. Some of you may already have made a firm choice The BEc(SocSc) restricts access to some subjects about which of the Faculty's three degrees is for you; which have a strong professional focus (for example, others may still wonder what the differences are. In full sequences in accounting and commercial law), bo th cases you should read the next few pages carefully but Table A includes a wider range of subjects with a either to confirm your decision or to help you make up relevance to the study of society in general, not only to your mind. economic aspects. These subjects include psychology, social anthropology, philosophy and , none In 1993 the Faculty introduced a new degree, the of which is available as a Table A subject in the other Bachelor of Commerce. With it came a new range of subjects and courses such as marketing, and an two degrees. expanded range of offerings in finance. These courses On the other hand, subjects available as majors in are also available in the BEc. Table A for the BEc but not the BEc(SocSc) include As you will be aware from reading the accounting, econometrics, commercial law and Admissions Centre Guide, there is a quota (course computer science. The Table A subjects in the BCom code 500) limiting the number of students permitted direct you to courses in those disciplines that are of to study Accounting IA and IB in each of the three particular relevance to the management and conduct degrees. Because these courses are compulsory at first of business, such as finance. year level in the BCom, all students enrolling in that 4. Table B subjects: in each degree, you can take a degree will come from the code 500 quota. It is also number of courses from any subject offered in the possible to enrol in one of the other two degrees from Faculty of Arts or the Faculty of Science (known as within this quota although, in the case of the Table B subjects). In the BCom, you may take the BEc(SocSc), you are restricted to only one year of equivalent of six semester courses from Table B, while study in accounting. in the other two degrees you are allowed to take only four, except with special permission from the Faculty. Degree structures The details of the structure of the three degrees are Student interest contained in the succeeding chapters. Each of the The three degrees represent an attempt to cater for degrees has a common core requirement of completing quite different demands by students. Part of the at least two majors, that is three years of study, in difference in demand reflects the ways students subjects central to those degrees. We call these Table perceive their career opportunities as flowing from A subjects, and for each degree there is a separate their studies. This is discussed below. Another reason Table A, as set out in chapters 2, 3, and 4. for different choices is the distinct individual talents In outline the main differences between the three and of students. For example, if you have degrees are as follows: been at ease with mathematics at school, you will find 1. The number of courses: the Bachelor of Economics that subjects like econometrics, finance and marketing (BEc) and the Bachelor of Commerce (BCom) require will present you with less difficulty than they would you to complete the equivalent of 22 full semester for students without that facility. This might be a courses over three years, while the Bachelor of reason for preferring either the BEc or the BCom to the Economics (Social Sciences) (BEc(SocSc)) contains the BEc(SocSc). On the other hand, if your interests lie in equivalent of 20 courses. the direction of developing a broad understanding of 2. The compulsory courses: in the BEc, the compulsory the social environment in which economic activity courses are Economics I, II and III (which comprises a takes place, or if you would like to minimise major in economics) and Econometrics I; in the mathematical approaches, then your choice might be BEc(SocSc) you must take two years of study in the BEc(SocSc). economics, either Economics I (Social Sciences) and Some students are aware from the beginning of Economics II(P), or Economics I and II; and in the some particular subject in which they want to BCom, the compulsory courses are Accounting IA specialise. In this case, there may be a program of and IB, Econometrics I and either Economics I or related courses that is available in one degree rather Economics I (Social Sciences). Most students in the than another. Chapters 2, 3 and 4 give examples of BCom will take Economics I, as this course is a such combinations. The Economics Faculty at Sydney prerequisite for a number of courses central to this is unusual in that it offers students a choice between degree. sequences of courses inregular and radical economics. 3. The subjects in Table A: many subjects appear in Students interested in the latter approach to the study Table A for each of the degrees, but there are some of economic issues should normally do the BEc(SocSc) important differences. The BEc encourages students and take the sequence: Economics I(SocSc), Economics to concentrate their studies in a range of subjects II(P) and third year Economics (P) courses. For detailed information on these and other courses, B subjects. For example, in the BCom, you can study a read the course descriptions contained in the separate language for three years, and in the other degrees for sections for each department in chapter 7 of this two years plus, with permission from the Faculty, a handbook. There will be faculty advisers available to third. This is not an option to be entered into lightly, help you with your choices at enrolment time— however, unless you have a particular talent for although it will certainly help if you have read the languages and perhaps some prior knowledge, as relevant parts of this handbook carefully beforehand. language study can be intensive and very time- consuming. Career opportunities and subject choice With labour market considerations taken care of by The employment opportunities for economics and a core major such as economics or accounting, you can commerce graduates have always been particularly follow your own course of study based on your promising, even in hard times. The Faculty's degrees interests in particular subjects, or your curiosity about have been accorded a high degree of credibility in particular fields of knowledge and forms of enquiry. both the public and private sectors, the demand for It is often a mistake to focus all your energies on 'good' graduates has nearly always exceeded the subjects leading to a predetermined, narrow career supply, and the range of career options has always path, particularly if this is at the expense of studying been extensive. a subject that interests you more. You should beware, How far should your career plans determine your in the first place, of putting all your career eggs in the choice of subjects? There is no simple answer to this one basket: the labour market changes, and your own question. In general, you should not let your current aspirations may also change. In the second place, you views of a prospective career determine all your should notbe attracted solely by the apparent 'practical choices, especially in first year. Most of you will be relevance' of a particular subject, as others may be just taking subjects that are new and unfamiliar, and you as important in preparing you for entering various will want to test out your aptitude and interests before careers: for example, a knowledge of economic history, committing yourself to a specialisation. First year lays including the cycles of boom and bust in the Australian the foundation, but try to leave some options open. and world economies, and the rise and fall of the For some of you, a major reason for enrolling in the economic health of nations, is invaluable in the world Faculty is to embark on a career in accounting. You of business and government decision-making; and an can study accounting and take the full program as understanding of the political and governmental advised by the Department of Accounting in either frameworks within which national and international the BEc or the BCom. A BEc with a major in accounting business functions is also vital. signals to employers that you have also specialised in Moreover, employers don't only look at the label on economics. A thorough grounding in the discipline of your degree and the subjects you have studied, but economics is widely recognised as providing a rigorous also at the results you have obtained. You maximise training in analytical and problem solving skills, with your chance of getting good results if you take subjects application in all spheres of employment. that genuinely interest you. Just as importantly, you Whether or not you have in mind to qualify as an will also enjoy your time at University much more. accountant, the BCom offers you opportunities to One way in which you can broaden the scope and enter the labour market with specialised knowledge content of your degree is to take advantage of the and skills in varied fields that are of relevance to opportunities in the Faculty of Economics for pursuing management and business affairs. In this degree, your a program in Asian studies. Each of the Faculty's three choice of first year subjects is limited because of the degrees has plenty of scope within them for you to three compulsory courses, but in later years your combine such a program with your two majors and choice is wider than in the BEc because it is not the compulsory courses. In the Departments of compulsory to major in economics. Government and Economic History, a wide range of Because of the wide range of subjects and courses courses is offered on economic and political aspects of available in the three degrees, you can position yourself Asia, especially East Asia. Courses are available, for for many different career paths. The example of the instance, on Japanese politics and economic accountancy profession has already been mentioned. development. You may wish to begin study in this Apart from this, a combination of economics and area at first year level, where there is a semester course econometrics, if this is where your talents lie, opens in the Department of Government, Introduction to up opportunities in economic researchand forecasting World Politics. Even if you do not take these subjects positions in both private and public sectors; at first year, special provision has been made to allow specialisations in economics and finance position you you to combine a selection of later year semester well for careers in the financial sector of the economy, courses from these departments in an Asian Studies such as banking; a combination of economics and the Program. Some third year options in the Department study of government is valuable for a range of careers of Economics are also appropriate if you are interested in the public and private sectors; and the study of in Asian studies. As mentioned above, you can also industrial relations and humanresource management undertake some study of an Asian language, such as opens up careers in personnel management or labour Japanese or Indonesian. relations. Employers expect economics and commerce There are even wider opportunities than may appear graduates to be numerate, to be able to analyse data from a perusal of the core subjects in each of the using basic mathematical and statistical techniques, degrees, because we permit you to choose some Table and to do so through the use of the latest computer technology and software. These skills may be obtained study in the Faculty. In order to enter and remain in in each degree in various ways. In the BEc and the the honours stream in a subject, you normally have to BCom, at least one year of study of econometrics is perform at credit level or better in that subject. A bare compulsory. In addition, at all levels there is an pass level of performance in a first year subject will emphasis in a number of subjects on computer not be enough to secure entry into honours courses. applications, and in studying them you will be doing a considerable amount of work in the Faculty's Transfers between the three degrees computer laboratory. It is not necessary in order to The restriction on the number of students studying become competent in the use of computers for you to accounting means that students not in the accounting take computer science as a subject, although this is an quota cannot transfer into the BCom. Apart from this excellent choice for those of you wanting to specialise restriction, you are free to transfer from one degree to in computer technology and programming. In the another during your enrolment in the Faculty. BEc(SocSc), where there is less emphasis on However, students who want to enter the accounting quantitative techniques, you will nevertheless find quota after being admitted to the other quota must you can acquire some of them through the study of apply through UAC in time for enrolment at the economics, or in other fields, such as psychology and commencement of the next academic year. government. Up to 30 March each year, students may withdraw One final point: in addition to numeracy skills, an from any course and enrol in any other. During this increasingly high premium is placed by employers on period you may also withdraw from one degree and communication and general literacy skills. This is one enrol in one of the other two—subject to the above reason why access to Table B subjects is provided in quota restrictions, and as long as the individual subjects your degree. In the BCom, for example, there is scope you have chosen make this allowable under the rules to choose courses in the humanities offered in the of the other degree. As well, transfers between the Faculty of Arts, where such skills are an essential degrees can be made when you enrol for the next component of learning. Within many of the Faculty's academic year. In other words, you may not change own courses, attention is paid to developing skills in from one degree to another in the middle of the year. logical argument through written and oral If you want further advice on the matter you should communication. Suchskills are particularly important consult the advisers in the Faculty Office. for the successful completion of courses such as Commercial Law and Government. Special courses in such skills as they relate to university work are also Full-time and part-time study available through the University's Learning Assistance Most discussion so far has assumed that you will be a Centre. full-time student and will want to graduate after three years' study. Yet many students cannot attend full- time and are happy to complete their degree in a Honours degrees longer time. Although the University enrolment makes In some of the more specialised careers open to the a distinction between full-time and part-time students Faculty's graduates, such as economic forecasting (as does the Commonwealth Government for the sake and analysis, employers may be looking for a level of of student allowances) the Faculty of Economics has specialisation thatis notprovided by a three-year pass the same rules to determine what is 'satisfactory degree. Similarly, if you want to qualify for specialised postgraduate study, a pass degree is not normally progress' for all students. You must enrol in at least sufficient. For all graduates, a good four-year honours the equivalent of four full semester subjects per year, degree considerably enhances the quality of your except when you have less than four left to complete qualification and singles you out to an employer as the degree, and you must pass the equivalent of six having exceptional ability. full semester courses over any two-year period. The intentionis thatstudents should not be able to complete Honours degrees are available in most of the subjects in Table A of the respective degrees. An honours just one subject a year and stretch the degree out degree may involve extra work at second and third inordinately. It is possible to suspend your candidature year level in your chosen subject and, in all cases, an for one year and, with permission, more; but, even additional year of study spent entirely on studying here, the total length of your degree must not go that subject. Details of the honours programs in each beyond ten calendar years. Satisfactoryprogress means department can be found in chapter 7. Honours is not also that you may not keep attempting and failing any available in any Table B subject. subject. If you do not make satisfactory progress you will be asked to explain (show cause) and you may be It is also possible to complete either double honours excluded from individual subjects or from the whole or jointhonours. Double honours involves completing all the honours work in two subjects, and thus normally degree. The implication of this at the beginning of takes an extra year. In joint honours the two subjects your studies is that you should regard your choice of are more closely related to each other and a special degree as a serious one and that you should apply program of study is designed for the student so that it yourself to your studies. If you don't, then you are can be completed concurrently. For example, each taking a place at the University for which there are year a number of students take joint honours in many aspirants. economics and econometrics. You should also take careful note of the availability Normally you will not make any decisions about of evening courses if you are a part-time student as doing honours work until the end of your first year of most courses are not offered in the evening. variation of enrolment choice of courses so that the most appropriate Considerable freedom to choose the courses in which combination of courses for a particular career or field you enrol inevitably means that some students will of specialisation might be made by each candidate. have second thoughts on the wisdom of their choice This flexibility is somewhat curtailed within the after they have started attending classes. Provision is combined course, but a student may nevertheless made for this by permitting variations in enrolment qualify as a lawyer and at the same time choose the up to 30 March for first semester and year-long courses particular disciplines in which he or she will and up to 30 August for second semester courses. Up concentrate within the BEc, BEc(SocSc) or BCom to these dates you can withdraw from a course or add degree. In the BEc degree all students must complete another one and, prior to 30 March, transfer from one the subjects Econometrics I and Economics I, II and III degree to the other within the Faculty without any and the equivalent of at least two Table A third year penalty whatsoever. However, you are strongly semester courses other than Economics. In the advised during those weeks to attend all courses into BEc(SocSc) degree all students must study the subject which you think you might wish to transfer. It is not Economics for at least two years and must complete possible to add a course after this time though you can the equivalent of at least four semester courses at the discontinue a course. Detailed information about third year level. In the BCom degree all students must study first year Accounting, Econometrics and withdrawal, discontinuation with permission and Economics or Economics (Social Sciences) and must discontinuation can be found in chapter 8. complete the equivalent of at least four semester Timetable courses at the third year level. Full details of the subjects available in the degrees are given in chapters First year students will be provided after they have 2, 3 and 4. Students proceeding under combined degree enrolled with a personal timetable showing the times requirements should note that no more Table B courses and locations of their classes in each subject. Thus, in other than Legal Institutions, Constitutional Law, Torts, choosing your subjects, you need not worry in the first Administrative Law, Contracts and Criminal Law can be instance about the timetable and any possible clashes. counted towards the requirements for the Faculty of Many of the departments with large enrolments give Economics degree. lectures in a subject more than once, scheduled at different times of the day. Copies of the Faculty lecture Combined degree students will normally take Legal timetable are available at enrolment time. If the Institutions, Constitutional Law, Torts, Administrative personal timetable you have been allocated by the Law, Contracts and Criminal Law (which are LLB computer is unsuitable, you may seek to change some courses) to count toward the first degree. In the first of the times, but only if there is room available at an year of attendance, they will normally enrol in four alternative time. first year courses of which one is Economics I or Most departments schedule one hour per week of Economics I (SocSc) and another is Legal Institutions. tutorials in first year courses, in addition to the lecture In addition, students will be expected to complete the hours. Legal Research and Writing course. Combined degree candidates will take Constitutional Law and Torts in Credit for work previously completed second year and Administrative Law and Contracts in third year, with Criminal Law being taken either in Graduates of other faculties and universities are not second or third year. As in the case of Arts/Law, the normally accepted into the undergraduate program. first three years of the five-year combined course are Undergraduates in other faculties or universities or spent at the main grounds of the University. The similar institutions may apply for transfer to the BEc, remainder of the course is completed at the Law BEc(SocSc) or BCom and be credited with courses School. deemed equivalent to courses available in the Faculty. A student who wishes to proceed to an honours Restriction upon re-enrolment BEc, BEc(SocSc) or BCom degree and who is qualified to enter the final honours year, may proceed directly Details on restriction upon re-enrolment are given in into the final honours year after the first three years, or chapter 8 of this handbook. may defer entry until after the completion of the entire combined course. Intending honours students take Economics, Economics (Social Sciences) the second and third year honours courses (or whatever or Commerce/Law degrees is required at that level) in the chosen honours subject. Economics, Economics(SocialSciences) or Commerce/ While there is much to be gained by combined degree Law is a combined course of study in which the students taking honours courses, the final honours student may gain degrees in both the Faculties of year would normally only be undertaken by a student Economics and Law in five years, which is one year with some serious scholarly ambitions in the honours less than it would take to complete both separately. subject." The Economics, Economics (Social Sciences) or Commerce /Law arrangements are similar to the more Graduate entry to Law familiar Arts/Law course; and Economics/Law, Arts/ A student who secures a place in the Economics Law and Science/Law share a common entry quota. undergraduate quota may complete the Economics The Faculty of Law also offers a three-year course degree and apply for Graduate Law. Only students available only to approved graduates of other faculties. who have obtained a place in the Combined Law The requirements for the Faculty of Economics quota are permitted to enrol in Law subjects in Faculty degrees have been designed to allow flexibility in the of Economics degrees. Engineering/Commerce New students in the Faculty of Arts should note A five-year double degree program is available in that in courses provided by the Faculty of Economics Engineering and Commerce (BE BCom). Engineering there are no evening lectures. graduates often end up in management, and a background in commerce subjects is a valuable asset in such progression. Entry to the double degree is restricted to students already enrolled in the Bachelor of Engineering, and occurs at the beginning of their second year of study. There is a quota, and selection is on academic merit. Further details are available from the Faculty of Engineering. In the double degree program, students spend the last four years of their studies doing commerce and engineering courses in parallel. Special rules have been framed for the Bachelor of Commerce in this mode(see chapter 4).Students are required to complete fifteen semester courses in Commerce, taken from Table A.

Arts/Commerce and Science/Commerce The combined Arts/Commerce program provides the opportunity for students to combine professional studies, for example, Accounting, with liberal Arts studies. The program will take a minimum of five years to complete the degrees of Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Commerce (BA/ BCom). Entry is competitive,with the 1996 TER being 82.35. Details of courses may be found in the Arts and Economics Handbooks. Candidates are under the general supervision of the Faculty of Arts until 144 units (generally three full-time years) are completed, after which they are under the general supervision of the Faculty of Economics. In 1997 the Faculties of Science and Economics will offer the combined Science/Commerce program for the first time. The program will take a minimum of five years to complete. Details of the courses may be found in the Science and Economics Handbooks. Applications for admission must be made through the Universities Admissions Centre. Bachelor of Arts students Students of the Faculty of Arts are subject in general to the by-laws and general arrangements of that faculty and should consult the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Handbook. Faculty of Arts students should make sure that they comply withFaculty of Arts rules particularly with regard to courses which are taught by Faculty of Economics staff, i.e. Economic History, Economics, Economics (Social Sciences), Government and Industrial Relations. Candidates for the BA degree with honours in the subjects listed above are also subject to the rules of the Faculty of Arts, and except with the approval of that faculty may not proceed to honours unless they have obtained higher than pass in the first course of the subject in which they seek honours. In examinations Arts students in Economic History, Economics, Economics (Social Sciences), Government and Industrial Relations are, in respect of those courses, subject to the rules and practices of the Faculty of Arts. Economics students taking Arts courses are, in respect of those courses, subject to the rules and practices of the Faculty of Economics. The formal rules for the BEc degree are to be found in majors from Table A in the normal period, you will the resolutions of the Senate and of the Faculty, and in need to choose subjects in your first year which will the attached tables of courses. You will find most of allow you to complete the sequences of your choice. the detailed information at the end of this chapter. The The examples of course patterns given below are no purpose of the following discussion is to give you an more than examples of how you might structure your introduction to the structure of the degree and to the degree to achieve certain ends. The advisers from the extent of choice available. Faculty who will be available at enrolment time will You will be required to complete the equivalent of be pleased to explain to you many other possible 22 full semester courses to qualify for the award of the combinations and variations of courses. degree. Most courses available in the degree are of If you have been admitted to the Faculty within the semester length, although some are full year courses. Accounting (course code 500) quota you can follow a At first year level, a full semester course, such as program in the BEc which will enable you to be Accounting IA, has a unit of 6, and a full year admitted to the Australian Society of Certified course, such as Economics I or Econometrics I, a unit Practising Accountants or the Institute of Chartered value of 12. At second and third year levels, semester Accountants in Australia. You can do this by taking courses are worth 8 units and full year courses 16 the following program: units. There are also some 4 unit courses. The unit value of all courses is shown in the table of courses for First Year the BEc. Ecs I* Acc. IA Comm. Trans A Economet. I* Acc. IB Comm. Trans B Most students expect to complete their degree in three years. In first year, full-time students should Second Year enrol in the equivalent of 8 semester courses in four Ecs II* Man. Acc. A Corp. Law Finance 201 subjects (48 units). In second year, most of you will Fin. Acc. A Elective enrol in the equivalent of 7 or 8 later year semester Third Year courses (56 or 64 units), leaving 56 and 48 units Ecs in* Fin. Acc. B Pr. Tax. Law Auditing respectively to complete the degree in third year. Man. Acc. B Tax. Bus. Ent. Thus, your degree will comprise a total of 160 units. If you choose to complete a fifth first year subject, More detailed advice from the Department of normally in your second year of enrolment, you will Accounting will be available at enrolment. qualify with 156 units. Any failures in courses will Another pattern, which would be. suitable for make the taskrofcompletingin three years considerably students witha strengthinmathematical and scientific more difficult. Note that you cannot, without special subjects, might look something like this: permission, enrol in more than 9 semester courses, or their equivalent, in any year. First Year There are a number of compulsory courses in the Ecs I* COMP 101F Economet. I* Acc. IA degree. You will need to complete successfully COMP102S Acc. IB Economics I, II and III, as well as Econometrics I. Second Year Virtually all first year students will enrol in Economics Ecs II* COMP 201F Economet. IIA Ec. Hist. I and Econometrics I. Thus, you will normally have COMP 202F Economet. IIB two of your four first year subjects determined for COMP 203S you. There is considerable choice about the remaining COMP 204S two. Have a look at the Table A first year courses listed Third Year at the end of this chapter. Remember, also, that you Ecs III* COMP 301F Ops Res. A Ecs III Supp may choose from Table B courses as well—but you COMP 302F Ops Res. B would be well advised not to choose more than one at COMP 303S this stage. COMP 304S Another requirement to keep in mind is that you will need to complete two major sequences of subjects This would be a vocationally-directed degree that before the end of your degree. One of these will entail would steer you into the technical side of quantitative Economics I, II and III. The other will comprise 44 economic research. units in a subject listed in Table A other than Economics, A degree pattern which is more general but still has for example, Econometrics. Table A and the separate an emphasis on subjects which would be of vocational departmental entries in this handbook contain value in both the public and the private sectors might information about what constitutes a major in a subject, look like this: including information on any course prerequisites. Examples of such sequences are set out in the sample programs below. In order to complete at least two *full year First Year 6. A candidate may not, except with the permission Ecs I* Govt Ind. Rels Economet. I* of the Faculty, enrol in a course unless the entry Govt Ind. Rels requirement for that course is satisfied; an entry requirement may include the completion of a course Second Year at a specified level. Ecs II* Govt Ind. Rels Ec. Hist. 7. A candidate may not count the same course Govt Ind. Rels more than once towards the degree or count two Third Year courses which overlap substantially in content. Ecs III* Govt Ind. Rels Ec. Hist. 8. Where in the tables of courses referred to in Govt Ind. Rels section 1 a course is designated a corequisite to another course a candidate may, except with the permission of If you want to maximise your involvement in the the Faculty, enrol in the latter course only if he/she is central core of economics then the following pattern concurrently enrolled in the corequisite course or has would accomplish it: already completed that course. 9. Subject to the Senate resolutions concerning First Year satisfactory progress and except with the permission Ecs I* Ec. Hist. Economet. I* Aust. of the Faculty, a candidate for the Pass degree must Ec. Hist. Economy* complete the requirements for the degree within ten calendar years of first enrolment for the degree, and, Second Year Ecs II* Ec. Hist. Economet. IIA Ec. Hist. in the case of the Honours degree, within five calendar Ec.Hist. Economet. IIB years of first enrolment. Third Year Pass degree Ecs III* Ec. Hist. Ecs III Add.* Ecs III Supp 10. In order to qualify for the award of the degree Ec. Hist. a candidate shall complete the equivalent of 22 full semester courses having a total value of not less than 156 units, which shall include: Resolutions of the Senate (i) 12 units in Econometrics; Bachelor of Economics (ii) a major in Economics; 1. (1) The courses which are available for the (iii) amajorinasubjectotherthanEconornics degree are set outin the table of courses attached listed in Table A; to these resolutions and in other tables approved (iv) no more than 60 units at first year level; by the Faculty. and (2) In respect of each course the Faculty may (v) exceptwithFacultypermission,nomore designate prerequisite courses, corequisite than 28 units in total from subjects listed courses and specific entry requirements and in Table B. such information shall be added to the table of Exceptin the case of ll(ii), amajor comprises a sequence courses for the degree. of courses of not less than 44 units, which shall include 2. A candidate may be permitted by the Faculty to not less than 32 units of later year courses, as specified count towards the degree a course or courses other for each subject in Table A. than those listed in the tables referred to in section 1. Concurrent candidature for the degrees of Bachelor of 3. Each course is designated as a first year course Economics and Bachelor of Laws (by the Roman numeral I), or a later year course. 11. (i) A student may proceed concurrently as 4. (1) Each course available for the degree is a candidate for the degrees of Bachelor of either a full year, full semester or half semester Economics and Bachelor of Laws, and course and is designated as having a unit value may receive credit for the courses Legal as described in the tables of courses. Institutions, Torts, Constitutional Law, (2) A first year course, where it comprises a Contracts, Administrative Law and half semester of study in the subject, shall have Criminal Law for the Bachelor of a value of 3 units; where it comprises a full Economics degree, provided that the semester of study, a value of 6 units; and where student may not count any further it comprises a full year of study, a value of 12 courses from Table B; and provided that, units. with respect to section 5, permission of (3) A later year course, where it comprises a both the Faculties of Economics and Law half semester of study in the subject, shall have is required. a value of 4 units; where it comprises a full (ii) A student enrolled in a third year semester of study, a value of 8 units; and where • Honours course from Table A may fufil it comprises a full year of study, a value of 16 the requirement for a second major in the units. Bachelor of Economics by taking a minimum 32 units of third year level 5. A candidate in any one year shall, except with courses from Table A (inclusive of the permission of the Faculty, enrol in the equivalent Honours courses). of no more than nine and no less than four full semester courses. Honours degree 12. The degree may be awarded with honours in: *full year Accounting Computer Science complete a joint honours year in the two subjects in Economics one year. Econometrics 19. A fourth year joint. honours course shall Economic History comprise such parts of each of the related fourth year Finance honours courses as may be decided by the Faculty. Geography 20. A candidate may not, exceptwiththepermission Government of the Faculty, repeat an honours course which he/ Industrial Relations she has discontinued or failed once. Marketing 21. A candidate who does not complete an Honours . degree may be permitted by the Faculty to count 13. The degree may also be awarded with joint towards the Pass degree any honours courses honours in any two of the subjects in which honours completed. are available. 22. The Faculty may grant a candidate credit for 14. There shall be three classes of honours, namely courses completed either at other institutions, or in Class I, Class II and Class III and within Class II there other faculties within the University of Sydney shall be two divisions, namely Division 1 and Divi­ provided that all the following conditions are met: sion 2. (i) the Faculty assesses the course or courses 15. If a student graduates with First Class Honours to be equivalent to courses offered by the in any honours subject or in any of the forms of joint Faculty; honours and the Faculty decides that the student's (ii) the courses are not counted towards work is of sufficiently high merit, the student shall another qualification; receive a bronze medal. (iii) in the case of courses completed at 16. A candidate may, except with Faculty another institution, credit shall not be permission, enrol in a fourth year honours course only given for more than the equivalent of 10 on completion of requirements for the Pass degree full semester courses, while credit may and on satisfying any other entry requirements for the be granted for any number of units for fourth year honours course. courses completed at the University of 17. A student who has been awarded the Pass Sydney; degree may subsequently be admitted to candidature (iv) credit shall not be given for courses for the Honours degree and may qualify for the award completed ten or more years prior to the of the Honours degree upon completion of such proposed year of enrolment. additional requirements in such time as the Faculty 23. A student who was enrolled as a candidate for may decide, provided that such a student may only be the degree prior to 1 January 1993 and who has not admitted to candidature for the Honours degree up to completed the requirements for the degree by 1 January three years after the award of the Pass degree. 1997 shall be transferred to the unit structure which 18. A candidate who is qualified to enrol in two took effect for commencing students from 1 January fourth year honours courses may complete the final 1993. honours year in the two subjects in one year each or

Table A: Bachelor of Economics (See section l of Senate resolutions) Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Accounting 101 Accounting IA 6 102 Accounting IB 6 Accounting IA 201 Management 8 Accounting IA and IB Econometrics I A major in Accounting under Accounting A section 10(iii) consists of 202 Financial 8 Accounting IA and IB Econometrics I Accounting IA-and IB, Accounting A Management Accounting A, 301 Financial 0 Financial Financial Accounting A, and Accounting B Accounting A any two of Financial Accounting B, • 302 Management Management Management Accounting B, Accounting B Accounting A Financial Statement Analysis 303 Financial Finance 201 and and Auditing.- Statement Analysis Financial Accounting A 304 Auditing 8 Accounting IA and IB Financial Accounting B Financial Accounting 6 Terminating course. Concepts Cannot be counted with Accounting IA and IB. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Management 6 Terminating course. Accounting Concepts Cannot be counted with Accounting IA and IB. Accounting IV Consult Department Requirements for the Pass degree must be completed before entry to this course. Agricultural Economics Agricultural 12 Assumed knowledge: 2-unit Economics I Mathematics Production Economics 8 Economics II A major in Agricultural Commodity 8 Economics II Economics under section Analysis 10(iii) consists of Agricultural Applied Marketing 8 Economics II Economics 1, Production Agricultural and 8 Economics II Economics, Commodity Price Resource Policy Analysis, and any two of Applied Commodity 8 Economics II Agricultural and Resource Policy, Applied Commodity Natural Resource 8 Economics II Trade, Natural Resource Econ­ Economics omics and Applied Marketing. Commercial Law Commercial 6 Commercial Transactions A may Transactions A not be counted with Legal Institutions. Commercial 6 Transactions B Trade Practices and 8 Commercial Cannot be counted with deleted Consumer Law Transactions A courses Restrictive Trade Practices and Commercial Law IB. Corporations Law 8 Commercial Transactions A Principles of Taxation 8 Commercial A major in Commercial Law Law Transactions A under section 10(iii) consists Corporations Law of Commercial Transactions A, Taxation of 8 Commercial . Principles of Corporations Law, Principles Business Entities Transactions A Taxation Law of Taxation Law, Taxation of Corporations Law Business Entities and two additional courses in Commercial Law. Bankruptcy 8 Commercial and Insolvency Transactions A Corporations Law Stock Markets and 8 Commercial Derivatives Law Transactions A Corporations Law Finance Law 8 Commercial - Transactions A Computer Science COMP101F 6 Intro. Programming COMP 191F 6 Econometrics I Intro. Programming (Advanced) A major in Computer Science COMP 102S 6 COMP 101 under section 10(iii) consists of Intro Computer two first year courses (12 units; Science without including COMP 100), COMP 192S 6 COMP 191/101 with four second year courses (16 Intro Computer sufficient merit units) and four third year Science (Advanced) courses (16 units). Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course COMP201F 4 COMP 102/192 Students who wish to be eligible Computer Systems to do Computer Science COMP 291F 4 COMP 192/102 with Honours and to join the Computer Systems sufficient merit Computer Science Society must (Advanced) complete 24 units of Senior COMP 202F 4 COMP 102/192 Computer Science courses. Design and Data Students are strongly advised to Structures include in their selection one of COMP 292F 4 COMP 192/102 with the 'project' courses COMP 321- Design and Data sufficient merit 325. Structures (Advanced) COMP203S 4 COMP 202/292 and Languages and Logic Econometrics I or Discrete Maths COMP 293S 4 COMP 292/202 with Languages and Logic sufficient merit and (Advanced) Econometrics I or Discrete Maths COMP 204S 4 COMP 202/292 Programming Practice COMP 294S 4 COMP 292/202 with Programming Practice sufficient merit (Advanced) COMP 301F 4 As for COMP 203S and Algorithms 8 units of Intermediate Econometrics or MATH/STAT COMP 302F 4 As for COMP 301F and Artificial Intelligence COMP 204/294 and COMP 203/293 COMP 303S 4 COMP 201/291, Computer COMP 202/292 and Architecture COMP 203/293 COMP304S 4 COMP 204/294, Computer Graphics COMP 202/292, Econometrics I or MATH 101/191 and 8 units of Intermediate Econometrics or . MATH/STAT COMP 305S 4 COMP 202/292 Database Systems COMP 306F 4 COMP 203/293, Logic Programming COMP 202/292,8 units of Intermediate Econometrics or MATH/STAT COMP 307F 4 COMP 204/294, Networked Systems COMP 201/291 and COMP 202/292 COMP 308F 4 COMP 204/294 and Object-Oriented COMP 202/292 Systems COMP 309F 4 COMP 204/294, Operating Systems COMP 201/291 and COMP 202/292 COMP 310F 4 COMP 202/292 and Software Engineering COMP 204/294 Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course COMP 311S ...4 COMP 203/292 and 8 Theory of units of Intermediate Computation Econometrics or MATH/STAT COMP 312S 4 COMP 204/.294, User Interfaces COMP 202/292 and COMP 203/293 COMP321S 4 COMP 301 Algorithmic Systems Project COMP 322S 4 COMP 309 Computer Systems Project COMP 323S 4 COMP 302 Intelligence Systems Project COMP 324S 4 COMP 310 Large-Scale Software Project COMP 325S 4 COMP 308 Product Development Project Computer Science IV 16 units of Intermediate Honours and 24 units of Senior Computer Science at Credit level or better. A third year mathematics course is also recommended, Econometrics Econometrics I 12 Compulsory course. Assumed knowledge: 2-unit Mathematics. 201 Econometrics IIA 8 Econometrics I 202 Econometrics IIB 8 Econometrics A major in Econometrics under IIA section 10(iii) consists of Econometrics I, IIA, IIB, IIIA and one other full semester course. 301 Econometrics IIIA 8 Econometrics IIA 351 Operations 8 Econometrics IIA Candidates intending to take Research A Econometrics IV must complete all core Econometrics courses and 302 and 321. 352 Operations 8 Operations Candidates intending to take Research B Research A Operations Research IV must complete all core Operations Research courses and 321. 302 Applied 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics A major in Operations Research Econometrics IIIA under section 10(iii) consists of Econometrics I, IIA, IIB and Operations Research A and B. 303 Forecasting for 8 Econometrics Economics and IIA Business 304 Sample Design 8 Econometrics and Analysis IIA 321 Statistical 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics Modelling IIIA or Operations Research A Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course 322 Numerical 8 Econometrics IIB Analysis 323 8 Econometrics IIB 324 Special Topic 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics IV Credit average in 4 sem­ Requirements for the Pass ester courses at 300 level degree must be completed including 301,302 and before entry to this course. 321 or with permission of Head of Department Operations Research Credit average in 4 sem­ Requirements for the Pass IV ester courses at 300 level degree must be completed including 321,351 and before entry to this course. 352 or with permission of Head of Department Economic History Economic History IA 6 A major in Economic History Economic History IB 6 under section 10(iii) consists of Economic History IA and IB and 4 full semester courses other than those designated as honours courses (except with the permission of the Head of Department). Economic History II 8 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises an honours seminar Honours History IA and IB semester options and a research essay. in Economic History Economic History III 16 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises a year-long seminar Honours History II Honours semester options and a research essay. and in two full in Economic semester options in History Economic History Economic History IV Credit in Economic Requirements for the Pass degree History III Honours must be completed before entry and options to this course. Options Economic 8 For all Economic History Candidates who have not Development semester courses completed the prerequisites for in Southeast Asia Economic History IA Economic History courses but Economic 8 and IB or History I or have completed 4 full semester Development of any 4 full semester first year courses may, with Modern Germany first year courses the permission of the Head of Economic 8 Department, take options in Development of Economic History. Modern Japan The Managerial Firm: 8 As above plus Economics II Evolution and or Economics II(P) Attributes Economic Develop­ 8 ment of Russia and Eastern Europe Economic Fluctuations 8 Economics I or Economics I (Social Sciences) or with the consent of the Head of the Department of Economic History Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite

value course course i. Economic History of 8 the Mediterranean Region Social Aspects of 8 Industrialisation in the United States Economic and Social 8 Development of Modern France Economic and Social 8 History of Minority Groups American Economic 8 History 1607-1865 American Economic 8 History 1865-1970 Early Australian 8 Economic History Modern Australian 8 Economic History History of the Island 8 Pacific since the mid-1800s The Historical 8 Development of the Chinese Economy Asia-Pacific: Growth 8 and Change Strategy and Growth 8 For all Economic History of Big Business semester courses Urban History 8 Economic History IA Historiography 8 and IB or History I or Honours course. Pass students any 4 full semester may take with permission of first year courses Head of Department. Topics in Modern 8 European Social History History of Modern 8 European Expansion: Theory and Practice of Imperialism Economics Economics I 12 Compulsory course. Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Mathematics Economics II 16 Economics I or Econometrics I Compulsory course. Economics I (Social Sciences) and success­ ful completion of a qualifying examination for Economics II Economics II 24 Credit in Economics I Econometrics I Honours Economics III 16 Economics II and Compulsory course. Comprises 4 Econometrics I options or equivalent. Economics III 32 Credit in Economics II Honours Honours Economics III 16 Economics III or Comprises 4 options or equivalent Additional Economics III other than those taken for Honours Economics III. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Economics III 8 Economics III Comprises 2 options or Supplementary equivalent other than those taken for Economics III. Economics IV Credit in Economics III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours must be completed before entry to this course. Economics I 12 (Social Sciences) Economics II(P) 16 Economics I (Social Sciences); or Economics I and successful completion of a qualifying examination for Economics II(P) Australia and World 8 Economics II(P) The six Economics (P) 8 unit Capitalism courses are third year courses. Economic Conflict and 8 Economics II(P) the State of 8 Economics II(P) Cities and Regions Political Economy of 8 Economics II (P) the Environment Political Economy of 8 Economics II(P) Women Political Economy of 8 Economics II(P) III Elective 8 Economics II(P) Comprises two 4 unit half semester options from the Economics III pool of options. The Australian 12 Terminating course. May not be Economy taken by candidates who have already completed Economics II or n(P). Finance Finance 201: 8 Accounting IA or Second year full semester course. Corporate Finance I FinAcCon, Finance 201 cannot be counted Economics I and with Investments. Econometrics I Finance 202: 8 As for Finance 201 Finance 201 A major in Finance under section Corporate Finance II 10(iii) consists of Finance 201 and 202; plus one of the following: Finance 302,303 or 307; and either Finance 304 or 305 in 1997. In order to enrol in the third year courses Economics II must have been undertaken. Finance 202 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 201 Finance 201 and Finance 202 Honours comprises 202 a special honours seminar in semester 2. Finance 301: 8 Finance 201 and 202, Investments and and Economics II Portfolio Management Finance 302: 8 As for Finance 301 Derivative Securities Finance 303: 8 As for Finance 301 Corporate Control Finance 303 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 202 Finance 303 Finance 303 Honours comprises or 202 Honours,, and a special honours seminar. Economics II Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Finance 304: 8 As for Finance 301 Trading and Dealing in Securities Markets Finance 304 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 302, Finance 304 Finance 304 Honours comprises or 303 or 303 Honours, a special honours seminar. and Economics II Finance 305: 8 As for Finance 301 Advanced Corporate Finance Finance 307: 8 As for Finance 301 Financial Statement Analysis Finance IV Honours 24 Finance 202 Honours, Requirements for the Pass degree 303 Honours and 304 must be completed before entry Honours at credit level to this course. or with permission of Head of Department Geography GEOG 101F 6 Physical GEOG 102S 6 GEOG 101F Environmental and Human GEOG 211F 8 GEOG 101F or Candidates may count either the 102S Environmental courses or the GEOG 212S 8 GEOG 101F or Human courses. Senior 102S Geomorphology courses are GEOG 221F 8 GEOG 101F or Table B courses. 102S GEOG 222S 8 GEOG 101F or 102S GEOG 321F TBA GEOG 212S, 221F or 222S GEOG 322S TBA GEOG 212S, 221F or 222S Geography IV Credit results in 40 Honours Senior units of Geography in the same area (Environmental or Human) Government 101 Introduction to 6 A major in Government under Australian Politics section 10(iii) consists of two 102 Introduction to 6 junior courses (Government World Politics 101-110) and 4 full 103 Politics of World 6 semester options (except Development with the permission of the 104 Power in Society 6 Head of the Department). 105 Australian Politics 6 in Comparative Perspective 106 Political Change in 6 the Modern World 107 Global Politics and 6 the Environment 108 Environmental 6 Politics and Policy in Australia Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course 109 Ethnicity, 6 Nationalism and Citizenship 110 Comparative 6 Politics and Economic Change in East Asia

Options Human Rights and 8 For all Government Application may be made to the Australian Politics options: Head of Department for any Australian State 8 Two options from student enrolled in one or more Politics Government 101-110 options in Asian Economic Australian Political 8 History to take options in Asian and Electoral Politics without the usual Behaviour prerequisites. The Australian 8 Political Party System Religion in 8 Australian Politics Introduction to 8 International Politics Politics of 8 International Economic Relations The Superpowers and 8 After Peace Studies 8 Australian-Foreign 8 and Defence Policy International 8 Communism Politics of Globalism 8 The International 8 Security Problem in the Twentieth Century Politics and Society 8 Socialist and Labour 8 Politics Politics of 8 Information Australian Labour: 8 Politics and Culture Social Movements, 8 Politics and Identity Women and Politics 8 Japanese Politics 8 Government and 8 Politics of Modern China Politics of 8 Development Problems of Transition 8 in European Politics American Politics 8 Reform, Revolution and 8 Post-Communism Revolution, 8 Nationalism and Modernity Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Southeast Asian 8 For all Government Politics options: South Pacific Politics 8 Two options from Authoritarian Politics 8 Government 101-110 States and the Politics 8 of Economic Development Capitalism and 8 Democracy in East Asia The Comparative 8 Politics of Ethnic Conflict Northeast Asian 8 Politics: conflict and change Public Policy and 8 Administration Policy Analysis 8 Organisational 8 Analysis Comparative 8 Federalism Citizenship, Work 8 and Welfare The Politics of 8 Government-Business Relations in Australia Australian National 8 Internship Program Political Theory: 8 Classical Political Theory: 8 Early Modern Political Theory: 8 Modern Democratic Theory 8 Marxism 8 Ethics and Politics 8 Government II 8 Credit in the two Two options in Comprises special seminar. Honours Government 101-110 Government options completed. Government III 16 Credit in Government II Two options in Comprises special seminar. Honours Honours and two Government May be taken concurrently with options in Government Government II Honours with Faculty permission. Government IV Credit in Government III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours and two must be completed before entry options in Government to this course. Industrial Relations Macro Industrial 6 A major in Industrial Relations Relations I under section 10(ii.i) consists of Micro Industrial 6 Macro Industrial Macro and Micro Industrial Relations I Relations I Relations I and 8 half semester courses. Sociology of Industry 4 For all half semester and Labour courses in Industrial Labour History 4 Relations, Macro and Legal Aspects of 4 Micro Industrial Industrial Relations Relations I Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Economics of Labour 4 Markets Human Resource 4 Management Industrial Relations 4 Policy Work Safety 4 Comparative Industrial 4 Relations Organisational Analysis 4 and Behaviour Strategic Management 4 Strategic Human 4 Resource Management Discrimination and 4 As above plus Legal Equality in Aspects of Industrial Employment Relations Industrial Relations 4 Macro and Micro Practice Industrial Relations I and four 4-unit IR courses Industrial Relations 8 Credit in Macro and Four half semester Comprises honours seminar. II Honours Micro Industrial courses in Relations I Industrial Relations Industrial Relations 16 Credit in four half Four half semester Comprises Research Methods III Honours semester courses and courses in . and Writers on Management. Industrial Relations Industrial II Honours Relations Industrial Relations IV Credit in four half Requirements for the Pass degree semester courses and must be completed before entry Industrial Relations to this course. III Honours Marketing Marketing 201: 8 Economics I and Accounting IA Second year full semester course. Marketing Principles Econometrics I or FinAcCon A major in Marketing under Marketing 202: 8 Marketing 201 section 10(iii) consists of Consumer Behaviour and 203 Marketing 201, 202 and 203, Marketing 203: 8 Marketing 201 301, and one other level 3 full Marketing Research I and 202 semester course. Marketing 301: 8 Marketing 201, 202 Marketing Research II and 203, and Economics II Marketing 302: 8 As for Marketing 301 Marketing 301 Marketing., Communications Marketing 303: 8 As for Marketing 301 Marketing 301 Retail and Services Marketing Marketing 304: 8 As for Marketing 301 Marketing 301 New Products Marketing Marketing IV A major in Marketing Requirements for the Pass degree with an average grade must be completed before of Credit or better, plus entry to this course. Econometrics IIA and IIB or Adv Stats Methods 2 (offered by the School of Mathematics and ) Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Interdepartmental Communication and Critical Analysis 1A 6 Communication and Critical Analysis IB 6 Contemporary 8 Any 4 full semester Economics and first year courses Politics of South Asia Political Economy 8 Any 4 full semester of Women first year courses See individual course entries in Chapter 7 of this handbook.

Table B (See section 10 of the Senate resolutions) For the Bachelor or Economics degree, Table B consists of all courses not in Table A which are offered by the Faculties of Economics, Arts and Science. The courses Legal Institutions (12 units), Torts, Constitutional Law, Contracts, Administrative Law and Criminal Law (all 8 units) are also Table B courses, but are only available to students concurrently enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics and the Bachelor of Laws. The formal degree requirements for the BEc(SocSc). The BEc(SocSc) is designed as a general economics are found in the resolutions of the Senate and of the degree.It is not primarily for any particular profession Faculty, and in the attached tables of courses. You will or vocation. Nevertheless, there are some combinations find most details that concern you at the end of this which have a significant professional relevance. The chapter. first combination below, for example, would suit You will be required to complete the equivalent of students aiming for a career in commerce on the 20 full semester courses to qualify for the award of the personnel side of management: degree. Most courses available in the degree are of semester length, although some are full year courses. First Year At first year level, a full semester course, such as Ecs I or Ind. Rels Psych. 101 Economet.I* Economic History IA, has a unit value of 6, and a full I(SocSc)* Ind. Rels Psych. 102 year course, such as Economics I (Social Sciences) a Second Year unit value of 12. At second and third year levels, Ecs II or Ind. Rels Psych. 201 semester courses are worth 8 units and full year II(P)* Ind. Rels Psych. 202 courses 16 units. There are also some 4 unit courses. Third Year The unit value of all courses is shown in the table of Ecs IE* or Ind. Rels Psych. 301 courses for the BEc(SocSc) degree. 2 third yr Ind Rels Psych. 302 Most full-time students will enrol in four subjects (P)courses (48 units) in their first year. A typical progression over three years will see you enrolling in 8, then 6, then 6 If you plan to make your profession in secondary semester courses or equivalent (a total of 144units). If school teaching then the following pattern of courses you fail any courses then the task of completing the could be suitable: degree in the minimum time becomes more difficult. There are no specific courses which are compulsory. First Year You will have to do at least two years' study of Ecs I or Geog. 101F Soc. Anthrop. Psych. 101 Economics, and this will normally be either Economics KSocSc)* Geog.l02S 101* I and Economics II or Economics I (SocSc) and Second Year Economics II(P). In your first year, then, you will Ecs II or Geog. 201F Educ. 201 normally choose Economics I or Economics I (SocSc). II(P)* Geog. 202S Educ. 202 If you are a full-time student you will normally choose three other first year subjects. These can be any of the Third Year Table A courses listed at the end of this chapter. Ecs III* or Geog. 301F Educ. 301 Remember that you may also like to choose one course 2 third yr Geog. 302S Educ. 302 from Table B—courses from other faculties. If you (P)courses choose Economics I, then it will be sensible also to N.B. If taking Ecs II rather than II(P), substitute Economet. I choose Econometrics I, because it is a corequisite for for Psych. 101/102. Economics II and prerequisite for Economics III. By the end of your degree you will need to complete Other combinations may be just as valuable for two major sequences in subjects listed in Table A. teaching in primary or secondary schools; in fact the Table A contains information about what constitutes whole concept of an economics or general a major sequence of courses in a subject, including degree is especially suited for teaching. information on any course prerequisites. Examples of For a general economics degree which will provide such sequences are set out in the sample programs you with a strong core of subjects suitable for both below. The courses you choose in first year will usually private and public sector employment your choice give you adequate choice in later years. But be careful could finish up something like this: not to choose in your first year a combination of Table B courses and terminating or first-year-only Table A First Year courses. This would considerably narrow your choice Ecs I or Govt Ind. Rels Economet. I* in later years. KSocSc)* Govt Ind. Rels The BEc(SocSc) is designed specifically to offer a Second Year wide variety of possible combinations of courses. As Ecs II or Govt Ind. Rels with the BEc, however, it is even more important for II(P)* Govt Ind. Rels your own education and for your career prospects that you should complete as well as you can whatever Third Year courses you choose. If you aim merely to achieve bare Ecs III* or Govt Ind. Rels passes in your courses then you are likely to fail a 2 third yr Govt . Ind. Rels number of them—and your degree will be worth little (P)courses to you. *full year course A general degree which will give you a wide contact (3) A later year course, where it comprises a with a range of social sciences (and this is the half semester of study in the subject, shall have fundamental rationale for this degree) could involve a value of 4 units; where it comprises a full almost any combination of Table A and TableB courses. semester of study, a value of 8 units; and where The main determinant should be your interests and it comprises a full year of study, a value of 16 talents. Just two examples are given below, but the units. variety is much greater than this. 5. A candidate in any one year shall, except with the permission of the Faculty, enrol in the equivalent First Year of no more than nine and no less thanfour full semester Ecs I or Rel.St. 101 Soc.Anthrop. Ec. Hist. courses. I(SocSc)* Rel.St. 102 101* Ec. Hist. 6. Acandidatemaynot,exceptwiththepermission Second Year of the Faculty, enrol in a course unless the entry Ecs II or Rel.St. 201 Soc.Anthrop. requirement for that course is satisfied; an entry II(P)* Rel.St. 202 201 requirement may include the completion of a course Soc.Anthrop. at a specified level. 202 7. A candidate may not count the same course Third Year more than once towards the degree or count two Ecs III* or Rel.St. 203 Soc.Anthrop. courses which overlap substantially in content. 2 third yr Rel.St. 204 203 8. Where in the tables of courses referred to in (P)courses Soc.Anthrop. section 1 a course is designated a corequisite to another 210 course a candidate may, except with the permission of N.B. If taking; Ecs II, substitute Economet. I for Ec. Hist. the Faculty, enrol in the latter course only if he/she is concurrently enrolled in the corequisite course or has First Year already completed that course. Ecs I or Govt Psych. 101 Economet. I* I(SocSc)* Govt Psych. 102 9. Subject to the Senate resolutions concerning satisfactory progress and except with the permission Second Year of the Faculty, a candidate for the Pass degree must Ecs II or Govt Educ. 201 complete the requirements for the degree within ten II(P)* Govt Educ. 202 calendar years of first enrolment for the degree, and, Third Year in the case of the Honours degree within five calendar Govt Educ. 301 Ind. Rels years of first enrolment. Govt Educ. 302 Ind. Rels Pass degree In the examples of course structures provided above 10. In order to qualify for the award of the degree you should remember that you may choose a sequence a candidate shall complete courses equivalent of 20 of courses from either orthodox economics or political full semester courses having a total value of not less economy. You should remember, however, that if you than 144 units, which shall include: choose the sequence of Economics I, II and III you (i) Economics I or Economics I (Social should also include Econometrics I which is a Sciences) and Economics II or Economics corequisite for Economics II. H(P); (ii) a major in each of two subjects in Table A; or a double major in one of the subjects Resolutions of the Senate Economics (P), Government or Economic Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) History; 1. The courses which are available for the degree (iii) no more than 60 units at first year level; are set out in the table of courses attached to these and resolutions and in other tables approved by the Faculty. (iv) except with Faculty permission, no more 2. A candidate may be permitted by the Faculty to than 28 units in total from subjects listed count towards the degree a course or courses other in TableB. than those listed in the tables referred to in section 1. Except in the case of ll(ii), a major comprises a 3. Each course is designated as a first year course sequence of courses of not less than 44 units, which (by the Roman numeral I), or a later year course. shall includenotlessthan32unitsoflateryear courses, 4. (1) Each course available for the degree is as specified for each subject in Table A; a double major either a full year, full semester or half semester comprises a 44 unit major in a subject plus an additional course and is designated as having a unit value 16 units from specified later year courses in that as described in the table of courses. subject. (2) A first year course, where it comprises a Concurrent candidature for the degree of Bachelor of half semester of study in the subject, shall have Economics (Social Sciences) and Bachelor of Laws a value of 3 units; where it comprises a full 11. (i) A student may proceed concurrently as semester of study, a value of 6 units; and where a candidate for the degrees of Bachelor of it comprises a full year of study, a value of 12 Economics (Social Sciences) and Bachelor units. of Laws, and may receive credit for the courses Legal Institutions, Torts, Consti­ *full year course tutional Law, Contracts, Administrative Law and Criminal Law for the Bachelor degree may subsequently be admitted to candidature of Economics (Social Sciences) degree, for the Honours degree and may qualify for the award provided that the student may not count of the Honours degree upon completion of such any further courses from Table B; and additional requirements in such time as the Faculty provided that, with respect to section 5, may decide, provided that such a student may only be permission of both the Faculties of admitted to candidature for the Honours degree up to Economics and Law is required. three years after the award of the Pass degree. (ii) A student enrolled in a third year 18. A candidate who is qualified to enrol in two Honours course from Table A may fulfil fourth year honours courses may complete the final the requirement for a second major in the honours year in the two subjects in one year each or Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) complete a joint honours year in the two subjects in by taking a minimum 32 units of third one year. year level courses from Table A (inclusive 19. A fourth year joint honours course shall of Honours courses). comprise such parts of each of the related fourth year honours courses as may be decided by the Faculty. Honours degree 20. A candidate may not, except with the permission 12. The degree may be awarded with honours in: of the Faculty, repeat an honours course which he/ Economics she has discontinued or failed once. Economics (Social Sciences) 21. A candidate who does not complete an Honour s Economic History degree may be permitted by the Faculty to count Education towards the Pass degree any Honours courses Geography completed. Government 22. The Faculty may grant a candidate credit for Industrial Relations courses completed either at other institutions, or in Philosophy other faculties within the University of Sydney Psychology provided that all the following conditions are met: Religious Studies (i) the Faculty assesses the course or courses Social Anthropology to be equivalent to courses off ered by the Sociology. Faculty; 13. The degree may also be awarded with joint (ii) the courses are not counted towards honours in any two of the subjects in which honours another qualification; are available. (iii) in the case of courses completed at 14. There shall be three classes of honours, namely another institution, credit shall not be Class I, Class II and Class III and within Class II there given for more than 10 full semester shall be two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division courses, while credit may be granted for 2. any number of units for courses 15. If a student graduates with First Class Honours completed at the University of Sydney; in any honours subject or in any of the forms of joint (iv) credit shall not be given for courses honours and the Faculty decides that the student's completed ten or more years prior to the work is of sufficiently high merit, the student shall proposed year of enrolment. receive a bronze medal. 23. A student who was enrolled as a candidate for 16. A candidate may, except with faculty the degree prior to 1 January 1993 and who has not permission, enrol in a fourth year honours course only completed the requirements for the degree by 1 January on completion of requirements for the Pass degree 1997 shall be transferred to the unit structure which and on satisfying any other entry requirements for the took effect for commencing students from 1 January fourth year honours course. 1993. 17. A student who has been awarded the Pass

Table A: Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) (See section 1 of the Senate resolutions) Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Accounting Accounting IA 6 First year courses only available. Accounting IB 6 Accounting IA Financial Accounting 6 Terminating course. Cannot be Concepts counted with Accounting IA and IB. Management 6 Terminating course. Cannot be Accounting Concepts counted with Accounting IA and IB. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Commercial Law Commercial 6 Commercial Transactions A Transactions A cannot be counted with Legal Institutions. Commercial 6 Commercial Transactions B Transactions A Trade Practices and 8 Commercial Cannot be counted with deleted Consumer Law Transactions A courses Restrictive Trade Practices or Commercial Law IB. Econometrics Econometrics I 12 Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Mathematics First year course only available. Economic History Economic History IA 6 A major in Economic History Economic History IB 6 under section 10(iii) consists of Economic History IA and IB and 4 full semester courses other than those designated as honours courses (except with the permission of the Head of Department). Economic History II 8 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises an honours seminar Honours History IA and IB semester options and a research essay. in Economic History Economic History III 16 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises a year-long seminar Honours History II Honours semester options and a research essay. and in two full in Economic semester options in History Economic History Economic History IV Credit in Economic Requirements for the Pass degree History III Honours must be completed before entry and options to this course.

Options Economic 8 For all Economic History Candidates who have not Development semester courses completed the prerequisites for in Southeast Asia Economic History IA Economic History courses but Economic 8 and IB or History I or have completed 4 full semester Development of any 4 full semester first year courses may, with Modern Germany first year courses the permission of the Head of Economic 8 Department, take options in Development of Economic History. Modern Japan The Managerial Firm: 8 As above plus Economics II Evolution and or Economics II(P) Attributes Economic Develop­ 8 ment of Russia and Eastern Europe Economic Fluctuations 8 Economics I or Economics I (Social Sciences) or with the consent of the Head of the Department of Economic History Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite. Corequisite value course course Economic History of 8 For all Economic History the Mediterranean semester courses Region Economic History IA Social Aspects of 8 and IB or History I or Industrialisation in any 4 full semester the United States first year courses Economic and Social 8 Development of Modern France Economic and Social 8 History of Minority Groups American Economic 8 History 1607-1865 American Economic 8 History 1865-1970 Early Australian 8 Economic History Modern Australian 8 Economic History History of the Island 8 Pacific since the mid-1800s The Historical 8 Development of the Chinese Economy Asia-Pacific: Growth 8 and Change Strategy and Growth 8 of Big Business Urban History 8 Historiography 8 Honours course. Pass student may take with permission of Head of Department. Topics in Modern 8 European Social History History of Modern 8 European Expansion Theory and Practice of Imperialism Economics Economics I 12 Assumed knowledge: 2-unit Mathematics Economics II 16 Economics I or Econometrics I Economics I (Social 'Sciences) and successful completion of a qualifying examination for Economics II Economics II 24 Credit in Economics I Econometrics I Honours Economics III 16 Economics II and Comprises 4 options or Econometrics I equivalent. Economics III 32 Credit in Economics II Honours Honours Economics III 16 Economics III or Comprises 4 options or Additional Economics III equivalent other than those Honours for Economics III Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Economics III 8 Economics III Comprises 2 options or Supplementary equivalent other than those taken for Economics III. Economics IV Credit in Economics III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours must be completed before entry to this course. Economics I (Social 12 Sciences) Economics II(P) 16 Economics I (Social A major in Economics (Social Sciences) or Economics Sciences) under section 10(ii) I and successful consists of Economics I (Social completion of a Sciences), Economics II(P) and qualifying examination two full semester 8 unit courses for Economics II(P) courses from the six full semester third year (P) courses listed in this table. Economics II(P) 24 Credit in Economics I Honours (Social Sciences) Economics II(P) 8 Credit in Economics II(P) Honours only Australia and World 8 Economics II(P) The six Economics (P) 8 unit Capitalism courses are third year courses. Economic Conflict and 8 Economics II(P) the State Political Economy of 8 Economics II(P) Cities and Regions Political Economy of 8 Economics II(P) the Environment Political Economy of 8 Economics II(P) Women Political Economy of 8 Economics II(P) Development Economics III Elective 8 Economics II(P) Comprises two 4 unit half semester options from the Economics III pool of options Economics III(P) 8 Credit in Economics II(P) Honours only Economics IV(Social Credit in Economics III(P) Requirements for the Pass degree Sciences) Honours only and three must be completed before third year Economics entry to this course. (P) courses The Australian 12 Terminating course. Economy May not be taken by candidates who have already completed Economics II or II(P). Education Education 201 8 One of Philosophy 101 and Education 202 Education IV may be undertaken 102, Psychology 101, in either the School of Social Anthropology 101 Educational Psychology, and 102 or Sociology 101 Measurement and Technology Education 202 8 As for Education 201 Education 201 or the School of Social and Policy Studies in Education. Education 290 8 Credit in one of the above Education 201 Not required for Honours in and 202 Social and Policy Studies in Education. Education 301 8 Education 201 and 202 Education 302 Education 302 8 As for Education 301 Education 301 Education 390 8 Credit in Education Education 301 Not required for Honours in 201, 202 and 290 and 302 Social and Policy Studies in Education. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Education IV Credit in Education 201, Students require permission of 202,301, 302 and 390 the Head of the Department before enrolling in this course. Requirements for the Pass degree must be completed before entry to this course. Geography GEOG 101F 6 Physical GEOG 102S 6 GEOG 101F Environmental and Human GEOG 2llF 8 GEOG 101F or Candidates may count either the 102S Environmental courses or the GEOG 212S 8 GEOG 101F or Human courses. Senior 102S Geomorphology courses are GEOG 221F 8 GEOG 101F or Table B courses. 102S GEOG 222S 8 GEOG 101F or 102S GEOG 321F TBA GEOG 212S, 221F or 222S GEOG 322S TBA GEOG 212S, 221F or 222S Geography IV Credit results in 40 Honours Senior units of Geography in the same area (Environmental or Human) Government 101 Introduction to 6 A major in Government under Australian Politics section 10(iii) consists of two 102 Introduction to 6 junior courses (Government World Politics 101-110) and 4 full semester 103 Politics of World 6 options (except with the Development permission of the Head of the 104 Power in Society 6 Department). 105 Australian Politics 6 in Comparative Perspective 106 Political Change 6 in the Modern World 107 Global Politics and 6 the Environment 108 Environmental 6 Politics and Policy in Australia 109 Ethnicity, 6 Nationalism and Citizenship 110 Comparative 6 Politics and Economic Change in East Asia

Options Human Rights and 8 For all Government Application may be made to the Australian Politics options: Head of Department for any Australian State 8 Two options from student enrolled in one or more Politics Government 101-110 options in Asian Economic Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Australian Political 8 For all Government History to take options in Asian and Electoral options: Politics without the usual Behaviour Two options from prerequisites. The Australian 8 Government 101-110 Political Party System Religion in 8 Australian Politics Introduction to 8 International Politics Politics of 8 International Economic Relations The Superpowers and 8 After Peace Studies 8 Australian Foreign 8 and Defence Policy International 8 Communism Politics of Globalism 8 The International 8 Security Problem in the Twentieth Century Politics and Society 8 Socialist and Labour 8 Politics Politics of ' 8 Information Australian Labour: 8 Politics and Culture Social Movements, 8 Politics and Identity Women and Politics 8 Japanese Politics 8 Government and 8 Politics of Modern China Politics of 8 Development Problems of Transition 8 Politics I in European Politics American Politics 8 Reform, Revolution and 8 Post-Communism Revolution, 8 Nationalism and Modernity Southeast Asian 8 Politics South Pacific Politics 8 Authoritarian Politics 8 States and the Politics 8 of Economic Development Capitalism and 8 Democracy in East Asia The Comparative 8 Politics of Ethnic Conflict Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite

value course course ■ Northeast Asian 8 For all Government Politics: conflict options: and change Two options from Public Policy and 8 Government 101-110 Administration Policy Analysis 8 Organisational 8 Analysis Comparative 8 Federalism Citizenship, Work 8 and Welfare The Politics of 8 Government-Business Relations in Australia Australian National 8 Internship Program Political Theory: 8 Classical Political Theory: 8 Early Modern Political Theory: 8 Modern Democratic Theory 8 Marxism 8 Ethics and Politics 8 Government II 8 Credit in two Two options in Comprises a special seminar. Honours Government 101-110 Government options completed Government III 16 Credit in Government Two options in Comprises a special seminar. Honours II Honours and two Government Government III Honours may options in Government be taken concurrently with Government II Honours with Faculty permission. Government IV Credit in Government III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours and options must be completed before entry to this course. Industrial Relations Macro Industrial 6 Relations I Micro Industrial 6 Macro Industrial Relations I Relations I Sociology of Industry 4 For all half semester A major in Industrial Relations and Labour courses in Industrial under section 10(ii) consists of Labour History 4 Relations, Macro and Macro and Micro Industrial Legal Aspects of 4 Micro Industrial Relations I and 8 half semester Industrial Relations Relations I courses. Economics of Labour 4 Markets Human Resource 4 Management Industrial Relations 4 Policy Work Safety 4 Comparative Industrial 4 Relations Organisational Analysis 4 and Behaviour Strategic Management 4 Senate resolutions Taculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Strategic Human 4 Resource Management Discrimination and 4 As above plus Legal Equality in Aspects of Industrial Employment Relations Industrial Relations 4 Macro and Micro Practice Industrial Relations I and four 4-unit IR courses Industrial Relations 8 Credit in Macro and Four half semester Comprises honours seminar. II Honours Micro Industrial courses in Relations I Industrial Relations Industrial Relations 16 Credit in four half Four half semester Comprises Research Methods and III Honours semester courses and courses in Writers on Management. Industrial Relations II . Industrial Honours Relations Industrial Relations Credit in four half Requirements for the Pass degree rv semester courses and must be completed before entry Industrial Relations III to this course. Honours Philosophy Philosophy 101 6 Intending Honours student Philosophy 102 6 should consult the Head of Department. Philosophy 201 8 Philosophy 101 and 102 Philosophy 202 8 Philosophy 201 Pass candidates may take up to 2 full semester courses per year in Philosophy 301 8 Philosophy 201 and 202 second and third year. Philosophy 302 8 Philosophy 301 Philosophy IV Credits in Philosophy Consult Head of Department. 201,202.301 and 302 Requirements for the Pass degree and 2 other full must be completed before entry semester courses to this course. Psychology Psychology 101F 6 Psychology 102S 6 Psychology 101F Psychology 201F 8 Psychology 101F and 102S Psychology 202S 8 Psychology 201F Psychology 101F and 102S Psychology 301F TBA Psychology 202S Note Honours requirement in departmental entry. Psychology 302S TBA Psychology 202S Psychology 4 Credit average in Requirements for the Pass degree Psychology 201F, 202S, must be completed before entry 301F and 302S and to this course. specified options in 301F and 302S Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Religious Studies 204 8 Religious Studies 203 Religious Studies 290 8 Credit in Religious Religious Studies Candidates intending to proceed Studies 101 and 102 201 and 202 to IV Honours must take Religious Studies 201,202,290, 203,204 and 390. Religious Studies 390 8 Credit in Religious Religious Studies Studies 201,202 301 and 302 and 290 Religious Studies IV Credit in Religious Requirements for the Pass degree Studies 203,204 must be completed before entry and 390 to this course. Social Anthropology Social Anthropology 12 101 Social Anthropology 8 Social Anthropology 101 Pass candidates may count up to 201 2 full semester courses per year in second and third year. Social Anthropology 8 Social Anthro­ 202 pology 201 Social Anthropology 8 Credit in Social Candidates intending to proceed 210 Anthropology 101 to Social Anthropology IV must Social Anthropology 8 Social Anthropology take 201,202, 210,203,204 203 201 and 202 and 390. Social Anthropology 8 Social Anthro­ 204 pology 203 Social Anthropology 8 Credit in 201,202 and 390 210 Social Anthropology Credit in Social Anthro­ Requirements for the Pass degree IV pology units specified must be completed before entry for entry to Honours to this course. Anthropology IV Sociology Sociology 101 12 Admission may be subject to a quota. Sociology 201 8 Sociology 101 Sociology 202 8 Sociology 201 Sociology 290 8 Credit in Sociology 101 Sociology 201 and 202 Sociology 301 8 Sociology 201 and 202 Sociology 302 8 Sociology 301 Sociology 390 8 Credit average in Sociology 301 Sociology 201 and 202 and 302 Sociology 391 8 Sociology 390 Sociology IV Credit in Sociology Requirements for the Pass degree 301,302,390 and 391 must be completed before entry to this course. Social Policy and 16 Sociology 201 and 202 Administration 301 Interdepartmental Communication and Critical Analysis 1A 6 Communication and Critical Analysis IB 6 Methods and Statistics 6 Comprises Streams A and B. Not in Social Science currently available. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Contemporary 8 Any 4 full semester Economics and first year courses Politics of South Asia Political Economy 8 Any 4 full semester of Women first year courses

Table B (See section 10 of the Senate resolutions) For the Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) degree, Table B consists of all courses not in Table A which are offered by the Faculties of Economics, Arts and Science. The courses Legal Institutions (12 units), Torts, Constitutional Law, Contracts, Administrative Law and Criminal Law (all 8 units) are also Table B courses, but are only available to students concurrently enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) and Bachelor of Laws.

Courses in Agricultural Economics, Finance and Marketing, and second and third year Accounting, Commercial Law, Econometrics and Operations Research are not available in the Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences). The formal rules for the BCom degree are to be found wish) in your second year. Details on what constitutes in the resolutions of the Senate and of the Faculty, and a major in each subject will be found in Table A, and in the attached tables of courses. You will find most of in the separate chapters on each department. the detailed information at the end of this chapter. The Courses in Finance and Marketing begin in second purpose of the following discussion is to give you an year with prerequisite courses having been completed introduction to the structure of the degree and to the in first year. Third year courses in these subjects will extent of choice available. also require some additional study of Economics at You will be required to complete the equivalent of second year level. Human Resource Management 22 full semester courses to qualify for the award of the builds on the general first year courses in Industrial degree. Most courses available in the degree are of Relations. semester length, although some are full year courses. Computer Science is available as a Table A subject. At first year level, a full semester course, such as However, it is not necessary to take this subject in Accounting IA, has a unit value of 6, and a full year order to gain knowledge and experience of computers course, such as Economics I or Econometrics I, a unit and their business applications. All students who take value of 12. At second and third year levels, semester courses in accounting and econometrics, for example, courses are worth 8 units and full year courses 16 will do projects and exercises on a regular basis in the units. There are also some 4 unit courses. The unit Faculty's computer laboratory. Computer Science is value pf all courses is shown in the table of courses for taught in the Faculty of Science, and the courses are the Bachelor of Commerce. not designed primarily with a view to specific business applications. Most students expect to complete their degree in three years. In first year, full-time students should Students planning to satisfy the entry requirements enrol in the equivalent of 8 semester courses in four of the Australian Society of Certified Practising subjects (48 units). In second year, most of you will Accountants or the Institute of Chartered Accountants enrol in the equivalent of 7 or 8 later year semester in Australia should include in their degree a prescribed courses (56 or 64 units), leaving 56 and 48 units set of courses, including a major in Accounting and a respectively to complete the degree in third year. sequence of four semester courses in Commercial Law. It is recommended that the sequence be Thus, your degree will comprise a total of 160 units. If completed as set out below. You are left with six you choose to complete a fifth first year subject, elective semester courses (or their equivalent), so that normally in your second year of enrolment, you will you can combine accounting with a wide variety of qualify with 156 units. Any failures in courses will other subjects: make the task of completing in three years considerably more difficult. Note that you cannot, without special First Year permission, enrol in more than 9 semester courses, or Ecs I* Acc. IA Economet. I* Comm. Trans A their equivalent, in any year. Acc. IB Comm. Trans B The compulsory courses in the degree are Second Year Accounting IA and IB, Economics I or Economics I Elective Man. Acc. A Finance 201 Corp. Law (Social Sciences) and Econometrics I. Note that Elective Fin. Acc. A Elective Economics I, rather than Economics I (Social Sciences), is a prerequisite for a number of later year courses in Third Year Elective Fin. Acc. B Auditing Pr. Tax. Law other subjects, such as Econometrics, Operations Elective Man. Acc. B Tax. Bus. Ent. Research, Marketing and Finance. Your choice of a fourth first year subject is entirely up to you. The other Important note: among the electives, a second Table Table A subjects taught at first year level are A major must be completed. If that major is to be a Commercial Law, Computer Science, Economic subject commencing in first year, other than History, Government, Industrial Relations, Commercial Law, Economics or Econometrics, you Communication and Critical Analysis and The should follow Program 1, starting Commercial Law in Australian Economy (a terminating course). You can second year. Commercial Law can be completed as a also choose a Table B subject. However, you must major under either program. complete two majors from Table A subjects, so if you choose a Table B subject you may be restricting the There are a number of courses available to you that choice of subjects in which you major. can considerably enrich your degree and broaden Some majors start at second year level, allowing your qualification. Aside from those already you to progress from one of the compulsory first year mentioned you might consider, for example, a subjects to another subject, and to count that sequence concentration on Asian studies. In second and third as a major. In the case of Commercial Law, six semester courses in the subject are required for a major, but these can be completed over two years, starting (if you *full year course within the Departments of Government and Economic 7. A candidate may not count the same course History, and you can take a combination of these more than once towards the degree or count two whether or not you have completed a first year in courses which overlap substantially in content. those subjects. If you want to take this concentration 8. Where in the tables of courses referred to in on Asian studies further, you can also study an Asian section 1 a course is designated a corequisite to another language, such as Japanese, although you should be course a candidate may, except with the permission of aware that study of such a language, particularly if it the Faculty, enrol in the latter course only if he/she is is new to you, can be very time-consuming. It is concurrently enrolled in the corequisite course or has permitted to count up to six full semester courses in a already completed that course. sequence from Table B towards the BCom. 9. Subject to the Senate resolutions concerning To some extent, you can also 'mix and match' in satisfactory progress and except with the permission your choice of electives. For example, a second year of of the Faculty, a candidate for the Pass degree must study in Economics will give you a far better complete the requirements for the degree within ten understanding of the basic analytical tools and calendar years of first enrolment for the degree, and, concepts of economics; courses in government and in the case of the Honours degree, within five calendar business and business history are available to broaden years of first enrolment. your understanding of the world of business; and there are specialised options in Accounting and Pass degree Commercial Law for you to choose from. You should 10. In order to qualify for the award of the degree check from Table A the necessary prerequisites and a candidate shall complete the equivalent of 22 full corequisites for any later year elective courses. semester courses having a total value of not less than 156 units, which shall include: (i) not less than 112 units from Table A; Resolutions of the Senate (ii) a major in each of two subjects listed in Bachelor of Commerce Table A; 1. (1) The courses which are available for the (iii) no more than 60 units at first year level; degree are set out in the table of courses attached (iv) 12 units at first year level in each of to these resolutions and in other tables approved Accounting, Econometrics and Econo­ by the Faculty. mics or Economics (Social Sciences); and (2) Inrespectof each course the Faculty may (v) except with Faculty permission, no more designate prerequisite courses, corequisite than 44 units in total from subjects listed courses and specific entry requirements and in Table B. such information shall be added to the table of Except in the case of 11 (ii) a major comprises a sequence courses for the degree. of courses of not less than 44 units, which shall include 2. A candidate may be permitted by the Faculty to not less than 32 units of later year courses, as specified count towards the degree a course or courses other for each subject in Table A. than those listed in the tables referred to in section 1. Concurrent candidature for the degrees of Bachelor of 3. Each course is designated as a first year course Commerce and Bachelor of Laws (by the Roman numeral I), or a later year course. 11. (i) A student may proceed concurrently as 4. (1) Each course available for the degree is a candidate for the degrees of Bachelor of either a full year, full semester or half semester Commerce and Bachelor of Laws, and course and is designated as having a unit value may receive credit for the courses Legal as described in the tables of courses. Institutions, Torts, Constitutional Law, (2) A first year course, where it comprises a Contracts, Administrative Law and half semester of study in the subject, shall have Criminal Law for the Bachelor of a value of 3 units; where it comprises a full Commerce degree, provided that the semester of study, a value of 6 units; and where student may not count any further it comprises a full year of study, a value of 12 courses from Table B; and provided that, units. with respect to section 5, permission of (3) A later year course, where it comprises a both the Faculties of Economics and Law half semester of study in the subject, shall have is required. a value of 4 units; where it comprises a full (ii) A student enrolled in a third year semester of study, a value of 8 units; and where Honours course from Table A may fulfil it comprises a full year of study, a value of 16 the requirement for a second major in the units. Bachelor of Commerce by taking a 5. A candidate in any one year shall, except with minimum 32 units of third year level the permission of the Faculty, enrol in the equivalent courses from Table A (inclusive of of no more than nine and no less thanfour full semester Honours courses). courses. 6. A candidate may not, except with the permission Concurrent candidature for the degrees of Bachelor of of the Faculty, enrol in a course unless the entry Engineering and Bachelor of Commerce requirement for that course is satisfied; an entry 11a. (1) Students who have completed one or requirement may include the completion of a course two years of candidature towards.the degree of at a specified level. Bachelor of Engineering may be admitted by the Faculty of Economics to candidature for the (i) the Faculty assesses the course or courses combined degrees of Bachelor of Engineering to be equivalent to courses offered by the and Bachelor of Commerce. Faculty; (2) Such students shall comply with such (ii) the courses are not counted towards requirements for the combined degrees as may another qualification; be prescribed in the resolutions of the Senate (iii) in the case of courses completed at relating to the two degrees and consequential another institution, credit shall not be resolutions of the faculties. given for more than the equivalent of 10 Honours degree full semester courses, while credit may 12. The degree may be awarded with honours in: be granted for any number of units for Accounting courses completed at the University of Sydney; Computer Science (iv) credit shall not be given for courses Economics completed ten or more years prior to the Econometrics proposed year of enrolment. Economic History Finance Government Resolutions of the Faculty Industrial Relations Bachelor of Engineering/Bachelor of Commerce Marketing 1. (1) Pursuant to Section IIA of the resolutions Operations Research. of the Senate governing the degree of Bachelor 13. The degree may also be awarded with joint of Commerce, a candidate who has completed honours in any two of the subjects in which honours one or two years of candidature towards the are available. degree of Bachelor of Engineering may be 14. There shall be three classes of honours, namely admitted by the Faculty of Economics to Class I, Class II and Class III and within Class II there concurrent candidature for the double degrees shall be two divisions, namely Division 1 and Divi­ of Bachelor of Engineering and Bachelor of sion 2. Commerce provided the candidate has: 15. If a student graduates with First Class Honours (a) gained credit towards the degree of in any honours subject or in any of the forms of joint Bachelor of Engineering for not less than honours and the Faculty decides that the student's 48 units; and work is of sufficiently high merit, the student shall (b) except with the permission of the Dean receive a bronze medal. of the Faculty of Economics, completed 16. A candidate may, except with Faculty at full pass level or better at the first permission, enrol in a fourth year honours course only examination all courses attempted. on completion of requirements for the Pass degree (2) The University may determine a quota and on satisfying any other entry requirements for the for admission to the degree under this section fourth year honours course. of the resolutions and the Faculty, in considering 17. A student who has been awarded the Pass applicants for admission to candidature, may degree may subsequently be admitted to candidature take account of this quota and will select in for the Honours degree and may qualify for the award applicants who are most meritorious of the Honours degree upon completion of such in terms of the eligibility criteria. additional requirements in such time as the Faculty 2. (1) To qualify for the award of the pass may decide, provided that such a student may only be degree under this section of the resolutions admitted to candidature for the Honours degree up to candidates shall complete, after admission to three years after the award of the Pass degree. candidature,andwithinfouryearsof enrolment, 18. A candidate who is qualified to enrol in two the equivalent of not less than fifteen full fourth year honours courses may complete the final semester courses approved by the Faculty honours year in the two subjects in one year each or provided the courses shall include— complete a joint honours year in the two subjects in (a) 12 units in Accounting; one year. (b) 12 units in Economics or Economics 19. A fourth year joint honours course shall (Social Sciences); comprise such parts of each of the related fourth year (c) 12 units in Econometrics; honours courses as may be decided by the Faculty. (d) no more than 48 units at first year level; 20. A candidate may not, except with the permission and of the Faculty, repeat an honours course which he/ (e) a major in each of two subjects in Table she has discontinued or failed once. A; or one major and one minor from 21. A candidate who does not complete an Honours subjects in Table A; degree may be permitted by the Faculty to count and, except as provided in subsection (4), for towards the Pass degree any honours courses the purposes of satisfying the minimum completed. requirements for the degree, shall not include 22. The Faculty may grant a candidate credit for any of the courses listed in Table B. courses completed either at other institutions, or in A major in a subject comprises a sequence other faculties within the University of Sydney of courses of not less than 44 units, as described provided that all the following conditions are met: for each subject in Table A; a minor in a subject comprises a sequence of courses in a subject of (iii) at least 72 senior units from the subject not less than 28 units, including 12 units in the areas specified in the BCom Regulations subject at first year level and 16 units from later including two majors. year courses required to complete a major in 3. Candidates may not enrol in any course which that subject. is substantially the same as one they have already (2) The Faculty will not normally approve passed or in which they are concurrently enrolled. an enrolment in the degree which, together 4. Candidates will be under the general with the candidate's concurrent enrolment for supervision of the Faculty of Science until the end of the degreeof Bachelor of Engineering, amounts the year in which they complete 144 units. After that to more than 66 units. they will be under the general supervision of the (3) To qualify for the award of the Honours Faculty of Economics. General supervision covers all degree under this section a candidate shall, in areas of policy and procedure affecting candidates addition to completing the requirements under such as degree rules, course nomenclature, enrolment subsection (1), complete any other entry procedures and the Dean to whom reference is to be requirements for the four th year honours course made at any given time. and then complete the fourth year honours 5. Candidates will, in each of the first three years course within one further full-time year of of enrolment, enrol in at least 36 units of courses from enrolment in the degree of Bachelor of the Table of courses associated with section 3 of the Commerce, or with the permission of the Dean Resolutions of the Senate for the Bachelor of Science of the Faculty of Economics with the degree. concurrence of the Dean of the Faculty of 6. Candidates who are qualified to do so may Engineering, over two years of concurrent complete an Honours year. enrolment in the degrees of Bachelor of 7. Candidates may abandon the combined Engineering and Bachelor of Commerce. program and elect to complete either a BSc or a BCom (4) The Dean of the Faculty of Economics, in accordance with the Regulations governing these with the concurrence of the Dean of the Faculty degrees. of Engineering, may permit a candidate to 8. The Deans of Economics and Science shall jointly include within the 15 full semester courses exercise authority in any matter concerning the referred to in subsection (1) a course or courses combined degree program not otherwise dealt within not listed in Table A but which is a core the Resolutions of the Senate or these Resolutions. requirement for a branch or specialisation of the degree of Bachelor of Engineering. Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Commerce (5) Subject to subsection (6), a candidate BA/BCom joint Resolutions of the Faculties of Arts shall not be awarded the degree until the and Economics candidate has also qualified for the award of 1. Candidature for the combined program is full- the degree of Bachelor of Engineering. time. (6) A candidate who ceases to be a candidate 2. Candidates qualify for the combined degrees for the degree of Bachelor of Engineering and by completing 240 units including: who has not been awarded that degree, shall be (i) 12 junior units in each of Accounting, eligible for the award of the degree of Bachelor Econometrics and Economics; of Commerce on completing such additional (ii) at least 72 senior units from Part A of the requirements as the Faculty of Economics may Table of Courses for the BA including a determine. major; (iii) at least 72 senior units from the subject Bachelor of Science/Bachelor of Commerce areas specified in the BCom regulations BSc/BCom joint Resolutions of the Faculties of including two majors. Science and Economics 3. Candidates may not enrol in any course which These Resolutions should be read in conjunction with is substantially the same as one they have already the Resolutions of the Senate governing candidature passed. for the degrees of Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of 4. Candidates will be under the general Commerce. supervision of the Faculty of Arts until the end of the 1. Candidature for the combined program is full- year in which they complete 144 units. After that they time. will be under the general supervision of the Faculty of 2. Candidates qualify for the combined degrees Economics. General supervision covers all areas of by completing 240 units including: policy and procedure affecting candidates, such as (i) in the first three years of enrolment, 12 degree rules, course nomenclature, enrolment junior units in each of Accounting, procedures and the Dean to whom reference is to be Econometrics and Economics and 12 made at any given time. units from the Science Discipline Areas 5. Candidates who are qualified to do so may of Mathematics and Statistics; complete an Honours year. (ii) at least 72 senior and intermediate units 6. Candidates may abandon the combined from courses in the BSc taken in program and elect to complete either a BCom or a BA accordance with the Regulations for the in accordance with the Regulations governing these degree of Bachelor of Science; degrees. 7. The Deans of Economics and Arts shall jointly exercise authority in any matter concerning the combined degree programnototherwisedealtwith in the Resolutions of the Senate or these Resolutions.

Table A: Bachelor Of Commerce (See section 1 of Senate resolutions) Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Accounting 101 Accounting IA 6 Compulsory course. 102 Accounting IB 6 Accounting IA Compulsory course. 201 Management 8 Accounting IA and IB Econometrics I A major in Accounting under Accounting A section 10(ii) consists of 202 Financial 8 Accounting IA and IB Econometrics I Accounting IA. and IB, Accounting A Management Accounting A, 301 Financial 8 Financial Financial Accounting A, and Accounting B Accounting A any two of Financial 302 Management 8 Management Accounting A Accounting B, Accounting B Management Accounting B, 303 Financial Statement 8 Finance 201 and Financial Statement Analysis Analysis Financial and Auditing. Accounting A 304 Auditing 8 Accounting IA and IB Financial Accounting B Accounting IV Consult Department Requirements for the Pass degree mustbe completed before entry to this course. Agricultural Economics Agricultural 12 Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Economics I Mathematics Production Economics 8 Economics II A major in Agricultural Commodity Price 8 Economics II Economics under section 10(ii) Analysis ' consists of Agricultural Econ­ Applied Marketing 8 Economics II omics I, Production Economics, Agricultural and 8 , Economics II Commodity Price Analysis, and Resource Policy any two of Agricultural and Applied Commodity 8 Economics II Resource Policy, Applied Trade Commodity Trade, Natural Natural Resource 8 Economics II Resource Economics and Economics Applied Marketing. Commercial Law Commercial 6 Commercial Transactions A may Transactions A not be counted with Legal Institutions. Commercial 6 Transactions B Trade Practices and 8 Commercial Cannot be counted with deleted Consumer Law Transactions A courses Restrictive Trade Practices and Commercial Law IB. Corporations Law 8 Commercial Transactions A Principles of Taxation 8 Commercial A major in Commercial Law Law Transactions A under section 10(ii) consists of Corporations Law Commercial Transactions A, Taxation of 8 Commercial Principles of Corporations Law, Principles Business Entities Transactions A Taxation Law of Taxation Law, Taxation of Corporations Law Business Entities and two additional courses in Commercial Law. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Bankruptcy 8 Commercial and Insolvency Transactions A Corporations Law Stock Markets and 8 Commercial Derivatives Law Transactions A Corporations Law Finance Law 8 Commercial Transactions A . Computer Science COMP101F 6 Intro. Programming COMP 191F 6 Econometrics I Intro. Programming (Advanced) COMP 102S 6 COMP 101 A major in Computer Science Intro Computer under section 10(ii) consists of Science or two first year courses (12 units; COMP 192S 6 COMP 191/101 with without including COMP100), Intro. Computer sufficient merit four second year courses (16 Science (Advanced) units) and four third year COMP 201F 4 COMP 102/192 courses (16 units). Computer Systems COMP 291F 4 COMP 192/102 with Computer Systems sufficient merit (Advanced) COMP202F 4 COMP 102/192 Design and Data Structures COMP 292F 4 COMP 192/102 with Students who wish to be eligible Design and Data sufficient merit to do Computer Science Structures (Advanced) Honours and to join the COMP 203S 4 COMP 202/292 and Computer Science Society must Languages and Logic Econometrics I or complete 24 units of Senior Discrete Maths Computer Science courses. COMP 293S 4 COMP 292/202 with Students are strongly advised Languages and Logic sufficient merit and to include in their selection one (Advanced) Econometrics I or of the 'project' courses Discrete Maths COMP321-325. COMP 204S 4 COMP 202/292 Programming Practice COMP294S 4 COMP 292/202 with Programming Practice , sufficient merit (Advanced) COMP 301F 4 As for COMP 203S and Algorithms 8 units of Intermediate Econometrics or MATH/STAT COMP 302F 4 As for COMP 301F and Artificial Intelligence COMP 204/294 and COMP 203/293 COMP 303S 4 COMP 201/291, Computer COMP 202/292 and Architecture COMP 203/293 COMP304S 4 COMP 204/294, Computer Graphics COMP 202/292, Econometrics I or MATH 101/191 and 8 units of Intermediate Econometrics or MATH/STAT Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course COMP 305S 4 COMP 202/292 Database Systems COMP 306F 4 COMP 203/293, Logic Programming COMP 202/292 and 8 units of Intermediate Econometrics or MATH/STAT COMP 307F 4 COMP 204/294, Networked Systems COMP 201/291 and COMP 202/292 COMP 308F 4 COMP 204/294 and Object-Oriented COMP 202/292 Systems COMP309F 4 COMP 204/294, Operating Systems COMP 201/291 and COMP 202/292 COMP 310F 4 COMP 202/292 and Software Engineering COMP 204/294 COMP 311S 4 COMP 203/292 and 8, Theory of units of Intermediate Computation Econometrics or MATH/STAT COMP312S 4 COMP 204/294, User Interfaces COMP 202/292 and COMP 203/293 COMP 321S 4 COMP 301 Algorithmic Systems Project COMP 322S 4 COMP 309 Computer Systems Project COMP 323S 4 COMP 302 Intelligence Systems Project COMP324S 4 COMP 310 Large-Scale Software • Project COMP 325S 4 COMP 308 Product Development Project Computer Science 16 units of Intermediate Honours and 24 units of Senior Computer Science at Credit level or better. A third year mathematics course is also recommended Econometrics Econometrics I 12 Compulsory course. Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Mathematics. 201 Econometrics IIA 8 Econometrics I 202 Econometrics IIB 8 Econometrics IIA A major in Econometrics under section 10(ii) consists of Econo­ metrics I, IIA, IIB, IIIA and one other full semester course. 301 Econometrics IIIA 8 Econometrics IIA 351 Operations 8 Econometrics IIA Candidates intending to take Research A Econometrics IV must complete all core Econometrics courses and 302 and 321. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course 352 Operations 8 Operations Candidates intending to take Research B Research A Operations Research IV must complete all core Operations Research courses and 321. 302 Applied 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics A major in Operations Research Econometrics IIIA under section 10(ii) consists of Econometrics I, IIA, IIB and Operations Research A and B. 303 Forecasting for 8 Econometrics IIA Economics and Business 304 Sample Design 8 Econometrics IIA and Analysis 321 Statistical 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics Modelling IIIA or Operations Research A 322 Numerical 8 Econometrics IIB Analysis 323 Decision Theory 8 Econometrics IIB 324 Special Topic 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics IV Credit average in 4 Requirements for the Pass degree semester courses at 300 must be completed before entry level including 301,302 BCom into this course. and 321 or with permission of Head of Department Operations Research Credit average in 4 Requirements for the Pass degree IV semester courses at 300 must be completed before entry level including 321,351 to this course. and 352, or with permission of Head of Department 271 Management of 8 Accounting IA and IB, A major in Management Science Information Systems Econometrics I and under Section 10(ii) consists of Economics I Econometrics I and the sequence 272 Management 8 As for 271 of courses 271,272,371 and Decision Making 372. These four courses are not 371 Resource 8 271. and 272 available in 1995. Students who Allocation and wish to take only part of the Planning in Business sequence of courses in 372 Operations 8 271 and 272 371 Management Science should Management apply to the Head of the Department of Econometrics for any exemption from the stated corequisites and prerequisites. Economic History Economic History IA 6 A major in Economic History Economic History IB 6 under section 10(iii) consists of Economic History IA and IB and 4 full semester courses other than those designated as honours courses (except with the permission of the Head of Department). Economic History II 8 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises an honours seminar Honours History IA and IB semester options and a research essay. in Economic History Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Economic History III 16 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises a year-long seminar Honours History II Honours semester options and a research essay. and in two full in Economic semester options in History Economic History Economic History IV Credit in Economic Requirements for the Pass degree History III Honours must be completed before entry and options to this course.

Options Economic 8 For all Economic History Candidates who have riot Development semester courses completed the prerequisites for in Southeast Asia Economic History IA Economic History courses but Economic 8 and IB or History I or have completed 4 full semester Development of any 4 full semester first year courses may, with Modern Germany first year courses the permission of the Head of Economic 8 Department, take options in Development of Economic History. Modern Japan The Managerial Firm: 8 As above plus Economics II Evolution and or Economics II(P) Attributes Economic Develop­ 8 ment of Russia and Eastern Europe Economic Fluctuations 8 Economics I or Economics I (Social Sciences) or with the consent of the Head of the Department of Economic History Economic History of 8 the Mediterranean Region Social Aspects of 8 Industrialisation in the United States Economic and Social 8 Development of Modern France Economic and Social 8 History of Minority Groups American Economic 8 History 1607-1865 American Economic 8 History 1865-1970 Early Australian 8 Economic History Modern Australian 8 Economic History History of the Island 8 Pacific since the mid-1800s The Historical 8 Development of the Chinese Economy Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Asia Pacific: Growth 8 For all Economic History and Change semester courses Strategy and Growth 8 Economic History IA of Big Business and IB or History I or Urban History 8 any 4 full semester Historiography 8 first year courses Honours course. Pass student may take with permission of Head of Department. Topics in Modern 8 European Social History History of Modern 8 European Expansion: Theory and Practice of Imperialism . 8 Economics Economics I 12 Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Mathematics. Economics II 16 Economics I or Econometrics I Economics I (Social Sciences) and successful completion of a qualifying examination for Economics II Economics II Honours 24 Credit in Economics I Econometrics I Economics III 16 Economics II and Comprises 4 options or Econometrics I equivalent. Economics III 32 Credit in Economics II Honours Honours Economics III 16 Economics III or Comprises 4options or equivalent Additional Economics III other than those taken for Honours Economics III Economics III 8 Economics III Comprises 2 options or equivalent Supplementary other than those taken for Economics. III. Economics IV Credit in Economics III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours must be completed before entry to this course. Economics I 12 (Social Sciences) Economics II(P) 16 Economics I (Social Sciences); or Economics I and successful comple­ tion of a qualifying examination for Economics II(P) Australia and World 8 Economics II (P) The six Economics (P) 8 unit Capitalism courses are third year courses. Economic Conflict and 8 Economics II(P) the State Political Economy of 8 Economics II(P) Cities and Regions Political Economy of 8 Economics II (P) the Environment Political Economy of 8 Economics II (P) Women Political Economy of 8 Economics II(P) Development Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Economics III Elective 8 Economics II(P) Comprises two 4 unit half semester options from the Economics III pool of options. The Australian 12 Terminating course. May not.be Economy taken by candidates who have already completed Economics Ilorll(P). Finance Finance 201: 8 Accounting IA or Second year full semester course. Corporate Finance I FinAcCon, Finance 201 cannot be counted Economics I and with Investments. Econometrics I Finance 202: 8 As for Finance 201 Finance 201 A major in Finance under section Corporate Finance II 10(iii) consists of Finance 201 and 202, plus one of the following: Finance 302,303 or 307; and either Fiance 304 or 305 in 1997.:In order to enrol in the third year courses Economics II must have been undertaken. Finance 202 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 201 Finance 201 and Finance 202 Honours comprises 202 a special honours seminar in semester 2. Finance 301: 8 Finance 201 and 202, Investments and and Economics II Portfolio Management Finance 302: 8 As for Finance 301 Derivative Securities Finance 303: 8 As for Finance 301 Corporate Control Finance 303 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 202 Finance 303 Finance 303 Honours comprises or 202 Honours, and a special honours seminar. Economics II Finance 304: 8 As for Finance 301 Trading and Dealing in Securities Markets Finance 304 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 302, Finance 304 Finance 304 Honours comprises or 303 or 303 Honours, a special honours seminar. and Economics II Finance 305: 8 As for Finance 301 Advanced Corporate Finance Finance 307: 8 Finance 201 and Financial Statement Financial Accounting A Analysis Finance IV Honours Finance 202 Honours, Requirements for the Pass degree 303 Honours and 304 must be completed before Honours at Credit level entry to this course. or with permission of Head of Department Government 101 Introduction to 6 A major in Government under Australian Politics section 10(iii) consists of two 102 Introduction to 6 junior courses (Government World Politics 101-110) and 4 full semester 103 Politics of World 6 options (except with the Development permission of the Head of the 104 Power in Society 6 Department). Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course 105 Australian Politics 6 in Comparative Perspective 106 Political Change 6 in the Modern World 107 Global Politics and 6 the Environment 108 Environmental 6 Politics and Policy in Australia 109 Ethnicity, 6 Nationalism and Citizenship 110 Comparative 6 Politics and Economic Change in East Asia

Options Human Rights and 8 For all Government Application may be made to the Australian Politics options: Head of Department for any Australian State 8 Two options from student enrolled in one or more Politics Government 101-110 options in Asian Economic Australian Political 8 History to take options in Asian and Electoral Politics without the usual Behaviour prerequisites. The Australian 8 Political Party System Religion in 8 Australian Politics Introduction to 8 International Politics Politics of 8 International Economic Relations The Superpowers and 8 After Peace Studies 8 Australian Foreign 8 and Defence Policy International 8 Communism Politics of Globalism 8 The International 8 Security Problem in the Twentieth Century Politics and Society 8 Socialist and Labour 8 Politics Politics of 8 Information Australian Labour: 8 Politics and Culture Social Movements, 8 Politics and Identity Women and Politics 8 Japanese Politics 8 Government and 8 Politics of Modern China Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Politics of 8 For all Government Development options: Problems of Transition 8 Two options from in European Politics Government 101-110 American Politics 8 Reform, Revolution 8 and Post-Communism Revolution, 8 Nationalism and Modernity Southeast Asian 8 Politics South Pacific Politics 8 Authoritarian Politics 8 States and the Politics 8 of Economic Development Capitalism and 8 Democracy in East Asia The Comparative 8 Politics of Ethnic Conflict Northeast Asian 8 Politics: conflict and change Public Policy and 8 Administration Policy Analysis 8 Organisational 8 Analysis Comparative 8 Federalism Citizenship, Work 8 and Welfare The Politics of 8 Government-Business Relations in Australia Australian National 8 Internship Program Political Theory: 8 Classical Political Theory: 8 Early Modern Political Theory: 8 Modern Democratic Theory 8 Marxism 8 Ethics and Politics 8 Government II 8 Credit in two Two options in Comprises special seminar. Honours Government 101-110 Government options completed Government III 16 Credit in Government II Two options in Comprises special seminar. Honours Honours and two Government May be taken concurrently with options in Government Government II Honours with Faculty permission. Government IV Credit in Government III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours and two must be completed before entry options in Government to this course. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Industrial Relations Macro Industrial 6 Relations I Micro Industrial 6 Macro Industrial Relations I Relations I Sociology of Industry 4 For all half semester A major in Industrial Relations and Labour courses in Industrial under section 10(ii) consists of Labour History 4 Relations, Macro and Macro and Micro Industrial Legal Aspects of 4 Micro Industrial Relations I and 8 half semester Industrial Relations Relations I courses. Economics of Labour 4 Markets Human Resource 4 Management Industrial Relations 4 Policy Work Safety 4 Comparative Industrial 4 Relations Organisational Analysis 4 and Behaviour Strategic Management 4 Strategic Human 4 Resource Management Discrimination and 4 As above plus Legal Equality in Aspects of Industrial Employment Relations Industrial Relations 4 Macro and Micro Practice Industrial Relations I and four 4-unit IR courses Industrial Relations II 8 Credit in Macro and Four half Comprises honours seminar. Honours Micro Industrial semester courses Relations I in Industrial Relations Industrial Relations III 16 Credit in four half Four half Comprises Research Methods and Honours semester courses and semester courses Writers on Management. Industrial Relations II in Industrial Honours Relations Industrial Relations IV Credit in four half Requirements for the Pass degree semester courses and must be completed before Industrial Relations III entry to this course. Honours Marketing Marketing 201: 8 Economics I and Accounting IA Second year full semester course. Marketing Principles Econometrics I or FinAcCon A major in Marketing under Marketing 202: 8 Marketing 201 section 10(ii) consists of Consumer Behaviour and 203 Marketing 201,202 and 203, and Marketing 203: 8 Marketing 201 301, and one other level 3 full Marketing Research I and 202 semester course. Marketing 301: 8 Marketing 201, 202 Marketing Research II and 203, and Economics II Marketing 302: 8 As for Marketing 301 Marketing 301 Marketing Communications Marketing 303: 8 As for Marketing 301 Marketing 301 Retail and Services Marketing Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Marketing 304: 8 As for Marketing 301 Marketing 301 New Products Marketing Marketing IV A major in Marketing Requirements for the Pass with an average grade degree must be completed of Credit or better, plus before entry to this course. Econometrics IIA and IIB or Adv Stats Methods 2 (offered by the School of Mathematics and Statistics) Interdepartmental Communication and Critical Analysis 1A 6 Communication and Critical Analysis IB 6 ' Contemporary 8 Any 4 full semester Economics and first year courses Politics of South Asia Political Economy 8 Any 4 full semester of Women first year courses

Table B (See section 10 of the Senate resolutions) For the Bachelor of Commerce degree, Table B consists of all courses not in Table A which are offered by the Faculties of Economics, Arts and Science. The courses Legal Institutions (12 units), Torts, Constitutional Law, Contracts, Administrative Law and Criminal Law (all 8 units) are also Table B courses, but are only available to students concurrently enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce and the Bachelor of Laws. The Faculty offers the following postgraduate studies for candidates who do not meet the entry degrees— requirements for higher degrees. On a full-time basis Doctor of Science in they are normally one semester programs involving Economics DScEcon coursework. To progress to a Diploma, a credit average PhD is required in the certificate. Master of Commerce MCom MEc Diplomas Master of Economics Diplomas may be regarded as bridging programs for (Social Sciences) MEc(SocSc) candidates with undergraduate degrees in fields Master of Industrial differentfrom, or weak in, those offered by the Faculty's Relations and Human departments. On a full-time basis, they are normally Resource Management MIRHRM one-year programs involving coursework. Master of International Studies MIntS Master of Public Policy MPP Master's degrees Master of Public Affairs MPA The Master of Commerce program offers specialised training in one or two of the following areas- postgraduate diplomas— accounting, banking, economics, finance, industrial Graduate Diploma in relations and human resource management, marketing Commerce GradDipCom and operations research. The degree involves course­ Graduate Diploma in work only and is taught primarily in the evening. Economics GradDipEc Graduates with any degree can apply, although those Graduate Diploma in who have a commerce or economics background can Industria Relations and obtain exemptions for up to four courses. The Master Human Resource of Commerce can be completed within two or three Management GradDipIRHRM semesters, and is available ona full-time or a part-time Graduate Diploma in basis. International Studies GradDipIntS The Master of Economics usually consists of Graduate Diploma in Public coursework and a thesis or essay. Candidates who Policy GradDipPP graduated with honours in their bachelor's degree Graduate Diploma in Public may proceed by research thesis only. Each department Affairs GradDipPA within the Faculty allows a number of combinations graduate certificates— of courses and thesis or essay, and also offers the Graduate Certificate in degree on both a full-time and part-time basis. Commerce GradCertCom Intending candidates should consult the department Graduate Certificate in concerned for details of the programs available. International Studies GradCert IntsS The Departments of Economics and Econometrics Graduate Certificate in offer a joint MEc program available at the pass or Marketing GradCertMktg honours level with core courses in , Graduate Certificate in , econometrics and researchmethods. Public Affairs GradCertPA On a full-time basis, this degree usually takes one Graduate Certificate in academic year for the coursework and 3-6 months for Public Policy GradCertPP the thesis or essay. The Department of Economics offers an MEc(Social A Graduate Diploma in Industrial Relations and Sciences) which provides an intensive study in political Human Resource Management is planned for economy with opportunities for study in related introduction in semester 2,1997 (pending final Senate disciplines. This coursework and thesis or essay degree approval). The PhD degree is offered by all of the will take normally at least one calendar year on a full- departments within the Faculty, and there is also time basis. provision for interdisciplinary studies. The Master of Industrial Relations degree consists Enquiries about the Master of Business of coursework and thesis or essay or thesis alone (for Administration (MBA) and other graduate programs candidates with first or second class honours degrees). should be made to the Secretary, Graduate School of The coursework component involves advanced Business, The University of Sydney, N.S.W. 2006 or by courses in industrial relations and itself takes up to telephone (9351 2222). one academic year on a full-time basis. The Department of Government offers three Certificates degrees. The Master of International Studies is for Graduate Certificates may be regarded as a means of students interested in the national and international establishing a candidate's suitability for graduate politics of the Asia-Pacific region. It is a coursework and thesis degree and usually entails one calendar International students are welcome within the year on a full-time basis. The Master of Public Policy Faculty, and, to ensure that they have no difficulties in will be of greatinterest to those hoping to be employed their initial contact, Associate Professor Debesh in the public sector, while the Master of Public Affairs Bhattacharya of the Department of Economics has focuses on the interface between the private and public been appointed to counsel and advise them on all sectors. They are both coursework and thesis degrees matters relating to their candidatures. Insome depart­ requiring three semesters on the equivalent of a full- ments where familiarity with Australian conditions is time basis. assumed, preliminary work may be specified before candidates proceed to formal enrolment. Doctor of Philosophy Graduate study is encouraged by all departments This is a higher research training degree whichrequires in the Faculty, and enquiries may be directed to them the preparation of a thesis under the close supervision or to the Associate Dean for Postgraduate Studies. of a member of staff. Some departments have specified prerequisites which may mean completing one or more preliminary courses. The minimum period of candidature is two years (for masters graduates) and the maximum is five years on a full-time basis. The normal length of submitted theses is in the range of 60 000-80 000 words. .

Doctor of Science in Economics The Doctor of Science in Economics is a higher , and is awarded to scholars who have made an outstanding contribution to research in their discipline. The work on which the award of the degree is based should have been published and should be recognised internationally as a distinguished contri­ bution to knowledge.

Admission requirements For entry into the PhD program candidates should have a bachelor's degree with first or upper second class honours or a master's degree with a major in the proposed area of their PhD. To be admitted to the master's degrees an applicant must have a good first degree (usually interpreted as an average of credit level passes) and in some cases three years' prior study in the area of the master's degree. Any shortcomings may be made up through preliminary work specified by the department concerned. A pass degree at a sufficient standard in any field is generally sufficient for entry to the diplomas.

Research facilities The Faculty has excellent research facilities to assist candidates for both the master's and doctoral degrees. The Wolstenholme and Fisher libraries contain significant collections relevant to the work of the Faculty. There are 100 computer terminals connected to the campus broadband network. In addition to these, postgraduate students have access to the Advanced Computer Laboratory located in the Institute Building containing over 30 Compaq and IBM PCs linked to a RISC 6000 server. Also available for research are a number of computer packages, securities price files, company annual reports, historical records, legal services and stock exchange services. The Faculty provides a modern postgraduate resource room with 36 lock-up carrels for the use of research students. In 1996 there were 560 postgraduate students enrolled in the Faculty of Economics. Many of these were studying part-time by coursework. Officers of the Faculty because they are geared to specific professions; but Dean the three big general faculties should notbe thought of Professor Stephen Matthew Salsbury, AB Occidental as being non-professional. It would be more apt to AMPhDHarv. HonsDUnivG.UP.S. SanktPeterburg think of them as multiprofessional faculties because (Russia) their graduates find their way into a very wide range of different occupations. This is certainly the case with Pro-Dean the Faculty of Economics. Professor William Schworm, BA U.N.C. MA Va PhD Wash. Degrees and diplomas Associate Dean (Postgraduate Studies) The Faculty of Economics was established in 1920 to Russell T. Ross, MCom Auck. MA PhD Duke provide for the study of economics and of closely Associate Dean (Undergraduate Studies) related studies. It awards the following degrees and diplomas: Gregory Patmore, BEc PhD Secretary to the Faculty BEc Bachelor of Economics Mary Ferguson, BSocStud DipEd BEc(SocSc) Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) Faculty Finance Manager BCom Bachelor of Commerce Patrick D. McNeice GradCertCom Graduate Certificate in Undergraduate Teaching Quality Fellow Commerce Michael J. Paton, BSc(Ed) BA PhD GradCertlntS Graduate Certificate in International Studies Computer Systems Manager GradCertlRHRM Graduate Certificate in Thomas W. Sedgwick, BSc Industrial Relations and Librarian, Wolstenholme Library Human Resource Gloria E. Muir, BA DipLib, AIAA Management (pending final Senate approval) Computer Systems Officer GradCertMktg Graduate Certificate in Peter Shum Marketing Administrative Assistants GradCertPA Graduate Certificate in Public Bradley Button Affairs Isobel Horton GradCertPP Graduate Certificate in Public Policy Karin Oosterhoff (Secretary to Dean) GradDipCom Graduate Diploma in Nonie O'Rourke Commerce Anne Robertson GradDipEc Graduate Diploma in Attendants, Merewether Building Economics Jim Mullen (in charge) GradDipIRHRM Graduate Diploma in Peter McDonald, Frank Merlino Industrial Relations and Human Resource Management The University and the Faculty GradDipIntS Graduate Diploma in The University of Sydney was founded in 1850 by an International Studies Act of the Legislature of New South Wales and is the GradDipPA Graduate Diploma in Public oldest university in Australasia. The University is Affairs organised into thirteen faculties (Agriculture, GradDipPP Graduate Diploma in Public Architecture, Arts, Dentistry, Economics, Education, Policy Engineering, Health Sciences, Law, Medicine, Nursing, MCom Master of Commerce Science and Veterinary Science) and three academic MEc Master of Economics colleges (Orange Agricultural College, Sydney College MEc(SocSc) Master of Economics (Social of the Arts and the Sydney Conservatorium of Music). Sciences) In addition, there are two boards of studies that also MIRHRM Master of Industrial Relations supervise the award of degrees (the Boards of Studies and Human Resource in Music and Social Work). Management The Faculties of Arts, Science and Economics are MIntS Master of International Studies sometimes referred to as the 'general faculties' for MPA Master of Public Affairs between them they cover the humanities, natural MPP Master of Public Policy sciences and social sciences. The remaining faculties PhD Doctor of Philosophy are popularly known as the 'professional faculties' DScEcon Doctor of Science in Economics In the early days of the BEc degree, the related Information and advice studies tended to have a strong orientation towards General questions about studies in the Faculty and commerce. Subsequently, the Faculty provided for interpretation of faculty statutes (its official rules and studies related to economics in a broader social science regulations) as set out here and in the University's sense as well, such as Industrial Relations and Calendar, Vol. I: Statutes and Regulations or about general Government. In 1985, the Faculty decided to offer two administrative problems, including anyone else who undergraduate degrees to take effect from the can help you, should be directed to the Faculty Office. beginning of 1987: the Bachelor of Economics, which Enquiries by mail should be addressed to Student was restructured to include the compulsory study of Administration, Faculty of Economics, The University three years of Economics and one year of Econometrics; of Sydney, N.S.W. 2006. Telephone enquiries during and the Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences), within office hours can be made by calling (02) 9351 3076 or which a wide range of social science subjects was 9351 3086. The fax number is (02) 9351 4433. made available. Many students over the years have The Faculty Office is open for in-person enquiries chosen to specialise in accounting and commercial from 11.00 am to 6.00 pm Monday-Thursday. law. In 1991, the Faculty decided to add a third degree, Interviews with the Dean or the Associate Deans can the Bachelor of Commerce, which commenced in 1993 be arranged by making an appointment through the and includes compulsory study in first year Faculty Office. Accounting, Econometrics and Economics or Economics (Social Sciences). Subjects such as Finance Academic advisers and Marketing are included in this degree. Questions about the overall structure of the under­ Another development has been the offering of graduate degrees or about particular courses or the combined or double degrees in cooperation with other requirements of individual departments can be faculties. They include the following: answered by the Faculty advisers, who are available • Law (Economics/Law, Economics (Social in the Merewether Building during the enrolment Sciences)/Law and Commerce/Law). period. Advice about departments and their courses Commerce/Law was offered for the first time in may also be obtained from the departments themselves 1993. This program can be completed in five years, and the lecturers in charge of courses. There is detailed less timethanitwould take to complete both degrees information from each of the departments in the separately. Applications are made through the following chapter. Universities Admissions Centre. • Engineering (Engineering/Commerce). Career prospects Engineering/Commerce was offered for the first See chapter 1. time in 1993. Engineering students may apply to the Faculty of Engineering after their first year of Membership of the Faculty study. The term faculty is often loosely used as a collective • Arts (Arts/Commerce). This program was offered noun embracing all the staff and students studying for the first time in 1996. Applications are made subjects taught in the faculty. But the term faculty or through the Universities Admissions Centre. members of faculty also has a specific meaning. It refers • Science (Science/Commerce). This program will to those persons—staff from departments teaching be offered for the first time in 1997. Applications are certain subjects, staff from departments that have an made through the Universities Admissions Centre. interest in the general area of the faculty's activities, The Faculty also offers elective courses to students and elected students and staff—who have respon­ in the Faculties of Arts, Science, Education, Engin­ sibilities for supervising the award of the degrees of eering, Agriculture and Architecture, and in the Board the faculty. The University by-laws and resolutions of Studies in Social Work. The Faculties of Arts, Science specify the power and responsibility of a faculty, and and Agriculture offer courses which Faculty of the conditions under which this power is exercised. Economics students may elect to take. The following extracts from the University Senate Well over 400 students qualify for the award of resolutions describe the constitution of the Faculty. undergraduate degrees in the Faculty of Economics each year. Constitution of the Faculty of Economics The Faculty is, of course, also heavily committed to 1. The Faculty of Economics shall comprise the postgraduate teaching and research (see chapter 5). following persons: (a) the Professors, Readers, Associate Location Professors, Senior Lecturers, Lecturers The Faculty of Economics administration and five of and Associate Lecturers in the Depart­ the teaching departments of the Faculty are in the ments of Accounting, Econometrics, Merewether Building, on the corner of City Road and Economic History, Economics, Finance, Butlin Avenue directly opposite the main City Road Government and Public Administration, gates of the University. The Departments of Finance, Industrial Relations, Management and Industrial Relations and Marketing are located in the Public Policy, and Marketing who are Institute Building next to the Merewether Building. full-time or fractional permanent or The Faculty Office can be found on Level 2 of the temporary members of the teaching staff Merewether Building. of the University, (b) the Deans of the Faculties of Agriculture, Arts, Education and Law or their nominees, (c) the Head or the nominee of the Head of each of the following departments or schools— Agricultural Economics Anthropology Computer Science Geography Philosophy . Psychology Studies in Religion Social Work and Social Policy. (d) not more than five students elected in the manner prescribed by resolution of the Senate. 2. A person nominated by a Dean under section 1(b) or by a Head of Department under section 1(c) shall hold office for a period of two years from 1 January next following the nomination, and shall be eligible for re-nomination for further periods of two years.

Student membership of the Faculty The resolutions of the Senate make provision for five students to be elected to membership of the Faculty of Economics. The five students comprise: (a) the President of the Sydney University Economics Society or another office bearer of the Society nominated by the President, being a person who is enrolled as a candidate for a degree in the Faculty; (b) three undergraduate students enrolled as candidates for an in the Faculty; and (c) one postgraduate student enrolled as a candidate for a postgraduate degree in the Faculty. The Senate resolutions for student membership of the Faculty of Economics are set out in full in the Calendar, Vol. I: Statutes and Regulations. First year students program at the University's Learning Assistance This chapter contains details of the content of courses. Centre. You may also be given feedback from your The courses are grouped by departments, and the lecturers recommending that you visit the Learning various course entries are preceded by information Assistance Centre to improve your academic language relating to the department's courses and arrangements, and communication skills. Staff in the Faculty work and sometimes advice about the choice of supporting closely with the Centre to ensure that you will have studies, career opportunities and the like. plenty of opportunities in your courses to develop You should read these departmental statements these skills. and the course descriptions of the first year courses before making your choices. For details of Table B first Learning Assistance Centre year courses, which are offered by other faculties, you The Learning Assistance Centre offers a range of will have to consult the relevant faculty handbook. programs to develop in students those skills necessary for acquiring and communicating knowledge in a Course listings are subject to alteration university setting. Programs include workshops Courses and arrangements for courses, including staff within the Centre, workshops and lectures relevant to allocated as stated in any publication, announcement your course or your subject generally, and individual or advice of the University, are an expression of intent learning programs. The Centre's staff can help you only and are not to be taken as a firm offer or under­ decide which areas of your academic study and taking. The University reserves the right to discontinue language skills you need to work on. The Centre is on or vary such courses, arrangements or staff allocations the seventh floor of the Education Building, phone at any time without notice. 9351 3853.

Assumed knowledge Mathematics Learning Centre The Mathematics Learning Centre offers help to Agricultural Economics I, Econometrics I, and students who enter the University with insufficient Economics I will be taught on the assumption that preparation in mathematics to enable them to cope students have taken at least the Mathematics 2 unit with the mathematical requirements of their chosen course at the HSC examination or equivalent. course. Computer Science I will be taught on the assumption Students who have not taken at least the that students have taken the Mathematics 3 unit course Mathematics 2 unit course at the HSC, older students at the HSC examination or equivalent. who may not have done mathematics for several years and some international or interstate students may Language and communication skills need some help with the mathematics and statistics in An important aspect of your learning at university is Econometrics. If you are doubtful whether you are the development of your skills as a communicator. well enough prepared for a course, you should contact Good communication skills are an essential part of the Mathematics Learning Centre for advice. studying at university. You will need to be a good and The Centre's staff can help you decide which topics active listener in lectures; you will need to carry out you need to do extra work on. They provide resources reading of many different types of articles, reports, for individual study, with guidance from lecturers, and so on; you will need to participate actively in and also arrange small tutorials for students who are tutorials, and make presentations to the group; and having difficulties. Introductory and bridging courses you will need to prepare many different types of are organised during January and February each year. writing, including essays, reports, case study solutions, The Centre is on the fourth floor of the Carslaw and exam answers. Building. Any student seeking assistance should call As you proceed through your studies, your at the Centre, or phone 93514061. communication skills will naturally develop. However, for some students, there might be barriers Books to development as an excellent communicator. For You are expected to buy the textbooks specified. It is example, perhaps you have always done well in written not advisable, however, to buy books before the start work but you suddenly find your performance in of lectures unless you have consulted the lecturer in writing at university level, or writing for a particular charge of the course. As for the recommended or subject, is not adequate. For some students whose first reference books, you should remember that, although language is not English, you may not have a good most if not all may be consulted in libraries, library mastery yet of the English language, and so your facilities cannot always produce the book when you development of a more academic language could be want it; ownership of the book ensures that it is hindered. available at any time for easy reference. Additional If you feel that your language and communication books or periodicals may be recommended from time skills are not sufficient to cope with the requirements to time during lectures; in all cases you should prefer of your courses, you should consider undertaking a the most recent edition of a book. Lecturers in charge of courses Staff Below the title of each course is the name of the Professors lecturer in charge. When you are in need of advice you AllenT. Craswell,BComQWPhD, ASA should consult in the first instance the lecturer shown. Appointed 1989 Glossary Terry S. Walter, BCom Qld PhD WAust., FCIS FCM ACA AAUQ (Head of Department) Prereq, used in relation to a particular course, is another course that must have been completed before the new Appointed 1990 course is taken. For example Economics I is the Associate Professors prerequisite for Economics II. Graeme W. Dean, MEc, ASA TIA Corequisite, used in relation to a particular course, is a Stephen L. Taylor, BCom PhD U.N.S.W. MEc Macq., course that must have been completed, or is currently ACA being taken. For example, in the case of Economics II, Senior Lecturers the corequisite is Econometrics I (and the prerequisite Cynthia F. Coleman, DipEd Syd.Teach.Coll. MA LLM is Economics I). (Commercial Law) Linda M. English, BA BCom Monash, ACA Further advice Geoffrey E. Hart, BA LLB Qld LLM Lond. (Commercial Further advice on course planning and other matters Law) is available from the Assistant to the Dean in the Lecturers Faculty Office and from members of the teaching staff. Neal H. Arthur, MCom U.N.S.W. BEc, ACA Paul J. Blayney, BCom Calg. MEc Jeffrey Coulton, BEc LLB GDipPracLegalTraining Accounting U.T.S. Peter J. Edwards, BEc Macq., CPA FTIA Introduction Isabel Gordon, MCom U.N.S.W., FCA At the undergraduate level the department offers Patty Kamvounias, BEc LLM (Commercial Law) sequences in accounting and commercial law. Philip J. Lee, BBus Kuring-gai C.A.E. MCom U.N.S. W., Undergraduates may proceed to an honours degree ASAACISAIMM through the completion of a fourth year of study. This Barbara Mescher, BJuris LLM U.N.S.W. (Commercial additional year may be completed on a full- or a part- Law) time basis, though the former is the more usual. Anja M. Morton, BBus Northern Rivers C.A.E. MEc Postgraduate study within the department is Macq., ACA directed at extending the disciplinary skills and Joanne Pickering, BA U.S.R.C. BAdmin Regina MSc knowledge acquired in the normal undergraduate Sask., CMA program and at providing research training in Julie Roach, LLM Q.U.T. (Commercial Law) accounting. Candidates may proceed to either anMEc . Qingliang Tang, MEc Shanghai PHD Glas., ASCPA or a PhD in accounting. Subject to minimum entry Mary E. Wyburn, BA U.N.S.W. LLM Lond. LLB requirements, both degrees are available by research (Commercial Law) only (thesis) or by a combination of coursework and research. As a general rule, the MEc requires the Associate Lecturers equivalent of two years' full-time study; the PhD Mary Ip, BA Lond. LLM (Commercial Law) requires the equivalent of three years' full-time study. Joanna Maxwell, BA LLM (Commercial Law) Postgraduate study within the department is Annette Rea, BCom, ACA facilitated by the Accounting Foundation which has Scott Richardson, BEc as its objective the promotion of excellence in all fields Jas Sekhon, BJuris LLM U.N.S.W. (Commercial Law) of teaching and research in accounting. The Marketing and Planning Manager department, through the foundation, is host to the Virginia Bleasel, BA MBA U.N.S.W. Accounting Research Centre, an independent centre for research in accounting. The centre was the first of MCom Course Coordinator its kind in Australia and has an extensive library and Jane Baumann research collection. In a similar fashion the department Administrative Officer provides the editorial service for Abacus, an Gaye Wilson, MA Macq. BA international journal of accounting and business studies, as well as the national journal, Australian Administrative Assistant Accounting Review. It also sponsors the Sydney Katharyn Thomas University Pacioli Society, an association of Computer Systems Officer professional accountants, students and teachers, which Darren Potter, AssocDipBus S.I.T. meets several times each year to discuss topics of professional, commercial and financial interest. The Honorary Appointment department also runs an active research seminar series Emeritus Professor at which national and international scholars discuss Raymond J. Chambers, AO, BEc DScEcon, FASSA their current ideas and research. FCPA Location The department also offers a major in commercial law The department is on Level 4 of the Merewether in the BEc or BCom degree comprising six semester Building. Enquiries, Room 476. courses in commercial law as follows:

Accounting program Year Semester 1 Semester 2 The department's program is designed to provide 1 Commercial Commercial students with the education and disciplinary training Transactions A Transactions B appropriate for career opportunities not only in 2 Corporations Law Trade Practices and professional accounting but also in the financial Consumer Law services, corporate and government sectors. Subject to the requirements for the award of the BEc or the 3 Principles of Taxation of BCom, students are free to choose courses from a Taxation Law Business Entities series of courses in: accounting (financial, managerial, audit, financial statement analysis) and commercial The Bachelor of Economics and the Bachelor of law (contracts, company and tax). Commerce degrees are accredited by the Australian For the purposes of the BEc and BCom degrees a Society of Certified Practising Accountants and The majorinaccounting comprises the six semester courses, Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia subject Accounting IA and IB, Management Accounting A to the following requirements: and Financial Accounting A, and two courses from (i) completion of the following courses as an Financial Accounting B, Management Accounting B, accounting major: Accounting IA and IB, Financial Statement Analysis and Auditing. A possible Management Accounting Aand B, and Financial degree program for both degrees is shown below: Accounting A and B; (ii) completion of the commercial law courses BEc degree Commercial Transactions A, Corporations Law, Principles of Taxation Law and Taxation of Year Semester 1 Semester 2 Business Entities (students in the combined 1 Accounting IA Accounting IB law program will complete comparable subjects Economics I Economics I at the Law School); and Econometrics I Econometrics I (iii) completion of Finance 201 and Auditing (a Elective Elective third year elective). Such a program would satisfy the requirements for 2 Management Financial registration by the Australian Society of Certified Accounting A Accounting A Practising Accountants for admission as an associate Economics II Economics II and for advancement to CPA status, and by The Elective Elective Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia for Elective1 admission to its Professional Year Program. 3 Financial Management Of course, other combinations of subjects are Accounting B Accounting B possible and students are encouraged to consider the Economics III Economics III inclusion of subjects offered elsewhere within the Elective • Elective Faculty (e.g. Government, Industrial Relations, Elective1 Economic History or Econometrics) or the University (e.g. Computer Science and Arts subjects such as a language course or Philosophy) within their program. BCom degree While such subjects may not satisfy specific Year Semester 1 Semester 2 professional accreditation requirements, they nonetheless provide the opportunity to design degree 1 Accounting IA Accounting IB programs which are attractive to employers from Economics I Economics I commerce, industry and government. Econometrics I Econometrics I Elective Elective Extension courses 2 Management Financial Through the Centre for Continuing Education the Accounting A Accounting A department offers evening courses in Company Law, Elective Elective Taxation Law, Accounting Theory and Auditing. Each Elective Elective course requires one evening's attendance per week Elective1 for the duration of a normal semester. While these 3 . Financial Management courses cannot be counted towards the BEc or BCom Accounting B Accounting B degrees, they are, nonetheless, accredited by both the Elective Elective Australian Society of Certified Practising Accountants Elective Elective and The Institute of Chartered Accountants in Elective1 Australia. Thus these courses allow for the completion of certain of the professional accreditation require­ ments after graduation and thereby provide greater flexibility in structuring the undergraduate degree. 'May be taken either semester The courses are offered on a fee-paying basis only. Commercial Law courses companies is undertaken. Further, the course develops These courses are designed specifically to complement written and oral communication skills through case other studies that may be undertaken by students in studies, oral presentations and group and individual the Faculty of Economics. They are not available to written assignments. students taking the combined BEc/LLB, BEc(SocSc)/ LLB or BCom/LLB degrees, although provision is 201 Management Accounting A 8 units made "for students who commence by taking the MrBlayney Faculty of Law series of courses to transfer to the Prereq Accounting IA, IB commercial law sequence given in the Faculty of Coreq Econometrics I Economics. Students in the BEc(SocSc) degree may do Classes Sem 1: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 prac)/wk no more than 2 full semester courses of commercial Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignments law. Textbook and reference lists for the commercial This course pro vides students with an introduction to law subjects will be available from the departmental the basics of management/cost accounting. Areas office (Room 476) approximately one month prior to specifically covered include: cost terms and purposes, the commencement of classes. cost behaviour, cost-volume- analysis, cost estimation via regression analysis and other means, Accounting courses basicandalterrauveproductcosnngmethods,detailed All courses are semester courses within an inter-year study of the budgeting process (master budgets, (rather than intra-year) prerequisite structure. However, flexible budgets, standard costing and variance it is important to note that while Accounting IA is not analysis) and cost allocation. a prerequisite for Accounting IB, successful completion of both components is required prior to entry into the 202 Financial Accounting A 8 units department's second year accounting subjects. Mr Lee Brief course descriptions follow. Textbook and Prereq Accounting IA, IB reference lists for the accounting subjects will be Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk available from the departmental office (Room 476) Assessment one 3hr exam, one 10OOw essay, weekly approximately one month prior to the commencement assignments of classes. Accounting and reporting practices of companies, particularly listed public companies. Emphasis is Semester courses placed on developing an understanding of, and the ability to evaluate critically, the various regulatory 101 Accounting IA 6 units requirements (professional and statutory) governing Ms English financial reporting. The economic significance of Classes Sem 1: (2 lec, 1 tut & 2 prac)/wk management's ability to choose between alternative Assessment one 3hr exam, 2 tests/sem, weekly assignments techniques for recording/reporting a given transaction Introduces accounting and the double entry system of or event is also considered from within a 'costly financial recording. Use is made of electronic computer contracting' framework. Issues covered include spreadsheets to solve financial accounting problems. accounting for taxes, leases, intangibles, extractive Examines assumptions underlying the preparation of industries. Consideration of off-balance sheet liabilities financial statements for external users. Consideration and owner's equity. Introduction to intercorporate is given to the relationship between accounting reports investments. and other sources of information about company performance. Development of skills necessary to 301 Financial Accounting B 8 units understand, discuss, analyse and write about Mr Arthur accounting-related topics. Designed as anintroduction Prereq Financial Accounting A to accounting. No prior knowledge assumed. Classes Sem 1: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 workshop)/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, one 1500w essay, weekly 102 Accounting IB 6 units assignments Ms English Advanced topics in financial accounting. Preparation Coreq Accounting IA of group accounts and associated problems such as Classes Sem 2: (2 lec, 1 tut & 2 prac)/wk equity accounting, accounting for joint ventures and Assessment one 3hr exam, 2 tests/sem, weekly assignments foreign translation. The latter part of the Builds on Accounting IA. Covers more complex semester concerns the debate surrounding alternative technical financial accounting issues including (price variation) accounting systems. There is a detailed accounting for company formation, the preparation examination of the concepts and mechanics of the of cash flow statements and financial statement systems of current purchasing power accounting, analysis. It consolidates students' acquisition of com­ replacement cost accounting and continuously puter spreadsheet skills. More detailed consideration contemporary accounting. is given to factors which influence the preparation of financial reports, including institutional arrangements, 302 Management Accounting B 8 units accounting standards and statements of accounting Mr Edwards concepts, and the duty of preparers and auditors of Prereq Management Accounting A financial statements. Systematic analysis of a recent Classes Sem 2: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 prac)/wk Annual Report of one of Australia's largest public Assessment one 3hr exam, one 1hr test, weekly assignments This course provides students with an analysis of Provides an introduction to the theory and practice of basic managerial problems focusing on the role of the accounting. Designed primarily for students who are managementaccountantintoday'schangingmanufac- not majoring in accounting. The aim is to develop turing and business environment. Concentrating on skills in preparing and analysing financial statements. organisational and behavioural issues it contrasts with Topics include: the institutional arrangements in the rather technical approach of Management Australia and overseas, balance sheet equation, current Accounting A. Topics include: decentralisation and assets (including inventory, accounts receivable), transfer pricing and motivation; behavioural income measurement, financial statement preparation consequences (motivation, etc.) of budgeting and and analysis. control systems; recent developments such as Just-In- Time inventory management, total quality manage­ Management Accounting Concepts 6 units ment, activity based costing and capital budgeting. Ms Pickering Classes Sem 2: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 workshop)/wk 303 Financial Statement Analysis 8 units Assessment one 3hr exam, mid-sem test Assoc. Prof. Taylor The aim is to explain how management accounting Prereq Financial Accounting A, Finance 201 information is used by managers. Topics include: Classes Sem 1 or 2: (2 lec & 2 prac)/wk estimating cost functions, relevant costing, cost Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignments allocation and discounted cash flow analysis. Although the appropriate 'form' of financial analysis depends largely on the specific context (e.g. equity Commercial Transactions A 6 units investment, credit extension, analysis of supplier/ MsKamvounias customer health, competitor analysis, regulatory Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk overview or intervention, valuation for takeover/ Assessment one 3hr exam, one test, essays, classwork restructuring), many of the techniques of financial This course is concerned with the fundamental analysis are common to each. A primary purpose of elements of business law. It commences with an this course is to develop an understanding of these overview of the Australian legal system (sources of techniques, as well as the inherent difficulties in their law, parliament, courts, statutory interpretation, application. Specific issues addressed include the doctrine of precedent), including an examination of analysis of business performance and disclosure, the those provisions in the Commonwealth Constitution analysis of earnings quality, cash flow assessment, relevant to business and commercial activities. Basic credit worthiness and accounting-based valuation elements of criminal law and the law of torts (in methods. particular, negligence and negligent misstatement) are then examined before the course continues with a 304 Auditing 8 units detailed study of the law of contract. Agency, contracts for the sale of , partnerships and trusts are also Ms Morton discussed. Coreq Financial Accounting B Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignments Commercial Transactions B 6 units Theory and practice of auditing with particular Mr Hart emphasis on explanations for auditors adoption of Prereq Commercial Transactions A particular techniques. Professional auditing standards Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk and their influence on audit practice. Practical auditing Assessment one 3hr exam, assignment, tut papers problems are examined in workshops and students Provides a background in property law including: are required to complete case studies in computer sale of goods, implied terms, passing of property, auditing. passing of title by a non-owner, retention of title clauses, ROMPIA clauses, debt, damages, termination The following two terminating courses are only for breach and remedies real and personal. It also available in the BEc and BEc(SocSc) degrees and introduces laws relating to personal property and to cannot be counted with Accounting IA and IB. If intellectual property, including Copyright, Patents, students have successfully completed Financial Trade Marks, Passing Off and covers current legal Accounting Concepts and Management Accounting issues relating to the computer and internet. Concepts and have gained a place in the Accounting quota code 500 by applying through UAC, they may Trade Practices and Consumer Law 8 units be exempted from enrolling in Accounting IA and IB MsKamvounias after having passed a cross-over examination. This Prereq Commercial Transactions A examination will be available only to students who Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut/wk) have gained a place in the code 500 quota. Assessment one 3hr exam, essays, classwork This course is primarily concerned with the provisions Financial Accounting Concepts 6 units in the Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cwth) dealing with Mr Arthur restrictive trade practices, unconscionable conduct, Classes Sem 1: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 workshop)/wk consumer protection and liability for defective goods. Assessment one 3hr exam, mid-sem test Topics to be studied in depthinclude: anti-competitive agreements, misuse of market power, exclusive Stock Markets and Derivatives Law 8 units dealing, resale price maintenance, price discrimination, Mrs Mescher mergers and acquisitions, unfair practices, product Prereq Commercial Transactions A, Corporations Law safety and product information, conditions and Classes Sem 2: 3 lec/wk Warranties in consumer transactions, liability of Assessment one 3hr exam, essays, seminars manufacturers and importers, unconscionable This course begins with a study of the powers of the conduct. The consumer sale provisions of the Sale of Australian Securities Commission with reference to Goods Act 1923 (N.S.W.) are also studied. recent ASC investigations, particularly in the area of insolvent trading. The functions of the Australian Corporations Law 8 units Stock Exchange and those of securities dealers and Mrs Mescher investment advisers will be examined and the Prereq any 4 full semester first year courses, Commercial relationship between broker and client. The market Transactions A offences of short selling and insider trading will be Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk • explored. Publicfunding of companies and prospectus Assessment one 3hr exam, one test, essays, classwork provisions will be studied and the liability of officers This course begins with a brief comparison of business and independent experts concerning the prospectus. entities especially partnership. The concept and The topic of mergers and acquisitions will examine process of incorporation are examined. Company acquisitions, relevant interests, takeover schemes and finance, both equity and debt finance, and the announcements, and the liability of parties to a maintenance of the company's share capital will be takeover. Prescribed interests will be explored. studied as well as the topics: accounts, auditors, and Exchange traded futures and options and OTC companies in financial difficulty. The management of derivatives will be examined. companies and directors' duties will be explored as well as the rights and remedies of company share­ Bankruptcy and Insolvency 8 units holders. Company takeovers, prospectus provisions MsWyburn and securities regulation will be studied. Prereq Commercial Transactions A, Corporations Law Classes Sem 2: 3 lec/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, one assignment Principles of Taxation Law 8 units This course is concerned with the law relating to the Mrs Coleman, Mr Hart bankruptcy of individuals and corporate insolvency. Prereq Commercial Transactions A, Corporations Law In relation to bankruptcy, the course explores the Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk mechanisms by which formal bankruptcy may occur Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignments, classwork (creditor and debtor petitions), the role of the bankrupt, This course is the first part of a subject which is the trustee and the creditors, and the property made primarily concerned with taxation law. It commences available under bankruptcy. It goes on to examine with an overview of the Australian tax system, arrangements with creditors outside formal discusses contemporary tax issues and then deals bankruptcy (Part X).In the caseof corporate insolvency with specific topics, viz. basis of liability to Australian the areas discussed include the appointment and role income tax, concepts of residence and source of income, of receivers, arrangements and reconstructions, the meaning of income, tax accounting, statutory concepts appointment of a liquidator and the winding up of a of income, taxation of termination and long service company. Special issues in insolvency also discussed leave payments, taxation of fringe benefits, basis of are the responsibilities of company officers and liability to capital gains tax and allowable deductions. professional advisers, group insolvency, the structure of the insolvency industry and proposals for reform. Taxation of Business Entities 8 units Mr Hart, Mrs Coleman Finance and Banking Law 8 units Prereq Commercial Transactions A, Corporations Law Ms Roach Coreq Principles of Taxation Law Prereq any 4 full semester first year courses Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Coreq Commercial Transactions A Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignment, classwork Classes Sem 2: 3 lec/wk This course is the second part of the subject of taxation Assessment one 3hr exam, essays, seminars law. In addition to the specific topics in income tax as This course examines the basic financial instruments set out, it also includes material on sales tax. The such as bills of exchange and cheques, and also analyses following topics are included: trading stock, the law of securities from a perspective of solvency. depreciation, taxation of partnerships and trusts The following topics will be covered: negotiability, including the application of capital gains tax to interests bills of exchange, promissory notes, cheques and in these entities, carry forward of losses, taxation of payment orders, letters of credit, floating charges, companies, dividend imputation tax, capital gains tax basic transactions of securities law, Eurocurrency. application to share and other interests in companies, intellectual property, collection of income tax Honours program in Accounting instalments, amendment of assessments, objections Honours study within the department is directed at: and appeals, taxation of non-residents, withholding • increasing students' analytic/constructive skills tax, foreign tax credits, international tax treaties/profit beyond the level acquired in undergraduate pass shifting and tax avoidance. level courses; • providing a foundation for the conduct of applied Research Report research in accounting; and Research training involves the development of the • the conduct of research in the form of a research ability to identify and address issues and anomalies report. (inconsistencies or deficiencies) within the body of These skills are developed through the completion knowledge that comprises a discipline; and familiarity of an additional (fourth) year of study which may be with the means available to solve those problems. on either a full- or a part-time basis, though the former These skills are applied in the research report. The is more common. reports vary widely in termsof the problems identified and the manner in which they are addressed. All Joint Honours in Accounting and Finance require a thorough knowledge and understanding of The department works closely with the Department the discipline and, at one extreme, a short replication of Finance to offer students a joint honours program, of an existing piece of research may be suitable, either involving honours courses from both departments on previously worked or new data. Likewise, an old and a research report supervised jointly by staff from problem might be addressed with new or different each department. research methods. At the other extreme new issues may be identified and, if relevant, their empirical or Profile of potential candidates practical implications articulated. For many years demand for accounting graduates has The research report embracing the results of the exceeded supply and most graduates find well-paid student's study is written under the direct supervision employment relatively quickly. Why then consider an of a member of staff. additional year of study? Most often, the answer is simply that candidates undertake the degree at the honours level because they find intellectual challenges Agricultural Economics stimulating and have a high level of achievement. Such candidates are rare. Of the approximately 1000 Introduction accounting graduates produced in the Sydney The aim in providing courses in agricultural economics metropolitan region each year only a handful elect to for students in the Faculty of Economics is to give such do an honours program. By so doing they mark students the opportunity to study in an area of applied themselves as different from the average accounting economics which is of considerable importance to the graduate and, as a result, are keenly sought by Australian economy. A three-year sequence in prospective employers. agricultural economics is available. While the honours program is the traditional route The courses in agricultural economics cover a wide to higher level studies in the discipline (MEc, PhD) range of fields, including the study of agricultural and and to an academic career, the majority of honours resource policy, issues in international commodity graduates find employment in the more conventional trade, the marketing of agricultural products, natural areas of professional accounting, industry/commerce, resource economics, and production economics and finance or government. The additional investment in commodity price analysis with particular emphasis education brings returns in terms of a better on the agricultural and resource sectors. understanding of accounting, superior skills and a Graduates with a training in agricultural economics wider choice of career paths. For example, within may find jobs ranging from giving management advice accounting firms, in addition to the usual career to individual farmers to providing economic advice to choices, honours graduates typically have oppor­ governments. They may be engaged in research into tunities in technical and research divisions or in staff rural problems in this country or, if they prefer, they training or consulting sections. may find employment in the international sphere. In recent years significant growth in job oppor­ Admission requirements tunities has occurred in the private sector. Graduates with training in agricultural economics have gained Admission to, and continuance in, the honours employment in commodity trading firms, farm program is based solely onperformance. Thus students organisations, the economics departments of banks, who have performed at some level of distinction in and the agricultural service industries such as the their undergraduate studies may be invited to fertiliser and machinery firms. In addition, graduates undertake the final honours year. Enquiries from trained in agricultural economics are readily finding interested students are always welcome and should positions in the finance sector and general business be directed to any member of staff. community. The Australian Bureau of Agricultural and Resource The program Economics and the various state Departments of The fourth year is structured as follows: Agriculture are major employers of agricultural Semester 1 . The type of work undertaken includes Comprises electives from the equivalent of four field surveys of costs, incomes and practices in semester courses selected from a series of full and half particular industries, analysis of resource use issues, courses whose offerings are dependent on student cost-benefit analyses of public works programs, the numbers and staff availability. analysis of the market outlook for specific commodities, studies, advice on Semester 2 policy proposals, and the provision of farm Research Report management advice. Federal departments such as the Department of K.Q. Campbell and B.S. Fisher Agricultural Marketing and Foreign Affairs and Trade and agencies such as the (Longman Cheshire, 1991) Industry Commission also employ graduates with V.J. Pollard and W.J. ObstPrad icalFarm Business Management training in agricultural economics. There is (Inkata Press, 1986) considerable mobility of personnel between the Australian Bureau of Agricultural and Resource Economics and other departments as well as into the Semester options international agencies such as the . Note that second and third year options offered by the Department of Agricultural Economics may not be Staff taught each year. Professor Thomas GordonMacAulay, MAgrScMe/fa. PhD Guelph Production Economics 8 units Appointed 1992 Coreq Economics II (Head of Department) Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Associate Professor Assessment one 3hr exam, assignments Ross G. Drynan, BAgrSc Qld PhD N.E. Production economics is concerned with production Senior Lecturers decisions on resource allocation at the firm, industry Fredoun Z. Ahmadi-Esfahani, BS Oregon MA San and economy levels. The topics include: the nature of Francisco State PhD Manit. agricultural and resource industry production, Robert L. Batterham, BAgEc N.E. MS PhD III. production functions, factor substitution, principles David P. Godden, BAgEc BA MEc N.E. PhD Lond. of enterprise combination and multi-product produc­ Carolyn Tanner, BScAgr tion, firm objectives, constrained and unconstrained maximisation, cost functions and other duality Lecturer relationships, and size in farming, GuangHua Wan, BAgEc Nanjing Agric. MEc PhD N.E. input demands and dual relationships, production Associate Lecturers over time, productivity and technical change, Lynn A. Henry, BEc DipAgEc N.E. production under risk and the illustration of the Shauna L. Phillips, BAgrEc principles involved through the use of practical applications and exercises involving both the Honorary Appointment agricultural and resource industries. In addition, basic Emeritus Professor decision analysis will be introduced including basic K.O. Campbell, MA PhD Chic. MPA Harv. BScAgr, concepts of probability, concepts of , utility FASSA functions and elicitation of preferences. Location Textbooks The department is in the R.D. Watt Building at the foot D.L. DebeitinAgriculturalProduction Economics (Macmillan, of Science Road. 1986) J.P. Doll and F. Orazem Production Economics: Theory with Agricultural Economics I 12 units Applications (Wiley, 1984) Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Reference Assessment one 1.5hr exam in Sem 1, one 3hr exam in Sem 2, J.R. Anderson etal. Agricultural Decision Analysis (Iowa State classwork University Press, 1977) An introductory course serving as a foundation for other units in agricultural and resource economics. The basic structure and nature of the resource and Commodity Price Analysis 8 units agricultural industries are outlined and the principles Coreq Economics II underlying economic analysis for these industries are Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk considered. Topics will include: the structure of the Assessment one 3hr exam, classwork Australian agricultural and resource sectors, the The topics covered will include: the nature of changing nature of theseindustries, their international . agricultural and resource commodity markets, market context, problems of structural adjustment and supply relationships, market demand relationships, technical change, and government intervention. Other price determination, marketing margin relationships, topics will include material illustrating basic economic spatially related markets, market dynamics, derived principles, both graphically and mathematically, as demand for inputs, price expectations, non­ they relate to the management of farm firms, the competitive market forms and contestable markets. operation of agricultural and resource industry Applied examples from agriculture and the resource markets and impacts of macroeconomic factors on the industries will be used throughout the course as agricultural and resource sectors. Students will be illustrations of the principles involved. expected to make use of microcomputers in preparing class work submitted for assessment. Textbooks W.G. Tomek and K.L. Robinson Agricultural Product Prices Textbooks (Cornell University Press, 1990) R.C. Buse and D.W. Bromley (Iowa State R.S. Pindyck and D.L. Rubinf eld Microeconomics (Macmillan, University Press, 1975) 1992) Agricultural and Resource Policy 8 units and pollution; depletable resources; irreversibility; Prereq Economics II sustainability. Applications include land degradation, Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk fisheries, forestry, land-use planning, greenhouse Assessment one 3hr exam, classwork effect. The topics discussed include: the basic theoretical Textbooks frameworks for the economic evaluation of policy To be advised formation (including Pareto and theory), marketand governmentfailure; the institutional structure of agricultural and resource Applied Marketing 8 units Coreq Economics II poHcyformulationinAustralia;microeconomicissues Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut/excursion)/wk in agricultural and resource policy arising from Assessment one 3hr exam, classwork linkages between agriculture and the resource industries and with the rest of the economy. Students This course relates to the basic economic concepts will be expected to read widely for this course. involved in the marketing of products into the food and fibre system. Topics covered will include: the Reference books marketing functionincluding transportation, storage, D.B. Williams (ed.) Agriculture in the Australian Economy processing, market development, advertising, market (Sydney University Press, 1990) information, standardisation and grading; marketing D.B. Johnson Public Choice (Mayfield, 1991) R. Smith and L. Watson (eds) Politics in Australia (Allen & management and planning; market efficiency; futures Unwin, 1993) markets and other risk-sharing devices; types of market A. Moran el al. (eds) Markets, Resources and the Environment and industry organisation; marketing boards and (Allen & Unwin, 1991) corporations and their role in administered pricing; N. Wallace (ed.) Natural Resource Management: An Economicprivat e trading corporations and their roles in Perspective (Australian Bureau of Agricultural and agriculture and the resources sector. Resource Economics, 1992) R.E. Just et al. Applied Welfare Economics and Public Policy Textbooks (Prentice-Hall, 1982) R.L. Kohls and J.N. Uhl Marketing of Agricultural Products (Macmillan, 1990) P. Kotler et al. Marketing: Australia and New Zealand (Prentice- Applied Commodity Trade 8 units Hall, 1994) Prereq Economics II Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, classwork In this course the basic economic principles underlying Anthropology international trade in agricultural and resource commodities and the policies involved will be Introduction presented. Issues related to trade and development The Department of Anthropology provides students will also be considered. The main topics covered will with an initial training in social anthropology. include: trends in agricultural and resources trade; In Social Anthropology the primary focus of the trade policies of importing and exporting nations, department is on the various forms of social including issues such as food aid and surplus disposal relationships in both stateless and complex societies. programs; economic integration and impacts on In its focus on stateless societies the department international commodity trade; international trade specialises in those of Southeast Asia, the Western policy making, including GATT; trade policies of the Pacific and adjoining countries; in complex societies, centrally-planned economies and developing primary attention is given to Australia. countries; the impact of exchange rates and other Economics students taking courses in anthropology macroeconomic variables on international trade in will gain special benefit by selecting options that commodities. concentrate on the economic systems of societies studied by anthropologists. Social Anthropology is a Textbooks Table A course in the BEc(SocSc) degree and a Table B To be advised course in the BEc and BCom degrees. Course descriptions for senior years in anthropology Natural Resource Economics 8 units are in the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Handbook. Prereq Economics II Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Staff Assessment one 3hr exam, classwork Professor A course in natural resource economics of relevance to Diane J. Austin-Broos, MA A.N.U. & Chic. PhD Chic. agriculture and the resource industries. Issues discussed are: the environment as a source of environ­ Associate Professors mental services; socially efficient resource allocation Paul Alexander, MA Otago PhD A.N.U. and Pareto welfare economics; and Senior Lecturers characteristics of environmental services; benefit cost Richard D. Basham, BA George Washington MA PhD analysis of public projects, including the modification Calif. of environmental services; non-depletable resources Gillian Cowlishaw, BA PhD Daryl K. Feil, BA Calif. PhD AN. LT. Location Peter D. Hinton, MA PhD The department office is at the south-west corner of Vivienne Kondos, BA WAust. PhD the Main Quadrangle, down the stairs to one level Lowell Lewis, BA Col. PhD Wash. below that of the quadrangle. Allan L. Rumsey, MA PhD Chic. Lecturers Noticeboards All noticeboards are in and around the foyer. Students Ghassan Hage, MA Nice PhD Macq. should note that there are two sets of noticeboards Micheal Jackson, BA Victoria MA Auck. PhD Camb. relevant to each year of their course. (part-time) Neil Maclean, BA Monash PhD Adel. Jadran Mimica, BA Zagreb PhD A.N.U. Registration All students (including those repeating a course and Michael Nihill, BA PhD Adel. those not enrolled for a degree) are required to register Yao Souchou, PhD Adel. with the Department by completing a registration Tamisari Franca, BA PhD Lond. card. Research Fellows All students should register with the department Jennifer Alexander, BA PhD during the orientation period, if they have not done so Rita Armstrong, BA PhD earlier. Administrative Assistants Students who for any reason have not registered Maria Cortes with the department by the first day of classes should Vicky Woo do so on that day. Students will also need to register for tutorials. The Department of Anthropology offers courses in Announcements as to procedures will be made in the the discipline of Social Anthropology. Social first lecture of the year and posted on the appropriate anthropology maybe described as the study of human" noticeboard. societies and cultures. Although it shares much of its theory and method with a wide range of social and Advice on courses humanistic disciplines, it remains distinct in its Members of staff are normally present among faculty emphasis on comparison, in its interest in the full advisers during enrolment week, and many staff members are available during the orientation period. range of human social and cultural diversity, and in its If students want to see a staff member before the year use of prolonged fieldwork in small communities as begins, they should apply to the department office. its primary research method. While often associated with the study of small-scale stateless societies, Assessment contemporary social anthropology is increasingly Exact details of the methods of assessment to be used concerned with the investigation and analysis of and the balance between them will be given in the modern nation states. Anthropology is also concerned course outlines distributed at the beginning of the with general issues of human cognition and year. In general, essays count for about fifty per cent communication, withreligion,performance,semiotics of the year's marks, and examinations for the other and representation. Courses currently offered by the fifty per cent. departmentfocus on various aspectsof bo thAboriginal and immigrant Australians, as well as a wide range of Course structure Asian, Pacific and other cultures and societies. Social Anthropology 101 is a year long first year A degree with a substantial social anthropology course of twelve unit value. Social Anthropology 101 content is especially recommended for those seeking is a prerequisite for all other anthropology courses. The recruitment into the diplomatic service, overseas aid 200 courses are senior courses and consist of a pool of projects or a variety of business or other organisations options, all one semester long, and all of eight unit whose activities are dependent onrecruitingpersonnel value. Two of these options are 'starred courses' with some understanding of the cultures and social especially designed for students intending to major in institutions of Australia's Asian and Pacific neighbours anthropology. In addition to the 200 courses there is a and trading partners. A major in social anthropology pool of options designed for students who intend to should also prove useful for prospective high-school proceed to fourth year honours, or are already doing teachers interested in teaching the HSC subject 'Society so. These are the 390 and 391 courses, in addition to the and Culture'. There are also increasing opportunities honours level IV courses. All these latter courses take for good honours graduates in social anthropology the form of a semester-long two-hour weekly seminar. for contract-type employment in connection with Candidates for the pass degree may count up to 44 Aboriginal land claims. Finally, for those who proceed units from Social Anthropology towards BEc(SocSc) to successful postgraduate research and training there degree requirements. A major in Social Anthropology is a chance to compete for academic positions both in will require pass marks in courses totalling at least 32 Australian and overseas universities and other tertiary units at senior level. These must include at least one of institutions. Advantageous combinations in the the 'starred' courses. To proceed to fourth year, academic sphere include Anthropology and Asian students must have credit results in 48 senior units Studies or Aboriginal Studies, and Anthropology with including 210,211,390 and 391. Students should also Philosophy, Sociology or History. have completed two 'starred' courses. Social Anthropology 101 12 units Social Anthropology 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk 206 and 207 Assessment two 2hr exams, 4 written assignments Social Anthropology IV The first year course is designed to introduce students For information on courses, and requirements for to the concepts, methods and theories developed by completion of pass and honours programs in social social anthropologists in seeking some understanding anthropology, consult the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate of the immense variety of human social and cultural Handbook or check with the Department of forms. Students take all the following components. Anthropology. Students enrolling in honours insocial anthropology in the BEc(SocSc) degree should also check with the Faculty of Economics office. Honours Semester one courses in Anthropology are not available in the BEc Discoveries in Anthropology or BCom degrees. Dr Lewis This section is a general introduction to the course. It asks how scholars in the western world became Basser Department of Computer interested in other cultures and describes how they set about studying them through the fieldwork method Science and the formulation of concepts and theories that enables them to compare and contrast. Introduction Computer Science is the scientific discipline which Textbook has grown out of the use of digital computers to To be announced manage and transform information. Computer Science Ritual and Symbols in Bali is concerned with the design of computers, their Assoc. Prof. Alexander applications in science, government and business, and the formal and theoretical properties which can The spectacular ceremonies of 'Hindu' Bali are the be shown to characterise these applications. context of a discussion of anthropology's contribution The diversity of the discipline is demonstrated by to the study of religion. current research interests in the Department which include artificial intelligence, the design of computer hardware and networks, and the theory of parallel Semester two computation. The Department has a range of Exchange and Social Difference in Melanesia computers and specialised laboratories for its teaching Dr Maclean and research. In his classic essay The Gift Marcel Mauss presented a Students who intend to major in Computer Science radical argument for the primacy of exchange as the should pay particular attention to the prerequisites of foundation of social life. The first section of this course each course. Students who complete 16 units of second aims to explore the Maussian tradition of the analysis year courses (course numbers starting with the digit of exchange in a Melanesian context. It will be '2') and 24 units of senior courses (course numbers organised around three central themes: exchange as starting with the digit '3'), including among them a 'project course' (course numbers starting with the the constitution of sociality; the moral basis of digits '32'), are eligible to become Associate Members exchange; the politics at the heart of exchange. of the Australian Computer Society. The course will explore these issues through the Intending honours students are strongly urged to examination of one system of ceremonial exchange in complete some Senior Mathematics prior to their entry the central highlands of Papua New Guinea. into the honours year. Students should note that entry The second part of the course will then focus on an to honours requires an average of Credit or better in undeveloped aspect of the Maussian position— the senior Computer Science courses. exchange not only creates relationships but is founded The courses offered by the Department are described on, and creates differences. In the study of Melanesia, briefly below, and more fully in the Department's which is characterised by extreme cultural and Handbook which is available from the Department's linguistic diversity, this is a primary concern. The office (Room G71) in the Madsen Building. Students second section of the course will explore the relation­ should confirm details of courses, registration ship between the value of exchange and kin, cultural, procedures, textbooks, etc., on the departmental notice- linguistic and gender forms of difference. boards. Those in doubt should seek advice from These issues will be explored through the study of members of the Department's academic staff. one of the more extensive systems of trade/ ceremonial exchange in coastal or island Melanesia. Staff Textbook Professors No textbook is prescribed J. Ross Quinlan, PhD Wash. BSc Appointed 1988 Confucian Capitalism John Rosenberg, BSc PhD Monash Dr Yao Souchou Appointed 1991 Details of the course will be announced in Semester 1. (Head of Department) Associate Professors NOTE: Students intending to proceed to professional Allan G. Bromley, BSc PhD credential in Computer Science should enrol in COMP Robert J. Kummerfeld, BSc PhD 101 in their first semester, and in COMP 102 in the second semester. If they wish they may also enrol in Senior Lecturers COMP 100. Alan Fekete, PhD Harv. BSc David Feng, BS MS Shanghai Jiao Tong MS PhD Calif. DoanB. Hoang, BE WAust. ME PhD N'cle(N.S.W.) COMP 101F Intro. Programming 6 units Judy Kay, MSc Classes Sem 1: (3 lec, 1 tut & 2 prac)/wk Jeff Kingston, BSc PhD Assessment assignments, written exam, practical exam Ian A. Parkin, BSc PhD Adel. This course introduces the fundamental skill that Suleyman Sevinc, BS Istanbul MS PhD Arizona underlines all of Computer Science: computer Michael Wise, BA BE PhD U.N.S.W. programming. Using the Blue object-oriented Lecturers programming language, students learn modern Nitin Indurkhya, PhD Rutgers programming techniques based on recent Antonios Symvonis, MS PhD Texas DipCompEng& developments in the subject. No previous knowledge InfoSc Patras on computers or programming is assumed. Wayne Wobcke, MSc Qld PhD Essex Associate Lecturers COMP 191F Intro Programming (Advanced) James Donovan, BA DipCompSc MSc 6 units Anthony Greening, BAppSci C.Sturt Classes Sem 1: (3 lec, 1 tut & 2 prac)/wk Michael Hitchens, PhD N'cle(N.S. W.) Assessment assignments, written exam, practical exam Scott Hopwood, BSc U.T.S. Requires permission by the Head of Department Michael Rolling, Diplnfomatik Bremen This course is the advanced alternative to COMP 101F Administrative Officer Intro Programming. While the subject matter is the Helene Orr same, a higher degree of elegance and rigour in programming is expected, and the programming Administrative Assistants problems are more challenging, although not more Georgina Keatch time-consuming. No previous knowledge on Peggy Iu computers or programming is assumed. Honorary Appointments Emeritus Professor COMP 102S Intro Computer Science 6 units JohnMakepeaceBennett,AO,BE(Civ)BE(Mech&Elec) Prereq COMP 101/191 BSc Qld PhD Camb., FTS FACS FBCS FIEAust FIMA Classes Sem 2: (3 lec, 1 tut & 2 prac)/wk Assessment assignments, written exam, practical exam Honorary Associate Jack R. Phillips, BMechE PhD Melb. This course is a continuation of COMP 101F Intro Programming, Advanced features of the Blue Honorary Research Associates programming languages are presented, and a Sherman (Hsuen Ren) Hwa, BS Natnl Taiwan MS beginning is made on some topics from the wider field Natnl Chiao Tung (Taiwan) PhD Ott. of Computer Science, such as assembly language Eric Tsui, PhD Deakin programming and reasoning about the correctness and efficiency of computer programs. COMP 100S Information Technology Tools 6 units COMP 192S Intro Computer Science Classes Sem 1, Sem 2: (1 lec, 1 tut & 4 prac)/wk (Advanced) 6 units Assessrnent assignments, written exam, practical exam Prereq COMP 191/101 (with sufficient merit) A critical study of common computer applications Classes Sem 2: (3 lec, 1 tut & 2 prac)/wk (including word processors, spreadsheets, databases, Assessment assignments, written exam, practical exam image processing packages and web browsers). This course is the advancedalternative to COMP 101F Emphasis will be given to acquiring a sophisticated Intro Computer Science. While the subject matter is level of skills in the usage of these tools. This will the same, a higher degree of elegance and rigour in include: examining common concepts within and prograrnmingis expected, the programming problems between classes of applications, the ability to transfer are more challenging, although not more time- skills between releases and alternative packages, consuming, and a deeper approach is taken to the customisation and automation of environments, and Computer Science topics. the ability to design solutions to problems and use a tool to implement that solution. A central focus of the course will be the application of critical thinking to the COMP 201F Computer Systems 4 units problems of tool use, including the evaluation of tools Qual COMP 102/192 and the selection of a suitable tool, and the evaluation Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 2 prac)/wk of information produced by tools (including Assessment assignments, written exam knowledge of common sources of error or misunder­ An overview of the aspects of computer hardware standing, and ways to avoid them). that are important for understanding the function and performance of software. The course consists of two such as English; they communicate with computers in principal components. Machine Principles: In this a formal language such as Pascal. This course studies section we discuss the organisation of a computer two important kinds of formal languages (called central processing unit, GPU, and the assembly and regular and context-free), and the algorithms, or machine language commands that control it. We also automata, that are used to recognise them. On the pay particular attention to the different data types theoretical side, several ways to represent languages supported, such as two's complement integers and are presented, and their capabilities and limitations floating point. System Structures: In this section we discovered; on the practical side, sound and indeed discuss the low-level organisation of system software foolproof methods are derived for writing programs including the organisation and action of a simple to recognise formal languages such as Pascal. compiler and its run-time environment, and the system Considerable emphasis is also put on the use of logic call and interrupt handling mechanisms. (bothpropositional and first-order), which provides a powerful design tool for hardware implementations COMP 291F Computer Systems (Advanced) of automata. 4 units Qual COMP 192/ 102(with sufficient merit) COMP 293S Languages and Logic Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 2 prac)/wk (Advanced) 4 units Assessment assignments, written exam Qual COMP 192/102 (with sufficient merit) This course is the advanced alternative to COMP 201F Prereq COMP 292/202 (with sufficient merit), Econometrics Computer Systems. Topics in Computer Systems are I or Discrete Maths (MATH 103/104/193/194) covered at an advanced and more challenging level. Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment assignments, written exam COMP 202F Design and Data Structures This course is the advanced alternative to COMP 203S 4 units Languages and Logic. Topics in languages and Logic are covered at an advanced and more challenging Qual COMP 102/192 level. Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment assignments, written exam When there is numerous data, its structure (arrange­ COMP 204S Programming Practice 4 units ment) determines what operations can be done with Qual COMP 102/192 it. For example, the Sydney telephone directory may Prereq COMP 202/292 be used to find out a subscriber's telephone number, Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk but not which subscriber has a given number. Many Assessment assignments, written exam data structures have been developed over the years, In this course we attack the task of the programmer each suited to a particular set of operations. This from an engineering viewpoint. This means that a course introduces the most frequently used ones, major focus is on using existing tools as building including the array, linked list, binary tree, B-tree, blocks to complete a task. This course will teach C hash table, heap, adjacency matrix, and adjacency programming, its idiom and its considerable array of lists. It shows how to implement them, verify their powerful programming tools. In addition, students correctness, calculate their time complexity, and decide will study the implementation of some of the library when to use them. More generally, this focus on data tools so that they gain an appreciation of how much and its associated operations will lead to a productive better these are than a typical programmer would be approach to the design of large programs: data able to create. In addition, it will introduce students to abstraction. some of the very elegant ideas from computer science that have been applied in the construction of the tools. COMP 292F Design and Data Structures (Advanced) 4 units COMP 294S Programming Practice Qual COMP 192/102(with sufficient merit) (Advanced) 4 units Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Qual COMP 192/102 (with sufficient merit) Assessment assignments, written exam Prereq COMP 292/202 (with sufficient merit) This course is the advanced alternative to COMP 202F Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Design and Data Structures. Topics in Data Structures Assessment assignments, written exam are covered at an advanced and more challenging This course is the advanced alternative to COMP 204S level. Programming Practice. Topics in Programming are covered at an advanced and more challenging level. COMP 203S Languages and Logic 4 units Qual COMP 102/192 Senior courses Prereq COMP 202/292, Econometrics I or Discrete Maths Taking 4 courses is sufficient to major in Computer (MATH 103/104/193/194) Science; however, students are advised that doing Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk only 4 modulesis notr egarded as adequate preparation Assessment assignments, written exam for a professional career in computing or for further All communication requires a language. People study. Students are advised that doing less than 6 communicate with each other in a natural language senior courses is not regarded as adequate preparation for a professional career in computing or for further only memory for microprograms, random access study. Students are advised to balance their workload memory for programs and data, and various pieces of between semesters. For a more detailed description of medium scale integration 'glue logic'. Another stream each course see the Departmental Handbook. of lectures will be devoted to case studies of various computers emphasising their strengths and COMP 301F Algorithms 4 units weaknesses. Emphasis will be placed on performance Qual COMP 202/292 enhancement by parallelism, pipelining, and similar Prereq Econometrics I or Discrete Maths (MATH 103/104/ techniques. 193/194), 8 units of Intermediate Econometrics/MATH/ STAT COMP 304S Computer Graphics 4 units Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Qual COMP 204/294 Assessment assignments, written exam Prereq COMP 202/292, Econometrics I or Algorithms are particularly important in all areas of (MATH 101/191), 8 units of Intermediate Econometrics/ Computer Science. The knowledge of basic algorithms, MATH/STAT as well as the ability to design a new algorithm and to Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut) / wk analyse an existing one in terms of time and space Assessment assignments, written exam . efficiency, are essential for a person to successfully A picture has a million pixels (in round terms). Like work in a computer and information related any other interface, it must be well engineered for professional area. This course will provide a systematic accuracy, high speed-performance and compatibility study of the analysis of existing algorithms and with user needs. The Computer Graphics course strategies for the design of new algorithms. The examines established algorithms for picture analysis skill includes the method of analysis of average generation, covering such topics as hidden-line computational complexity. The design strategies elimination, shading and texturing, and ray-tracing in covered include divide-and-conquer, greedy method, terms of the technology of standard graphical output and dynamic programming. Many interesting real- devices and the 3-space geometry which applies. The life problems and smart algorithm application effects on performance of algorithmic design choices examples will also be introduced. are considered and connections are made with the cognate field of Computational Geometry. COMP 302F Artificial Intelligence 4 units Qual COMP 204/294 COMP 305S Database Systems 4 units Prereq COMP 202/292, COMP 203/293, 8 units of Qual COMP 202/292 Intermediate Econometrics/MATH/STAT Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment assignments, written exam Assessment assignments, written exam An organisation needs to store a lot of data. The Artificial Intelligence is all about programming computer systems that manage data are called computers to perform tasks normally associated with Database Management Systems (DBMSs). This course intelligent behaviour. Classical AI programs have is an introduction to such systems, concentrating on played games, proved theorems, discovered patterns the modern relational systems. The Oracle system will in data, planned complex assembly sequences and so be used in the practical work. You will learn how to on. Most of these activities depend on general or understand the information stored in a relational 'weak' methods, primarily search. AI also addresses DBMS, and how to find the answer to questions using issues related to the representation and use of the the SQL language. You will also learn how to choose knowledge of human experts. This course will explore a good representation for data, using normalisation. topics from selected areas of AI. Students who complete This constitutes almost one half of the course. The it will have an understanding of some of the other half of the course will concentrate on data fundamental methods and algorithms of AI, and an modelling. Object-Oriented Database Management appreciation of how they can be applied to interesting Systems, considered by many as the next generation problems. The module will involve four assignments DBMSs, will also be presented at the end of this that require writing program components, using AI course. systems, and writing a report. COMP 306F Logic Programming 4 units COMP 303S Computer Architecture 4 units Qual COMP 203/293 Qual COMP 201/291 Prereq COMP 202/292,8 units of Intermediate Econometrics/ Prereq COMP 202/292, COMP 203/293 MATH/STAT Classes Sem 2: (2 lec, 1 tut & 2 prac)/wk Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment assignments, written exam Assessment assignments, written exam In this course we design and build simple computers. The idea behind Logic Programming is that the A major focus of the course is the series of Logic programmer specifies the logic of a problem (the what Laboratory workshop experiments. After a brief to solve) while leaving the machine to handle the review of machine code programming students are procedural aspects of solving that problem (the how familiarised with the basic modules from which a to solve). In this course, Prolog is presented as a computer central processing unit can be assembled: programming language in the broader context of Logic arithmetic logic units, microprogram sequencers, read­ Programming (which is itself an application of the first-order logic taught in Computer Science 1). The memory management, virtual memory, file systems emphasis is on developing practical skills in Prolog and security. The course is not based on a particular programmingin areas including expert systems, game operating system, but frequent reference is made to a playing and natural language processing. The number of contemporary systems including Unix, application of Prolog to database theory is described, Windows NT and MacOS. and more recent developments in Logic Programming such as object-oriented Logic Programming languages COMP 31 OF Software Engineering 4 units and parallel Logic Programming languages will also Prereq COMP 202/292, COMP 204/294 be discussed. Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment assignments, written exam COMP 307F Networked Systems 4 units Software Engineeringis designed to equip the students Qual COMP 204/294 with the knowledge necessary to undertake large Prereq COMP 201/291, COMP 202/292 software design and implementation tasks in a team Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 2 prac)/wk environment. Emphasis will be on specification, Assessment assignments, written exam design, implementation and validation tuned to large This course deals with various aspects of applications. Students will learn about current communications and networking (local area and wide software engineering tools and environments to area networks). Itintroduces the concepts of computer prepare them for real projects. The contents of the communications, it exposes limitations of module will include the software life cycle, human communications channels, and it identifies network factors in software engineering, requirements analysis components and the way they fit together to provide and specification techniques, design methodologies, communications functions. The course is also a study implementation issues, software tools, validation, of network organisations, and of protocols required at verification, quality assurance and software project different levels for efficient, reliable, secure, and management issues. meaningful communications (International Standard Organisation's OSI reference model and protocols). COMP 311S Theory of Computation 4 units The course also introduces students to some aspects of Qual COMP 203/293 network management and applications. Prereq 8 units of Intermediate Econometrics/MATH/STAT Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk COMP 308F Object-Oriented Systems Assessment assignments, written exam 4 units It is an embarrassing fact that many problems of Qual COMP 204/294 interest to computer scientists have never been Prereq COMP 202/292 efficiently solved. Examples include the travelling Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk salesperson problem, which asks for the fastest way to Assessment assignments, written exam visit all the towns in a certain region, and the timetabling problem, which asks for a timetable that Object-Orientation has recently become very popular minimises clashes given a list of students' course in industry, as a framework for organising software preferences and available times. The only known way development. When done well, Object-Orientation to solve these problems is to try all possibilities, but can improve programmer productivity by a factor of this cannot be done in any reasonable time. There are 5 or more. This module will introduce students to the also problems for which it is possible to show that use of object-oriented thinking and tools through the there are no algorithms at all, let alone efficient ones. whole software life-cycle. It will study a widely-used This course is a study of such problems (technically, methodology for analysis of requirements, and design the NP-hard or NP-complete, and the unsolvable of software; it will also cover the most popular O-O problems) and the techniques for proving that they language in industry, which is C++. Students will are inherently difficult or impossible. To do these learn how an O-O design can be expressed in C++ proofs we introduce a model of computation called code. Turing machines.

COMP 309F Operating Systems 4 units COMP 312S User Interfaces 4 units Qual COMP 204/294 Qual COMP 204/294 Prereq COMP 201/291, COMP 202/292 Prereq COMP 202/292, COMP 203/293 Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment assignments, written exam Assessment assignments, written exam This course provides an introduction to the design This course introduces several of the critical elements and construction of modern operating systems. The programmers need to create effective user interfaces. emphasis of the course is design and the identification These include the essentially technical skills used in of high-level abstractions. However, the course also creating several of the major types of interface as well has a strong practical component and includes practical as human and design issues. Critical to designing an exercises which involve the students in implementing effective interface is familiarity with the substantial components of an operating system. Topics covered body of knowledge about cognitive and perceptual include an introduction to concurrency and constraints. The technical skills of User Interface synchronisation, processes and process scheduling, programming include learning current tools for building interfaces. The course will introduce students COMP 324S Large-Scale Software Project to 'web-technology', programming of interfaces in 4 units the World-Wide-Web environment, a visual Qual COMP 310 programming environment and the Python scripting Classes Sem 2: supervised project language and TK toolkit for building graphical Assessment quality of software product, written report, interfaces. product presentation The Large-Scale Software Project is undertaken by COMP 321S Algorithmic Systems Project students workingin groups of four members. It consists 4 units of working as a member of a group, in the specification, Qual COMP 301 design, implementation and testing of a substantial Classes Sem 2: supervised project software product. The software product is the result Assessment quality of software product, written report, of either a number of groups working on the same product presentation system, or a single group extending an existing large Some of the most exciting work being done in the system. The course has three aims. Firstly, students Algorithms and Complexity area today is concerned learn to use previously gained implementation, testing, with the development of software which applies the and debugging skills in the realisation of a complete, algorithms and techniques to practical problems. Much practical product. Secondly, the importance of careful progress has been made recently in graph drawing, specification, design and project management to computational geometry, timetable construction, etc. successful completion of a product by a co-operating Real-life instances of these kinds of problems are team is made manifest. Thirdly, students learn to take typically too large to be solved without using efficient responsibility for a project and work independently of algorithms that have been developed for them. In this detailed supervision under the demanding 'sink or course you will work in a group to develop a software swim' conditions of real software development. product of this kind. Past projects have included graph editors for X-windows, various computational geometry projects, and timetable construction. COMP 325S Product Development Project 4 units COMP 322S Computer Systems Project Qual COMP 308 4 units Classes Sem 2: supervised project Qual COMP 309 Assessment quality of software product, written report, Classes Sem 2: supervised project product presentation Assessment quality of software product, written report, The Product DevelopmentProject consists of working, product presentation as a member of a group of four students, in the Students work in groups on a software project. The specification, design, implementation and testing of a aim of the project is to provide substantial practical substantial software product, using sophisticated experience in designing and modifying an operating techniques including object-oriented programming. system. The task will involve extension and The product is often intended for users elsewhere in modification of an operating system, which itself runs the University or in the Department, and an important on simulated hardware above Unix. The simulation is aspect is discussion with eventual users to determine very realistic and all of the usual operating system their needs. The course has three aims. Firstly, students implementation problems, including synchronisation, learn to use previously gained implementation, testing, memory management, I/O, etc, will be encountered. and debugging skills in the realisation of a complete, practical product. Secondly, the importance of careful COMP 323S Intelligence Systems Project specification, design and project management to 4 units successful completion of a product by a co-operating Qual COMP 302 team is made manifest. Thirdly, students learn to take Classes Sem 2: supervised project responsibility for a project and work independently of Assessment quality of software product, written report, detailed supervision under the demanding 'sink or product presentation swim' conditions of real software development. As with any other applied science, theories and techniques in Artificial Intelligence, regardless of how fancy they appear to be, are of little use by themselves Computer Science Honours unless they can be used to solve real world problems. Prereq 16 units of Intermediate and 24 units of Senior Computer Science courses at credit standard or better. A Furthermore, they can be best understood and third year Mathematics course is also recommended mastered by applying them to non-trivial practical Assessment exams, assignments, prac work, presentation, problems. In this project, students will have a chance project thesis to write computer programs to solve practical problems in a way 'similar' to what intelligent beings Computer Science Honours comprises coursework do. Specifically, students will be asked to apply learned and a project. The project involves a substantial AI techniques to solve small but realistic and development task and is written up in a thesis. It knowledge intensive tasks (e.g., advice-giving, provides a foretaste of, and a means of assessing the troubleshooting), in a carefully selected domain; and student's potential for, postgraduate research work. to evaluate the utility and performance of the Students are required to participate in departmental techniques used. Students will work in groups. seminars, and are encouraged to participate along with staff and research students in all activities. They courses. Finally, for those who wish to proceed to are provided with working space, and may be honours, the department offers a range of appropriate employed for a few hours per week in undergraduate courses. teaching. Students who plan on a major within the department For further details, contact the Year Director of are also encouraged to take first year mathematics. Computer Science Honours. Staff Postgraduate study Professor The department offers research opportunities in Alan Donald Woodland, BA PhD N.E. several areas of the subject. Consult the department Appointed 1982 for further information. Reader Moshe Haviv, BSc Tel Aviv MA PhD Yale Econometrics Associate Professors Robert Bartels, BA PhD Denzil G. Fiebig, MCom U.N.S.W. PhD S.Calif (Head iniroduciion of Department) The department offers courses of study in Econo­ Andrew R. Tremayne, BSc(Econ) MSc Lond. metrics and Operations Research. In each of these subjects students may undertake a major in a three- Senior Lecturers year pass degree, or a four-year honours degree. Ernest L. Houghton, BEc PhD Subject to resources being made available, a new Murray D. Smith, BEc PhD Monash major in Management Science will be offered in the Lecturer Bachelor of Commerce. The department also offers John G. Goodhew, MEc master's and doctoral programs of study. Associate Lecturers In social sciences generally, and in economics in Diane Dancer, BA A.N.U. DipEd DipEconStats MEc particular, there has been increasing use of N.E. mathematical and statistical methods. In government George (Tig) Ihnatko, BS Minn. departments, banks, manufacturing and marketing companies, public corporations and agencies, research Programmer institutes and universities, the services of those with Decler A. Mendez, BEng Conception (Chile) training in quantitative research methods are in high Administrative Assistant demand. This is par dy due to the increasing availability Sheilah Whyte of all sorts of economic and social data, but also to growing awareness of the importance of quantitative Honorary Appointment analysis in understanding the economy and in Research Affiliate providing a more scientific basis for decision making. Janet M. Rybak, BA DipNAAC The courses offered by the department provide training suitable to a wide range of career choices. Location The courses in econometrics develop the theory of The department is on Level 4 of the Merewether statis tics and show ho w i t may be applied to problems Building. Enquiries, Room 489. that arise in the general area of economics. Some of the areas covered are probability, estimation and Course structure hypothesis testing, regression, analysis, For a major in the Department of Econometrics, the sampling, applied econometrics, stochastic modelling, minimum requirement is completion of a program and decision theory. Instruction in the use of computers consisting of the courses 100 Econometrics I, 201 is also provided. In third year, students may take Econometrics IIA, 202 Econometrics IIB; plus, either courses in operations research dealing with mathe­ 301 Econometrics IIIA and one other 300 level course, matical modelling of production, and allocation or 351 Operations Research A and 352 Operations problems in both the private and public sectors. Topics Research B. include linear and non-linear programming, inventory Honours in Econometrics control, decision making under and For students intending to take Honours in the simulation. Department of Econometrics, there are no special The course offerings are for several types of students. honours courses in second and third year. However, Those who do not wish to major in econometrics or to enter Econometrics IV students must take two extra operations research may nevertheless find it advan­ semester courses at the 300 level, and must include tageous to complement their majors with some courses 301 Econometrics IIIA, 302 Applied Econometrics and in statistics. These students can obtain an overview in 321 Statistical Modelling amongst their options. To Econometrics I which is compulsory in the BEc and enter Operations Research IV students must take two BCom degrees and a corequisite course for Economics extra courses at the 300 level, and must include 351 TI. Further work still for the non-specialist is available Operations Research A, 352 Operations Research B in 200 level courses. Other students may wish to and 321 Statistical Modelling amongst their options. undertake a major by taking the appropriate 300 level To qualify for Final Year Honours, students must obtain credit average or better in four full semester 202 Econometrics MB 8 units courses at the 300 level taken in the Department of Coreq Econometrics IIA Econometrics. Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Major in Management Science Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments Students enrolled in the new Bachelor of Commerce Illustrates how regression models can be applied to degree may take a major in Management Science economic data to estimate relationships, forecast and within the Department of Econometrics. To qualify test hypotheses that arise in economics. The links for this major students will be required to complete between the economics and the econometrics are Econometrics I and the following four semester courses stressed. Consequently, it is necessary to develop in Management Science: 271 Management of mathematical models for the behaviour of economic Information Systems, 272 Management Decision agents and to illustrate how they can be translated Making, 371 Resource Allocation and Planning in into econometric models. A fundamental component Business, and 372 Operations Management. of this developmentis the discussionof unconstrained Availability of these courses depends upon staffing and constrained optimisation problems and of resources. They will not be taught in 1997. comparative statistics. The theoretical and data aspects of various empirical researchpapers will be discussed, and students will be required to undertake related Full year course empirical work. Topics may include consumption, investment, production and cost, consumer demand, 100 Econometrics I 12 units labour supply, demand, and import functions. Classes Yr: (3 lec, 1 tut & 1 prac)/wk Assessment 3hr exam, tests, assignments 301 Econometrics IDA 8 units An introduction to quantitative methods used in Prereq Econometrics IIA economics and related disciplines is provided. Two Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk separate, but related, quantitative methods are Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments developed. The firstis mathematics, which provides a Develops the theory of simultaneous equations and very efficient and instructive way of formulating and multivariate regression models. Central to this analysing modelsof behaviour. Topics include: review development is a significant component of statistics of algebra, functions and logic, mathematics of finance, especially as it relates to principles of estimation and matrices, differential , and integral calculus. hypothesis testing and the distinction between finite The second is the methodology of statistics, which is sample and asymptotic theory. This facilitates the concerned with the analysis of data. Methods available discussion of issues such as: identification, structural for handling, analysing, and interpreting probability versus reduced form, single and simultaneous distributions, sampling theory, descriptive statistics equation estimation, small and large sample proper­ (including time series and price indices), estimation, ties, testing procedures, simulation and forecasting, hypothesis testing, simpleregressionmodels, multiple dynamic models, and policy evaluation. Practice will regression, and applications. Instruction and be given in the application of various methods to experience are also provided in the use of electronic economic problems. computers and statistical software as an aid in the analysis of data. Applications to economics and related disciplines in the social sciences are provided. Core—Operations Research 351 Operations Research A 8 units Prereq Econometrics IIA Semester courses Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Core—Econometrics Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments 201 Econometrics IIA 8 units The theory and application of linear programming Prereq Econometrics I models to economic problems is the main concern of Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk this course. Topics include formulation skills, Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments algorithms, duality, sensitivity analysis, parametric programming, goal programming, integer program­ This course is concerned with regression theory and ming with heuristics, network models and dynamic its application to problems in economics. An essential programming. The theoretical material is illustrated component is the development of various with several substantial case studies and a discussion mathematical methods. Importantly, matrix algebra of available computer software. is used extensively to present the classical multiple regression model and its extensions. Those extensions that are particularly relevant in the economic sphere 352 Operations Research B 8 units include the treatment of autocorrelation, lagged Coreq Operations Research A relationships, qualitative variables, multicollinearity Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk and heteroskedasticity. Practice will be given in the Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments application of various methods to realistic problems The work of 351 is extended in two important directions through the use of the computer and statistical with the consideration of non-linear and stochastic software. models. Topics include quadratic programming, v gradient methods, separable methods, chance and Chi-square tests raises several problems that are constrained programming, stochastic programming, addressed. Special topics may include: panels, inventory control theory, queuing theory, simulation, sampling rare populations, optimal experimental decision theory, and stochastic processes. The design and telephone interviewing. theoretical material is illustrated with several substantial case studies and a discussion of available 321 Statistical Modelling 8 units computer software. Prereq Econometrics IIB Coreq Econometrics IIIA or Operations Research A Classes Sem: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 seminar)/wk Optional Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments Not all courses will necessarily be offered in any one year. This course is designed specifically for students who are considering entering the honours year in the 302 Applied Econometrics 8 units Department of Econometrics. It has two components. Prereq Econometrics IIB The first of these relates to the development of a Coreq Econometrics IIIA variety of skills useful in carrying out a research Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk project in econometrics or operations research. In a Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments seminar format, students focus on a series of exercises Application of simultaneous and multivariate equation designed to provide experience in practical research models to various aspects of economics. Research skills. In addition students will prepare talks and papers involving empirical research will be examined participate in discussion. Concurrently, students will and students will be required to undertake related receive instruction in basic statistical methods empirical work. Topics may include systems of including the theory of distributions and statistical consumer demand functions, systems of factor inference. These will be applied to various modelling demand and output supply functions, macroeconomic situations and decision making problems in business models, empirical general equilibrium models and and economics. Monte Carlo experiments. 322 Numerical Analysis 8 units 303 Forecasting for Economics and Business Prereq Econometrics IIB 8 units Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Coreq Econometrics IIA Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Numerical procedures arising frequently in the Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments solution of quantitative economic problems are The need to forecast or predict future values of developed in the context of illustrative applications. economic time series arises frequently in many Topics include: techniques for the solution of non­ branches of applied economic and commercial work. linear equations and systems of equations, It is, moreover, a topic which lends itself naturally to interpolation methods including cubic spline econometric and statistical treatment. The specific applications, procedures for numerical integration feature which distinguishes time series from other and differentiation, Fletcher Powell methods for non­ data is that the order in which the sample is recorded linear optimisation and generalised Scarf algorithms is of relevance. As a result of this, a substantial body for computing economic equilibria. of statistical methodology has developed. This course 323 Decision Theory 8 units is intended to provide a first course in methods of time Prereq Econometrics IIB series analysis and forecasting. The material covered Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut) / wk will be primarily time domain methods designed for Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments a single series and will include the building of linear time series models, the theory and practice of univariate The principles of rational choice under uncertainty forecasting and the use of regression methods for are evaluated. Topics studied may include: the forecasting. Throughout the course a balance will be foundations of expected utility theory, the analysis of maintained between theory and practical application. the value of perfect and sampling information, and the principles of risk measurement, diversification 304 Sample Design and Analysis 8 units and management as developed in modern finance Coreq Econometrics IIA theory. Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments 324 Special Topic 8 units Prereq Econometrics IIB The twin problems of cost and efficiency in sampling Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk lead to the development of different methods of Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments sampling (stratified, cluster, multistage, replicated samples, probability proportional to size) and to A specialised topic in econometrics, operations different estimators (e.g. ratio). Non-response in a research or statistics. The topic will vary from year to survey may lead to biased estimation, and procedures year. Possible topics include: multivariate analysis must be developed to overcome this potential bias. and Bayesian econometrics. The analysis of survey data leads to a consideration of the estimation of the sampling variances from complex Core—Management Science samples. The use of survey data in regression analysis Management Science courses are not available in 1997. 271 Management of Information Systems during the first half of the course where the emphasis 8 units is on sensitivity analysis. In the second half the focus Prereq Accounting IA and IB, Econometrics I, Economics I is on capacity planning, including capacity size, Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk optimum expansion and contraction programs, and Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments geographical location. The first two parts of the course are then linked by project analysis in the context of The purpose of the course is to introduce students to problem solving during the period between capacity the growing field of information systems, their role in planning and its steady state operation. modern management and competitive business, and how to use them efficiently. Synopsis: Aggregateproductionplanningandplanning strategies. Linear programming: geometry, standard Synopsis: Database systems using dBase IV: problem types, solutions and sensitivity analysis. introduction, creating and updating database, using Capacity planning—level: cost function analysis, entry forms, searching and querying files, reporting, break-even analysis, decision makingunder risk, zero- commands. Information systems: computers and communications technology, introduction to software one programming, integer programming. Capacity concepts, data organisation and database concepts, planning—location: detailed cost analysis, factor- computer applications in business (accounting, rating systems, gravity models, location heuristics, logistics, etc.), use of computers for decision making, the location-allocation problem. Project planning and decision support systems, structure of data processing management: critical path method and project applications, expert systems, the process of infor­ evaluation and review technique (CPM-PERT), mation systems development, the use of information meeting deadlines, reducing the critical path, project technology to improve the competitiveness of the cost management. business. Case studies: Students will be asked to prepare case 372 Operations Management 8 units studies, some of which will be discussed in class. Prereq Management of Information Systems and Possible case studies: the use of personal computers in Management Decision Making business, the effect of telecommunication on the Coreq Resource Allocation and Planning in Business organisation and its links with other organisations, Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments the effect of a possible failure of the information system and implications for the developmentprocess. Most of the time there are broad options as to how to make goods or provide services and it is necessary to 272 Management Decision Making 8 units be open to the options and choose pro-actively to Prereq Accounting IA and IB, Econometrics I, Economics I achieve competitive advantages. This course considers Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk the options for production and service operations. Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments Synopsis: Productivity and competitiveness, product The course presents decision theory in a business design and process selection, waiting line theory, management context. The object is to provide up-to- quality control systems, facility and equipment date information on modern decision analysis selection, facility layout, inventory control, materials techniques and their application. The course presents requirements planning, production planning and decision trees and influence diagrams as an aid to control, just-in-time systems, flexible management understanding a specific problem; utility theory systems. .- - ■ provides tools for modelling personal preferences; and probability is used to represent beliefs about uncertainty. Final Honours Year in Econometrics Prereq Credit average in four semester courses taken in the Synopsis: Decision trees and influence diagrams, Department of Econometrics at the 300 level, but including spreadsheets and decision models, sensitivity analysis, 301,302 and 321 or with permission of Head of Department subjective probability, empirical and theoretical The honours year provides basic professional expertise probability distributions, simulation, value of in the general area of econometrics through instruction information, risk attitudes, multiple criteria. in advanced theory, and experience in independent research. 371 Resource Allocation and Planning in Honours students are required to (a) complete four Business 8 units semester courses of instruction, (b) submit a thesis not Prereq Management of Information Systems and exceeding 70 A4 pages of typescript, and (c) attend Management Decision Making and participate in departmental research seminars. Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk The thesis topic must be approved by the Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments department and progress reports are to be presented The course begins with a consideration of the every semester. fundamental steady state problem in business—how Courses are normally selected from the following to meet demand forecasts or aggregate production list (not all of which may be offered in any one year): planning. This provides a background on trade-offs 401 Statistical foundations of econometrics and allows progression to the most fundamental 402 Specification of econometric models decision tool in resource allocation, linear program­ 403 Limited dependent variables ming. Linear programming is described and illustrated 404 Applied econometrics 405 Time series econometrics opportunity to study the patterns of development 421 Static optimisation within a number of countries and regions including 422 Dynamic optimisation the United States of America, Japan, China, Southeast 423 Special topic. Asia, Australia, Germany, France and Europe in Some courses may be taken in related departments. general. Semester courses are also offered in Urban History, Minority Studies and the Growth of Big Final Honours Year in Operations Research Business. Students undertaking a major in economic history Prereq Credit average in four semester courses taken in the Department of Econometrics at the 300 level, but including must complete Economic History IA and IB and any 351,352 and 321 orwith permission of Headof Department four second and third year semester courses. Students who do not intend completing a major in The honours year pro vides basic professional expertise economic history may take any of the second and in the general area of operations research, through third year economic history courses without having instruction in advanced theory and experience in completed Economic History IA and IB. The only independent research. prerequisite is any four first year semester courses. Honours students are required to (a) complete four Students who have not previously studied history semester courses of instruction, (b) submit a thesis not or economics will not be under any particular exceeding 70 A4 pages of typescript, and (c) attend disadvantage. Further, students with interests in and participate in departmental research seminars. mathematics, the natural and physical sciences and The thesis topic must be approved by the engineering should also give serious consideration to department and progress reports are to be presented attending one or several of these courses, after every semester. consultation with the appropriate heads of department, Courses are normally selected from the following as they pro vide a useful understanding of the economic (not all of which may be offered in any one year): and social processes which form part of the background 451 Simulation of our scientific advance. 452 Applied operations research Honours courses are held for those who, at the end 453 of their first year, show the ability to study the subject 454 Applied general equilibrium modelling in greater depth. These courses last for three years and 421 Static optimisation provide a more intensive and analytical examination 422 Dynamic optimisation of the growth process. Most of the tuition is by seminar 423 Special topic. or discussion classes and students are expected to Some courses may be taken in related departments. complete some lengthy pieces of written work. Emphasis here is placed on comparative and thematic Joint Honours approaches. Students should make use of their training Students may also undertake a joint honours year; in economics and other disciplines wherever relevant. either joint Econometrics and Operations Research Students who are interested in taking any courses within the Department of Econometrics or a joint offered by the department for which they dp not have program with a separate department. For example, the specified prerequisites are encouraged to discuss joint Econometrics and Economics has been a very their proposal with the head of the department. popular choice in the past. However, joint programs A fairly wide range of research work is carried out have also been organised between Econometrics and by the members of the department, which includes the Departments of Accounting, Economic History, specialists in European, American, Australian, Asian, Computer Science and Marketing. Interested students African, economic and social history. Postgraduate should consult the Head of the Department of studies are provided for both MEc and PhD degrees. Econometrics. The entry requirement is that the normal conditions Staff for entry to the Final Honours Year in one of the two Professor departments are satisfied and sufficient courses at the Professor Stephen Matthew Salsbury, AB Occidental third year level have been completed at credit level in AMThDHarv. HonsDUniv G.U.P.S. SanktPeterburg the other department. (Russia) The joint honours program is normally by Appointed 1977 coursework only, with coursework split evenly Associate Professors between the two departments. Robert Aldrich, BA Emory MA PhD Brandeis (Head of Department) F. Benjamin Tipton, AB Stan. AM PhD Harv. Economic History Senior Lecturers Diane Hutchinson, BA PhD U.N.S.W. Introduction Garry C. Wotherspoon, BCom U.N.S. W. MEc The primary aim of the department is to provide students with a firm knowledge of the process of Lecturer economic change in modern industrial economies Lily Rahim, BA MA U.N.S.W. PhD during the past two centuries. Courses offered at the Administrative Assistant pass degree level provide students with the Julie Manley Location explain East Asian history and economic development The department is on Level 3 of the Merewether is presented. The course then considers the economic Building. Enquiries, Room 392. structures and the processes of development in Northeast Asia (Japan, Korea and Taiwan), Southeast Registration Asia and China. The balance between the traditional Registration for all courses takes place in the first and indigenous forces of development, on the one lecture of each course. hand, and the influence of the expanding European- centred international economy, on the other, Noticeboards constitutes one of the major themes of the course. All information likely to be relevant to students is The economic background to relations between placed on the departmental noticeboards in the East Asia and the new international economic order Merewether Building: after 1945 is examined, with emphasis placed on the • outside the secretary's office (Room 392) processes of political and social changes in the region. • outside the Faculty Office (Room 237). Topics include recent economic developments in Japan, China, the newly industrialising economies and Southeast Asia, the links between these nations Economic History and History and regions, and the relationship between East Asia Since 1984 the Department of Economic History has and Australia. cooperated with the Department of History in a The course will not be highly technical in its program making courses in either department presentation of economics and no knowledge of available to students registered in the other. For economic theory is presumed. students registered in the Department of Economic History, this program will enable those with special interests in particular fields of history to take courses Economic History Second and Third Year offered by History in those fields which will Semester courses complement other courses taken in the Department of Students in these years have a broad choice of semester Economic History. Students who have passed History courses. These are listed below. (Not all courses may I may apply to enter second year Economic History be given in any one year.) To pass a semester course, without taking Economic History IA and IB. Second students must complete all assignments and and third year Economic History students may apply examinations at a satisfactory level as well as achieve to take some options in History II and III to be a pass overall. The classes usually consist of three considered as part of, or as the whole of, the second hours per week comprising two lectures and one and third year courses in second and third year tutorial. The assessment usually consists of one three- Economic History. Detailed information on the hour examination and one or two assignments. program should be obtained from the department. In Students undertaking a major in economic history all cases, students wishing to take advantage of this must complete Economic History IA and IB and any program must obtain the permission of the heads of four second and third year semester courses. department of both Economic History and History. Students who do not intend completing a major in economic history may take any of the second and third year economic history courses without Economic History IA and IB 6 units each completing Economic History IA and IB. The only Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk prerequisite is any four first year semester courses. Assessment one 3hr exam, one 3000w essay, one 1500w tut paper each semester Economic History II Honours 8 units This course provides an introduction to the economic Mr Wotherspoon history of modern Europe, the repercussions of Prereq Economic History IA and IB at Credit level economic changes on social, political and cultural life, Honours students are encouraged to take the two and the spread of those developments to the non- courses in Australian economic history: Early European world. It begins with an overview of the Australian Economic History and Modern Australian traditional European economy, then examines the Economic History. They are also required to take a changes that affected Europe, particularly the year-long honours seminar which will focus on industrial revolution. Various social changes—such research in economic history. In addition to seminar as the growth of a new middle class, the emergence of papers, honours students are also required to write a the proletariat and the transformation of the research essay of 5000 to 8000 words and sit the pass peasantry—will also receive attention. The course papers in each course. will then focus on the twentieth century. The Depression and the two world wars, the Russian Revolution, the creation of socialist economies, the Economic History III Honours 16 units period of growth after 1945, the advent of consumer Prereq Economic History II Honours and two options at society and the current economic crisis will be analysed Credit level thematically. Economic History III Honours consists of a year-long The course then examines the historical and seminar course on the history of economic and social economic processes which brought about changes in ideas. This will entail the writing of seminar papers. the economies of East Asia from 1850 to 1945. An Students will also have to present a research essay of introduction to the major themes and theories used to 8000-10 000 words. Semester courses Australian and European history. Specifically, it will Social Aspects of Industrialisation in the United focus on one sexual minority—male homosexuals— States 8 units and use them as a paradigm for comparative purposes. [Not available] In interpreting the historical emergence of minority groups and their subcultures, some attention will be Asia-Pacific: Growth and Change 8 units given to concepts of marginality (including race, Dr Rahim, Assoc. Prof. Tipton ethnicity, etc); the problems of discrimination, tolerance and integration will also be covered. The course examines the processes of development in the Asia-Pacific by critically analysing the historical Urban History 8 units trajectory and socio-economic currents in the region Mr Wotherspoon within the sustainable economic development Approaches to urban history. Origins of cities— framework. A common theme in the course is the evidence and theories. Patterns of urban development question of whether the general approach towards in Europe, Asia and the Americas. Cities as seen by economic development, particularly adopted after social commentators, writers and artists. Cities as the Second World War, is sustainable. The significant havens for minorities. Cities as human environment— contributions of women to the economic development the role of architects and town planners. of the region will be another major focus of analysis. Also to be considered is whether the East Asian The Historical Development of the Chinese 'miracle' and the developmental state model can be Economy 8 units replicated by the other late industrialising nations in Introduction to study the of China. The traditional the region, and what the shortcomings of the model economy before 1840. The period 1840-1949: the roles have been. An analysis of the ideological of Western enterprise and indigenous entrepreneurs underpinnings and economic rationale of trade blocs in early industrialisation. The economic consequences such as ASEAN and APEC will also be undertaken. of political and- monetary instability—the Taiping Rebellion, warlordism in the 1920s and 1930s, Japanese Economic Development of Modern Japan invasion, 1937-49. The establishment of the 8 units People's Republic in 1949 and the growth of the socialist Dr Rahim economy to the early 1980s. The Chinese economy in the general context of the Third World. The main concern of this course is with the economic processes that have transformed Japan over the last American Economic History 1607-1865 8 units century from a feudal state to an industrial superpower Prof. Salsbury and the social consequences of industrialisation. Topics discussed include: pre-Meiji developments, the roles This course will discuss the growth and development of government and private enterprise, agricultural of the American economy from the colonial period to growth, international economic relations, capital the Civil War. This period saw the rise of an export- formation, labour supply, structural changes, based agricultural system and the beginnings of large- population increase and urbanisation, militarist scale industrialisation. Topics to be discussed include influences, economic fluctuations, post-war reforms both institutions such as the merchant, the banks, the and 'explosive growth', changes in labour relations corporation, the factory system and the social structure and consumption patterns, the costs of growth, and including slavery, immigration and the development the oil crises. of a working class. Recent interpretations by the 'new economic historians'—Douglass North and Robert Economic Development in Southeast Asia Fogel among others—will be examined. 8 units Introduction to study of Southeast Asia. Patterns of American Economic History 1865-1970 8 units trade pre-AD 1500. Impact of Europeans AD 1500- Prof. Salsbury 1800. Main emphasis of the course on period post-AD This course will analyse various strands of American 1800. Spread of European colonialism and capital economic history: the growth of Trig business'; the investment. Emergence of 'export economies'. adjustment of the agricultural sector to the corporate Response of indigenous people to economic stimuli. society; government regulation of the economy; the Dualism. The plural society. Standards of welfare. rise of organised labour; the impact of war on the Developments in the post-colonial period up to the economy; and the economic forces behind American early 1980s. Countries selected for particular study foreign policy. are Burma, Thailand, Malaysia and Indonesia. Early Australian Economic History 8 units Economic Fluctuations 8 units Dr Hutchinson, Mr Wotherspoon [Not available] This course examines the growth of the Australian economy in the century from 1788. It considers first Economic and Social History of Minority Groups the shift from penal settlement to capitalism; capital 8 units accumulation, immigration, rural development and Assoc. Prof. Aldrich, Mr Wotherspoon economic fluctuations. Then the period 1851-88 is This comparative course will examine the economic examined: gold, the long boom, railways, pastoralism, and social position of minority groups in modern urbanism and trade unionism. Modern Australian Economic History 8 units the policies of the current government), the end of the Mr Wotherspoon, Dr Hutchinson peasantry, regionalism and the relationship between This course looks at the changing socio-economic Paris and the provinces, and the repercussions of fabric of Australian capitalism in the period from the economic change in French society and culture. The late 1880s. It considers structural changes in the econo­ course will not be technical in its presentation of my and workforce; the pattern of urban development; economics and no knowledge of economic theory is economic fluctuations, especially the major economic presumed. downturns of the 1890s, 1930s, and early 1990s; History of the Island Pacific since the mid-1880s and its failures; the impact of war on economy and society; twentieth century urbanisation 8 units and suburbanisation; and the post-war economy. Assoc. Prof. Aldrich This course examines the history of the island Pacific Economic Development of Russia and Eastern (Polynesia, Melanesia and Micronesia) since the Europe 8 units middle of the nineteenth century, concentrating on Assoc. Prof. Tipton the impact of foreign takeover and the economic, Social and economic structure in the Romanov, social and political development of the islands. Habsburg and Ottoman empires in the early modern Particular attention is given to the French territories of period, the sources of economic development in the the South Pacific (French Polynesia, New Caledonia late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, differing and Wallis and Futuna). The role of missionaries, responses to economic development, decline of traders, colonists and the military will be studied, as traditional social structures and rise of new groups in well as the role of the Pacific colonies in the formation the late nineteenth century, the relation of nationalism of overseas empires. The varieties of decolonisation to economic development, imperialism and war in and integration of the islands will then be discussed. southeastern Europe, the First World War, the Attention will also focus on present-day issues and revolution in Russia and Austria-Hungary, the controversies. establishment of the Soviet regime and economic developments in the Habsburg successor states, Soviet Strategy and Growth of Big Business 8 units planning and German economic expansion in the Dr Hutchinson 1930s, the Second World War, and post-war economic The course analyses the transition from small family development in the Soviet Union and the socialist firm to large managerial corporation over the last economies of eastern Europe. century in the U.S., Britain and Australia. The focus is on the way firms have grown. In particular it examines Economic Development of Modern Germany the growth strategies firms employed and the 8 units accompanying innovations in organisational structure Assoc. Prof. Tipton and information systems. The course also examines The eighteenth century tradition of state intervention changes in the nature of which have in the economy, the impact of the French Revolution accompanied the growth of big business. and Napoleonic wars, the role of central bureaucracies Topics include the emergence of the first big in development to 1850, the economic background to businesses: the U.S. railroad companies, the marketing the 1848 revolutions, accelerated development during revolution, multinational expansion, product the liberal period 1850-73, the 1873- diversification, the new conglomerates, accounting 96, imperialism, the First World War, economic innovations, the multi-divisional structure, the rise of problems of the Weimar Republic, the rise of fascism, professional managers, R&D and the transition to the structure and development of the Nazi economic institutionalised invention and innovation. system, and comparison of post-war development in It is strongly recommended that students complete market and socialist economies in central Europe. Economics I before undertaking this course.

Economic History of the Mediterranean Region The Managerial Firm: Evolution and Attributes 8 units 8 units Assoc. Prof. Aldrich Dr Hutchinson [Not available] Prereq Economics II or H(P) The large managerial firm, operating in a number of Economic and Social Development of Modern product and geographic markets and controlled by France 8 units managers rather than owners, plays a major role in Assoc. Prof. Aldrich modern economies. Although it is now being After briefly examining the economic and social aspects challenged by new institutions such as LBOs and of the French Revolution and the Napoleonic regime, strategic alliances, the large managerial firm is itself a the course will look at nineteenth century develop­ recent phenomenon which only began to emerge in ments such as the changing nature of agriculture, the 1880s. industrialisation and political upheaval. Then This course analyses the development of the large twentieth century developments will be studied. managerial firm since the 1880s. It focuses on the role Themes to be treated include traditional and revisionist of information in two major topic areas. The first is the interpretations of French , the effects expansion in firms' activities through strategies of of governmentinterventionin the economy (including vertical integration (including internal R&D), diversification and multinational investment. As firms This course consists of a year-long seminar stream on increasingly turned to external sources of finance to historiography, for which seminar papers will be fund this expansion, salaried managers began to make presented, and work under individual supervision on strategic as well as operational decisions. These issues a thesis. are examined, leading into the second general topic— the need to ensure effective performance of managers. The course analyses the development of new internal Economics organisational structures and information systems to coordinate and monitor operational managers as well as the development of methods to assure the perfor­ Introduction mance of top managers. The course includes detailed The courses in the Department of Economics provide analysis of case studies which are drawn primarily a general understanding of economic analysis and its from the U.S.A., Australia and Japan. applications. Courses allow students a choice of means to qualify in one of the degrees offered in the Faculty General references of Economics. All candidates for the Bachelor of Peter Temin (ed.) Inside the Business Enterprise: Historical Perspectives on the Use of Information (Chicago, 1991) Economics degree must complete successfully Joanathan Baskin The Development of Corporate I, II and III to qualify for the degree. In Markets in Britain and the United States 1600-19U: addition, students may also enrol in Economics I Overcoming Asymmetric Information Business History (Social Sciences), Economics II(P) and third year Review 62 (Summer) 1988) pp.199-237 Economics (P) courses. Candidates for the Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) degree are required to Topics in Modern European Social History complete two economics courses. This requirement 8 units may be fulfilled by taking Economics I and II or Assoc. Prof. Aldrich and Assoc. Prof. Tipton Economics I (Social Sciences) and Economics II(P); Prereq 12 Junior units of Economic History, History or provision is made for transfer after the first year Ancient History between these two streams. Students in the BEc (Social Classes Sem: 3 seminars/wk Sciences) may continue to Economics III or third year Assessment one 3hr exam, one 3000w essay, one oral Economics (P) courses as the case may be. presentation The Bachelor of Commerce degree requires This seminar course will examine selected topics in Economics I or Economics I (Social Sciences) as the the social history of modern Europe. The exact topics minimum, but anyone wishing to pursue a career in will vary but may include such subjects as: the economics would be advised to take as many demographic revolution in Europe, the 'standard of economics courses as possible. living' debate and the industrial revolution, the link It should be noted that Economics II is a cbrequisite between economic and political power in Europe, the for the Finance and Marketing courses. Students evolution of different social groups, the notion of class beginning academic studies in The University of in European history, the role of women in modern Sydney should consider seriously the benefits of taking Europe and the emergence of new social movements. a major in Economics whether in the normal or P studies programs. Majors can be taken in the Faculty The History of Modern European Expansion: of Arts and Agriculture as well as in the various The Theory and Practice of Imperialism 8 units degrees of the Faculty of Economics. This means there Prereq 12 Junior units of Economic History, History or is considerable scope for linking an Economics major Ancient History with history, languages and philosophy, as well as Classes Sem: 3 seminars/wk with professional subjects such as accounting. Most Assessment one 3hr exam, one 3000w essay, one oral importantly, students with strong interests and presentation revealed skills in the discipline should seriously This seminar course will examine European overseas consider taking the four-year honours degree. expansion in the nineteenth and twentieth century. It Combined BEc/LLB students who proceed to will look at the creation of formal and informal empires Economics III Honours are exempt from completing a and the development of the possessions, the ideologies major in a subject other than Economics (see the behind expansion (including economic, political, social footnote to Senate Resolution 10(iii) relating to the and cultural justifications for conquest) and Bachelor of Economics degree on page 7 of this decolonisation. Emphasis will be placed on critical Handbook). This policy will be reviewed at the end of analysis of theories of expansion and such historio- 1996. graphical questions as the debate on the economic The Department of Economics offers two Honours imperative behind European expansion, the issue of programs, in Economics and in Economics (Social 'native' collaboration and resistance, and the areas of Sciences). Each requires four years of study of the 'culture and imperialism'. discipline. Students are normally admitted to an honours program after obtaining a credit or better in Economic History IV Honours the appropriate first year course, Economics I or Prereq Credit in Economic History III Honours and options Economics I (Social Sciences). In special circumstances Classes 2 seminars where such a grade is not obtained, students may be Assessment three 2000w seminar papers, one 10 000-12 OOOw admitted with the permission of the Head of thesis Department. An honours degree provides an excellent start for employment, particularly in areas such as Computer Systems Officer government and finance, and is an almost essential Chris Rauchle, BA N.E. foundation for postgraduate courses in the subject at Honorary Appointment this University and elsewhere. Emeritus Prof essor C.G.F. Simkin, MA DipSocSci N.Z. Matriculating students who have not completed 2 DPhil Oxf, FASSA unit mathematics at the Higher School Certificate are not denied entry to any economics course but 2 unit Location mathematics is assumed knowledge in first year and The Department of Economics is situated on levels 3 subsequent courses. Those matriculants with strong and 4 of the Merewether Building. Initial enquiries qualifications in mathematics are advised to take regarding the department and its courses may be mathematics courses because they reinforce skills in directed to the main office, Room 370, tel. 93512068, economic theory and econometrics. or by fax to 9552 1118.

Staff Noticeboards The noticeboards for Economics I and II are located in Professors the main foyer of the Merewether Building. Those for Peter Diderik Groenewegen, PhD Lond. MEc, FASSA Economics III and the Social Sciences courses are Warren Pat Hogan, MA N.Z. PhD A.N.U. HonDSc located opposite the Faculty Office. (Another Social N'cle(N.S.W.) Sciences noticeboard is near room 426). William Schworm, BA U.N.C. MA Va PhD Wash. (Head of Department) Course structure Associate Professors Economics I 12 units Debesh Bhattacharya, MA Calc. PhD DiplAdv AKn HSC Mathematics 2-unit course. EconDevel Mane. Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Flora Gill, BA Jerusalem PhD Stan. Lectures are repeated twice on the same day. Students need Anthony J. Phipps, BSc(Econ) MSc Lond. PhD Strath. only attend one of these lectures per day Jeffrey Sheen, BSc Cape T. MS Essex PhD Lond. Economics I is a course, Frank J.B. Stilwell, BSc S'ton PhD R'dg covering both Microeconomics (the analysis of Judith N. Yates, BEc A.N.U. DrEcSc Amst. economic decisions of individual firms and households Senior Lecturers and market structures) and Macroeconomics (the Anthony Aspromourgos, BEc Qld MCom Melb. MA analysis of the level of employment and economic Chic. PhD activity in the economy as a whole). Economics I is a Richard H. Bryan, MEc Monash DPhil Sus. compulsory core course for both the Bachelor of Gavan J. Butler, MAgrScMeta. PhD Calif. (Director of P Economics degree (BEc) and for the Bachelor of Studies) Commerce degree (BCom), and an alternative core Dilip Dutta, MA Calc. PhD Calif. course for the Bachelor of Economics (Social Science). Louis Haddad, BEc Economic issues are pervasive in contemporary Joseph Halevi, DottFil Rome Australian society. The study of economics provides Evan Jones, BCom Melb. MA PhD Mich. a language and an analytical framework for the Surinder Joson, MA(Econ) Punj'i PhD examination of social phenomena and public policy Stuart Rosewarne, BCom MA Melb. PhD issues. Whatever one's career intentions, coming to Bruce W. Ross, BA U.N.S.W. grips with economic ideas is essential for Russell T. Ross, MCom Auck. MA PhD Duke understanding society, business and government. Elizabeth Savage, BSc(Arch) MSc Lond. Economics I provides a comprehensive introduction Yarns Varoufakis, BA PhD Essex MSc Birm. to these ideas and also prepares students for the Donald Wright, BEc Adel. MEc Monash PhD Br.Col. advanced study of economics in subsequent years. The course begins with the introduction of a model Lecturers which focuses on the question of how individuals, John Carson, MEc Monash PhD firms and institutions make choices concerning the Pamela Cawthorne, BSc(Econ) Lond. MSc Bath PhD allocation of scarce resources among competing uses. Open This is then followed by examination of a range of Denise Doiron, MA PhD Br.Col. market structures, the concept of market power, the Gabrielle Meagher, BEc(SocSc) range of factors which determine the level of Abhijit Sengupta; MA Calc. PhD N.Y. competitive pressure which individual firms Graham K. White, BCom U.N.S.W. MEc PhD Melb. experience within different market structures, and Steffen Ziss, BA W.Ont. MA PhD Qu. the influence of this competitive pressure on pricing and output decisions of firms. The first semester Administrative Officer concludes with the examination of the economic Peter Clarke circumstances under which markets fail to deliver Administrative Assistants desirable economic outcomes. Eleanor Armstrong Macroeconomics is the subject matter of the whole Valerie Jones of the second semester. It begins with an examination Debra Mihalovich of the main factors which determine the overall levels Jennifer B.S. Scott of production and employment in the economy, including the influence of government policy and political economy. Concepts introduced in semester international trade. The analysis is then extended to one will be encountered again, but in contexts which explore the implications of money, interest rates and will help to deepen understanding of their usefulness financial markets. This enables a deeper examination and/or their limitations. Illustrative topics are as of inflation, and economic policy. follows: Finally, the course examines fundamental con­ • national economic change—changes in the troversies in economic policy and theory, such as the of income and wealth in Australia; respective roles of markets and governments, causes structural change in the Australian economy; of and cures for inflation, the explanation of income developments in the Australian labour market distribution. • globalisation—the forces generating increased Textbooks and reference books international economic integration through trade, Information will be provided at the beginning of the year investment and finance; the tensions and contradictions arising from these processes Economics I (Social Sciences) 12 units • development—current directions, debates and Prereq and Coreq nil concepts in development studies; the cross-cutting Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk—lectures are repeated nature of class and gender in the development process This is an introductory course in economics • the nation state and public policy—a critical emphasising the relationship between economic, social examination of the role of the state as coordinator; and political issues. It explores the nature of economic consideration of selected policy issues, illustrating analysis and alternative perspectives on economic the limitations of policy proposals arising from policy, economic class and gender inequalities and mainstream economic analysis. the problems of economic development. The course is designed both as a self-contained course and as a basis Tutorials: A single stream, running in parallel with the for further studies in political economy, notably lectures Economics II(P), third year Economics (Social Sciences) Assessment: There are two examinations in this course, and-Economics (Social Sciences) Honours. one at the end of each semester. Assessment is based The course is not mathematically oriented. It is on a combina tion of coursework, tutorial performance based on a liberal educational philosophy, whereby and exams. students are introduced to the major competing currents of thought within the discipline and their Reference books application to current economic problems. It also has D. Fusfeld The Age of the (Glenview 111., Scott overall integration and coherence as a course in Foresman & Co., 1993) is recommended reading for first economics from a social science perspective. semester G. Argyrous and F. Stilwell (eds) Economics as a Social Structure of lecture topics Science: Readings in Political Economy (Sydney, Pluto Press,1996) is useful for both semesters Part A: The Economic Problem Suggested further references and sets of readings will be An introduction to important changes taking place in available at the beginning of each semester the world economy and the national economy and corresponding economic problems: The Australian Economy1 12 units • economic means and social ends; plan and market Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk • the changing capitalist world order This course provides a comprehensive treatment of • national economic performance and structural the workings of the Australian economy. The emphasis change in this course is on applied themes with theory • economic systems and economic analysis. introduced only where necessary to sustain the Part B: The Development of Economic Thought analysis. The aim is to show the interdependencies An overview of the development of economics, between the main sectors of the Australian economy emphasising key concepts, important controversies, as well as with the rest of the world. The course offers the context in which they arose and their continuing a broad appraisal of how the Australian economy relevance: operates and the main policy issues bearing upon it. •" classical political economy The topics covered will include the structure and • Marxist economics development of the Australian economy, foreign trade, • foreign investment, the impact of inflation, problems • the institutionalist tradition associated with maintaining full employment and • the Keynesian revolution monetary and fiscal policies. Attention is also given to • the the manufacturing sector including issues relating to • monetarism and the economics of the new right industry, competition and . The service, • the concerns of contemporary political economy. agriculture and mining sectors are also analysed as well as the system of determination and issues Part C: Economic Transformation in Modern related to income and wealth distribution. Capitalism Reference books The second semester's lectures explore economic Will be advised at the beginning of the year restructuring in the world economy and in Australia with particular regard to their implications for the 'This course cannot be counted towards a degree if taken after the distributions of wealth and income. This is practical completion of Economics II or Economics II(P). Economics II 16 units per week plus a tutorial/workshop of one hour per Prereq Economics I. Students who have completed Economics week. The syllabus is as follows: Semester 1: revision I (SocSc) may transfer to Economics II upon passing a and strengthening of knowledge of basic algebra and special examination arranged by the Department calculus; constrained optimisation; expansion on Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk—lectures are repeated once concepts of limit, continuity and differentiability, and The broad aim of Economics II is the development of onset concepts and convexity, in n-dimensional space; theoretical and applied skills in economics. In the first Semester 2: probability theory; random variables and semester the emphasis is on microeconomics while in probability distributions; sampling; estimation and the second, the emphasis switches to macroeconomics. hypothesis testing; estimation techniques. Bothprovide the basis for the more specialised options In addition, students proceeding to Economics III which comprise third year economics. Honours are required to take one Economics III The first semester covers applications and semester option instead of the Econometrics section of extensions of the theory of , firm Quantitative Economics III if they have successfully behaviour and . Emphasis is given to completed Econometrics IIA and B. the economics of information and choice under uncertainty; industry structures other than monopoly Economics ll(P) 16 units and ; markets for factors of Prereq Economics I (Social Sciences). Students who have production; general equilibrium and economic completed Economics I may transfer to Economics II(P) efficiency; market failure and the role of government. upon passing a special examination arranged by the Applications of the theory are developed during the department course to allow students to gain an appreciation of the Classes Yr: (3 lec. & 1 seminar) /wk wayin which microeconomic theory provides insights into economic behaviour and market phenomena. The Surplus Approach in Political Economy (first semester) The second semester develops models of the goods, Understanding the capacity of an economy to produce money and labour markets and, in this context, a surplus is a central issue in economic analysis. How examines issues in macroeconomic policy. Macro- is an generated? What forms does it economic relationships, covering consumption, take, how is it distributed and for what purposes is it investment, money and employment, are explored in used? These are key questions in analysing the detail. Macro-dynamic relationships, especially those functioning of the modern capitalist economy, how it linking inflation and unemployment, are also grows, why it experiences crises, and why there are considered. Exchange rates and open economy macro­ marked inequalities in the distributions of wealth and economics are addressed, so introducing questions of both theory and policy. The lectures include an income bothnationally and internationally. Moreover, examination of Australian economic policy in relation within the context of the surplus approachitis possible to performance and foreign debt. to explore, for example, the notion of modern In the last part of the course, topics include the deter­ capitalism and the changing role of the state in minants and theories of economic growth, productivity economic management. and technology, the dynamics of the , In introducing students to the surplus approach to countercyclical policy and the relationship between political economy, Economics IIP builds particularly micro and macro policy in the context of recent on the contribution of Marxist theory and explores Australian experience. modern developments in political economy based on that tradition. The first half of the program (I) involves In each semester, students will receive separate a critical appreciation of Marxist value theory in its handouts that give details on topics, readings, tutorials historical context as well as in contemporary and assessment. application. This is followed (II) by a consideration of Textbooks and reference books more recent debates which have emerged within a Information will be provided at the beginning of the year Marxist and neo-Marxist tradition, as well as of so- called 'post Keynesianism' which also has a clear link Economics II Honours 24 units to Marxism (particularly through Kalecki). A Prereq Credit or higher grade in Economics I or as otherwise discussion of the role of the state in the generation and provided by resolution of the Faculty of Economics distribution of surplus will be a central consideration. Students enrolled in this course do not take the Economics II (Pass) course I. Value theory and its contemporary application Economics II Honours comprises two parts. The first • preamble: thesurplusapproachinpolitical economy part is a set of lectures based upon the curriculum for • the Marxian approach to history and economy Economics II, supported by a seminar for one hour • capitalist production each week. The content of lectures reflects a more • particular Marxian conceptions: of the international comprehensive and analytical treatment of the topics. economy; of gender, race and exploitation; of the It also provides a more critical appraisal of the main environment question. themes. The seminars are intended to support this treatment of topics. II. Recent debates in Marxist and Neo Marxist The second part of the course is the quantitative theory component of Economics II Honours, called • modern theories of surplus Quantitative Economics II. It comprises one lecture • the question of monopoly • forces determining distribution of income between • the reconstruction of economic stability and social workers and capitalists; and distribution of order. investible surplus between enterprises and Reference books corporations; feminist arguments regarding There is no textbook for this course. Suggested references distribution and sets of readings will be available at the beginning of • Neo-Marxist international economic relations: each semester unequal exchange; neo-imperialism, dependency theory and underdevelopment; world systems Economics ll(P) Honours 24 units • crisis theories: underconsumption; the falling rate Prereq Economics I (Social Sciences) (pass with Credit or of profit theory; crisis in the international monetary better) or as otherwise provided by resolution of the system Faculty of Economics • theories of the state in Marxist and Neo-Marxist Classes Yr: (3 lec, 1 tut & 1 seminar)/wk traditions The course Economics H(P)Honours consists of the • other currents of economic analysis: Post- normal course Economics II(P) plus an additional Keynesianism and the French regulationist school. seminar program and an additional long essay. While there is no additional examination of material covered The Contemporary Economy: Origins, Structure in the seminar program, contributions to the program and Evolution (second semester) are assessable, as is the additional essay. This unit introduces students to an examination of the This course is designed for those students who modern economy conceived more broadly than it is in wish to proceed eventually to the fourth (honours) the first unit. It deals not only with impersonal forces year in Economics (Social Sciences), or who simply structured through the market mechanism and the wish to do more advanced work in political economy social division of labour, but with more conscious in their second and third years of study. In general the social action throughkey institutions such as business, •course is taken only by students who have obtained a unions, government instrumentalities and the family. pass at credit level or better in Economics I (Social The activities of production, exchange and distribution Sciences), but other students may make application are considered within an extensive context of political for special entry through the Director of P courses. and cultural influences, and crisis tendencies are The seminar topics are designed to introduce contrasted with the processes which have worked to students to some of the major debates in theories of create economic stability and social order. The contemporarypouticaleconomyandeconomicpolicy. charted in second semester is put into a clear historical perspective and its dynamics are explicitly examined. Case studies are drawn upon to Economics III 16 units illustrate the forces at work. The three main sections of Prereq Economics II unless otherwise shown with each the unit are as follows: option Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk per option I. Development of the economy Candidates are required to take four options from the • evolutionofthenationstate,commodityproduction list of options approved for this course. and the domestic sphere of the economy; the The purpose of this course is to offer students scope formation of economic communities: industrial, for developing interests in particular spheres following commercial and financial centres; urbanisation/ required courses in the first two years. Each option suburbanisation and consumption comprises two one-hour lectures per week for one • the linkages between the public and private spheres semester. Each candidate will be expected to satisfy of the economy materials and social (class and examiners at an examination, held at the end of each gender) bases of these linkages. semester. Subject to restrictions imposed by prerequisites, a II. Structural dimensions of the economy candidate may take the necessary number of options • the organisation of production and consumption to qualify for completion of Economics III during one • institutional foundations of the economy: markets or other semester. The recommended procedure is to and the social division of labour; state, business, take two options in each semester. labour and unions, the family Some options are linked by a prerequisite of an option in Semester 1 before attempting an option in • cultural and ideological influences Semester 2. Other options may be linked in a sequence • environmental constraints and the social but there is no compulsion to follow that pattern. The construction of nature: regional, national and treatment of policy themes is emphasised wherever it international dimensions. is relevant to the course. III. The evolution of the economy The list of options is shown below. Entry generally follows successful performance in Economics II though • the central significance of evolution and qualitative some options provide for entry from Economics II(P). transformation • material and social contradictions: contradictions Option Prerequisite within the accumulation process; contradictions 111.01 International Trade: Theory and between the public and private spheres; Policy t — contradictions within the international political 02 International Finance and Open economy Economy Macroeconomics — Option Prerequisite Initially differences between countries are 03 Business Enterprise — emphasised as the source of trade and the gains from 04 Corporate Structure and Strategy — trade. Models which are examined include the 05 History of Economics: Classical Classical-Ricardian model, the Heckscher-Ohlinmodel Economics and the Specific-Factors model. Next economics of 06 History of Economics: Modern scale and imperfect competition are introduced as Developments 1860—1960 _ sources of trade and gains from trade. The section on 07 Financial Economics — the theory of international trade concludes with an 08 [deleted] —- examination of empirical studies aimed at testing 09 Industrial Organisation :— trade theories. The analysis of trade policy begins 10 Australian Industry Policy -— with a discussion of the instruments of trade policy, in 11 Contemporary Economic Issues — particular, tariffs and quotas and their effect on welfare. 12 Capital and Distribution — This discussionis then extended to the case of imperfect 13 — competition and strategic trade policy. The course 14 Economic Growth ■ — concludes with an analysis of trading blocs. 15 Public Finance A: Taxation and Textbooks Revenue — To be advised 16 Public Finance B: Public Expenditure III.15 17 A . — Economics 111.02: International Finance and 18 Labour Economics B III.17 Open-Economy Macroeconomics 19 Economic Systems — This course examines the international economy with 20 Strategy, Risk and Rationality — particular reference to: 21 Bargaining, Contracts and Social 1. the principles governing the operation of the Choice 111.20 international monetary system; and 22 — 2. the role, significance and methods of inter­ 23 Housing Economics — national finance. 24 and the It is designed to provide an understanding of macro- Australian Financial System — economic analysis and policy in an internationally 25 Banking Institutions Management — integrated economy; global economic adjustment; and 26 Financial Intermediation — international money and globally integrated financial Note: For each course semester timing will be markets. Current issues of significance for discussion announced at the beginning of the academic year. may include: Australia's current account deficit and foreign debt; the choice of exchange rate regime; the Students who have completed Quantitative Economics II as part of Economics II Honours may be European Monetary System and the international permitted to take Quantitative Economics III, being debt crisis. part of Economics III Honours, in lieu of two options Topics covered include: for Economics III, should they not be enrolled in 1. the variety of international financial instru­ Economics III Honours. ments; the behaviour of international financial Students may substitute one option in the list of flows and their relation to foreign exchange courses of third year Economics (P) for two options in markets and exchange rates; Economics III. 2. the absorption, elasticities and monetary Any two of the Economics III options are equivalent approaches to the determination of the balance to one course in Economics III(P). The descriptions of of international payments, under fixed and the latter courses are shown in the Economics III(P) flexible exchange rates; section of this handbook. 3. portfolio balance approaches to exchange rates and the current account balance; Economics III Options in 1997 4. the organisation of the international monetary Not all of the options listed below will be offered in system and the mechanism of international any one year or repeated in both semesters of an adjustment; academic year. The available options in 1997 will be 5. macroeconomic policy in an open economy announced prior to the beginning of the academic and issues in international economic policy. year and any changes prior to the start of the second Textbooks semester. To be advised Economics 111.01: International Trade: Theory Economics 111.03: Business Enterprise and Policy Prereq Economics II or II(P) This course provides a systematic analysis of the theory of international trade and trade policy. It This courseis concerned with the economics of business addresses some fundamental questions. Why do enterprise. It begins with an examination of classical countries trade and what are the gains from trade? Is and modern analyses of the role of the entrepreneur there a role for protection? What is the role of GATT and attributes of the entrepreneurial personality. It and what are the effects of the world dividing up into then considers theories of business organisational regional trading blocs such as the EC and possibly the concept of agency, focusing on the resolution of APEC? conflicts between managers and shareholders. Contests for corporate control are the theme of the the classical system as developed by concluding section of the course, with emphasis on in his Principles of Political Economy, revealing some the motivation for and effect of hostile takeovers and inconsistencies in that framework which became the leveraged buyouts. point of departure for Jevons and Marshall. The course examines these developments and subsequent work Economics 111.04: Corporate Structure and in capital theory, distribution theory, welfare Strategy economics and the . In addition, it Prereq Economics II or II(P) looks at the Keynesian revolution in its various This course commences with a discussion of the manifestations and developments in growth and cycle evolution of the modern business enterprise, with theory by the writers (Schumpeter, Hicks/Harrod). specific attention to U-form, M-form and conglomerate Although History of Economics () organisational structures. It then examines aspects of provides a useful introduction to this course, it is not strategic decision-making, includingissues of internal a prerequisite. The course is free standing and suitable vs external growth and diversification vs strategic for all those interested in learning about the intellectual focus. The final section is devoted to Asian corporate foundations of contemporary economics. structure and strategy. The major focus here is on Textbook distinctive features of the Japanese corporation, with There is no suitable text for this course. A detailed reading attention also given to corporate forms and strategies is provided at the start of lectures. Students taking the in other Asian economies. two History of Economics courses may usefully purchase William J. Barber A History of Economic Thought (Penguin, Economics 111.05: History of Economics: 1967)—still in print Classical Economics Economics 111.07: Financial Economics Prereq Economics II or H(P) The aim of this course is to provide a systematic This course deals with the classical economics system analysis of the theory and applications relevant to an as it emerged during the seventeenth and eighteenth understanding of financial markets. The emphasis is centuries to come to fruitionin England in the contents on Financial Theory. The theory builds on micro­ of Smith's Wealth of Nations (1776), Ricardo's Principles economic foundations, with decision-making under of Political Economy (1817) and ultimately, Marx's uncertainty forming a major component. The major Capital (1867). Two weeks of lectures each are devoted models used in finance theory are derived and the to these major authors. The remaining fourteen lectures assumptions underlying themmade explicit. Concepts are devoted to the foundations of classical economics drawn from statistical theory are used frequently, so in and in moral/political philosophy, to a familiarity with statistics is necessary. There is also some specific forerunners (Petty, Locke, Cantillon quite a large mathematical input, predominantly and Hume, Quesnay, Turgot and Stuart) and some algebra and some calculus. Results and methodology major writers between Smith and Ricardo (namely, of econometric studies are discussed. The course Mai thus and James Mill). Emphasis in lectures is on emphasises understanding of the models and the their contributions to the theories of value, distribution ability to solve problems. and growth. This course provides a useful introduction Textbooks to History of Economics (Modern Developments 1860- Copeland and Weston Financial Theory and Corporate Policy 1960) and supplements work done by students in 3rd edn (Addison-Wesley, 1988) European and English Economic History. Copeland and Weston Student Solutions Manual for Financial Theory and Corporate Policy 3rd edn (Addison-Wesley, Textbook There is no suitable text for this course. A detailed reading 1988) guide is provided at the start of lectures. Students Economics III. 09: Industrial Organisation intending to take the two History of Economics courses The semester will reflect the following topics: could usefully purchase William J.. Barber A History of 1. Theory of the firm Economic Thought (Penguin, 1967)—still in print 2. Competition, monopoly and Economics 111.06: History of Economics: Modern3. Dominant firm with a competitive fringe Developments 1860-1960 4. Cartels Prereq Economics II or II(P) 5. Non-cooperative 6. Product differentiation and monopolistic This course examines the modern developments in competition economics flowing from two major shifts in research 7. Limitpricing,predationand strategic behaviour programs which took place after 1860. The first is the 8. Price discrimination marginalist theory which gained ascendancy from the 9. Nonlinear pricing 1890s; the second is the development of macro­ 10. Vertical restrictions and vertical integration economics which grew out of the Keynesian revolution 11. Information, advertising and disclosure of the 1930s. The former attempted to provide a general 12. Durability theory of prices in the goods and factor markets as 13. Patents and technological change well as of the level of output as a whole within a 14. Regulation and antitrust policy. general supply/demand framework. This was developed within a general equilibrium (Walras/ Economics III. 10: Australian Industry Policy Pareto) and partial equilibrium framework (Marshall/ This course examines aspects of industry policy in the Pigou). Its starting point in England was criticism of context of the international competitiveness of Australian industry. It examines industry assistance and distribution and the choice of technique; and the prevalence of foreign multinationals in controversy in capital theory and the critique of Australia. Attention is also given to industry demand and supply approaches to distribution; regulation, trade practices legislation, privatisation capital, distribution, and the and microeconomic reform. A distinctive feature of theory of output and employment; value, the course is the strong emphasis on the changing distribution and economic policy. structure of Australianindustry and on policies aimed at developing high-technology industries. Textbook To be advised Economics III. 11: Contemporary Economic Issues Economics III. 13: Monetary Economics This option treats contemporary economic issues This course surveys the role of money in historical and emphasising the Australian experience though not to modern theories of monetary economics. The main the exclusion of international economic issues. focus is on monetary aspects of macro-economic Attention is devoted to policy issues and experiences modelling and. policy. We begin with some micro so that economic performance is matched against foundations of money demand and supply. We policy prescriptions. This means a heavy reliance on describe popular macro models, showing how money official papers to explore the policy announcements manifests itself through , wealth and and books and journals for critical appraisals. inflation effects. This leads to an analysis of the causes and consequences of inflation and then to a discussion Topics to be treated in this option reflect concerns of the theory of expectations and their use in various for macroeconomic features of the Australian models, e.g. Monetarist, New Classical and New experience including historical perspectives on Keynesian. Various issues may be considered such as contemporary issues. With such a setting the current debt neutrality, and inflation, credibility economic position may be placed in the context of in the contextof optimal monetary policy, the efficiency policy developments over previous decades. of asset markets, the theory of the term structure of Other topics may include employment and interest rates, and the problem of instruments, targets unemployment, balance of payments on current and goals of monetary policy. The course integrates account and capital account including matters about closed and open economy issues—for example, interest debt and equity financing, the role and function of rate policy and foreign exchange intervention policy international capital markets, the free trade and are analysed in tandem. Throughout this course, we protection themes, investment and structural change, relate the development of the theory of empirical trading structures with exports and imports, issues in studies and the evolution of financial institutions. banking and financial markets, and immigration and population. The following textbooks have been used in recent years: Economics III. 12: Capital and Distribution F. Mishkin The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Prereq Economics II or II(P) Markets 3rd edn (Harper Collins, 1992) Throughout the history of economics, theories about M. Kohn Money, Banking and Financial Markets 2nd edn (The the forces which govern income distribution in a Dryden Press, 1993) capitalist economy have been intimately bound up with a supplementary reference being: B. McCallum Monetary Economics, Theory and Policy (Maxwell with the concept of 'capital'; in particular, its definition Macmillan International Editions, 1989) and measurement and how this concept relates to the determination of prices in a capitalist economy. The purpose of this course is to examine the modern Economics III. 14: Economic Growth version of the classical approach to capital and Prereq Economics II or II(P) distribution and also to draw out its wider implications This course deals critically with growth economics. for the theory of output and employment and for The complexity of economic growth is so great that a economic policy. single approach which tries to incorporate all the The major topics covered are: dynamic and structural complications would be 1. The Modern Classical Approach to Capital, incomprehensible. Accordingly, a variety of growth Distribution and the : circular models have been constructed, each examining some production processes; the relation between small selection of dynamic forces. A critical review of relative prices, the rate of profit and the real some of those economics and models will be provided wage; income distribution and the choice of with major emphasis on 'new' growth theories which technique; attempt to accommodate structural change, innovation 2. Extensions of the Modern Classical Approach and human learning. The current revival of growth to Capital and Distribution: rents and non­ economics, after an eclipse of almost two decades, is renewable resources; joint production, fixed both timely and important. It is now increasingly capital and distribution; exogenous influences recognised that intelligent macroeconomic policies on distribution; disequilibrium pricing and have to be formulated in the context of a growing stability of equilibrium in the classical approach economy over the medium- or long-term period. The to value and distribution; course is recommended to students interested in 3. Capital, Distribution and Economic Theory: A growth economics, structural change and macro- Wider Perspective: marginalist views of capital economic policy. General references the 1950s is presented, as is an assessment of the L.L. Pasinetti Structural Economic Dynamics (CambridgeU.P. competing theoretical explanations as to why unem­ 1993) ployment has become such a persistent problem. This J. Halevi et al. (eds) Beyond the Steady State (Macmillan, 1992) is followed by an examination of the labour market G.M. Crossman and E. Helpman Innovation and Growth in the status of particular demographic groups, e.g. youth, Global Economy (MIT Press, 1991) ' migrants, older workers, Aborigines, sole parents, Economics III. 15: Public Finance A: Taxation and the links between labour market status and and Revenue poverty. , Public Finance is about the taxing and spending The second part of the semester is devoted to decisions of governments. The course will cover a examination of policy prescriptions designed to wide range of public finance topics. After an improve the functioning of the labour market and /or introduction to welfare economics and the role of the labour market outcomes of disadvantaged government in the economy, the course focuses on the individuals. Attention is given to, among other things, revenue side of the budget: tax incidence, efficient and (i) the links between the education system and the equitable taxation, the Australian system of revenue labour market, (ii) the links between immigration raising, issues of tax reform and the theory and practice policy and the labour market, and (iii) specific labour of public utility pricing. The course emphasises both market programs designed to assist the process of theory and policy. skills acquisition and retraining of the labour force.

Economics III. 16: Public Finance B: III. 19: Economic Systems Expenditure Prereq Economics II or II(P) Prereq Economics 111.15 The primary purpose of this course is to show that an This course follows from Public Finance A: Taxation economy will function and perform in the way it does and Revenue. It focuses on the expenditure side of the partly for reasons of the environment, partly as a government budget: public goods, public choice, result of policies, decisions and actions of its partici­ externalities, distribution of income and programs pants, and partly for 'systemic' reasons. Although aimed at redistribution. It also introduces cost-benefit much emphasis willbe placed on systemic factors, the analysis. As in Public Finance A, the course emphasises student will be made aware of the common features of both theory and policy. modern economic systems in order to avoid the tendency in the conventional comparative economics Economics 111.17: Labour Economics A literature of giving undue importance to those factors. Prereq Economics II or II(P) The course is divided into two major parts. Part I consists of a general theoretical framework for This is a practically oriented course which aims to classifying and analysing economic systems, using as provide an understanding of labour markets issues— far as possible a system-free terminology (free from work conditions, pay and employment levels. Whether bias). The aims of this part of the course are to define you are interested in the functioning of the individual precisely the nature and structure of contemporary firm, the national economy or issues of equity and economic systems and to develop an alternative social justice, an understanding of how labour markets classification of the world's economies to the work is essential. A range of economic theories will be conventional classifications which have become examined, some of which also draw on industrial increasingly obsolete labels for describing the relations. The emphasis will be on practical issues, on fundamental properties and modus operandi of the realities of the Australian situation, and current modern economies. Part II examines the dynamic issues. Among these are the complex issue of enterprise development of economic systems and their bargaining, what role if any should more centralised chronological relationship, focusing on the evolution wage fixing systems have, skill acquisition and access of market economies and the transition from centrally to jobs, efficiency and equity functions of labour unions planned to market-oriented economies. and employer associations, and the question of how to design a sustainable highly productive work environ­ The course is highly recommended for those ment. Although the course centres on the Australian students who wish to acquire a deeper understanding experience, overseas experience is addressed when of the systemic changes that are currently taking place relevant. in Eastern Europe and elsewhere. As the lectures do not follow the general pattern of the conventional comparative economics literature, Economics III. 18: Labour Economics B no single textbook is set for this course. However, Prereq Economics 111.17 students are strongly advised to consult the following Using material introduced in Labour Economics A, references: this option develops a number of themes concerning the functioning of the Australian labour market and General references J.M. Montias The Structure of Economic Systems (Yale, 1976) the relationship to the labour market of a range of S. Pejovich The Economics of Property Rights: Towards a Theory demographic groups within Australian society. of Comparative Systems (Kluwer Academic Publishers, Particular attention is given to the problems of 1990) persistent unemployment and consequences flowing J. Kornai Anti-Equilibrium: on Economic Systems Theory and from it. A profile of unemployment in Australia since the Tasks of Research (North-Holland, 1971) F. Seton Cost, Use and Value: The Evaluation of Performance, Economics 111.22: Health Economics Structure and Prices Across Time, Spaceand Economic SystemsPrereq Economics II or II(P) (Clarendon, 1985) J.M. van Brabant Remaking Eastern Europe: On the Political This course will provide a general introduction to Economy ofTransition (Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1990) health economics and to the use of economics in understanding current health issues in Australia. Economics 111.20: Strategy, Risk and Rationality Amongst the topics covered will be the following: Strategy, Risk and Rationality offers a comprehensive scope of health economics; health care as a commodity; critical introduction to the increasingly popular theory market failure in health care; the Australian health of games and illustrates how this relatively recent care system; the concept of health and need; health development has enabled economists to claim that care insurance and its failure; the utilisation of health they hold the key, not only to the questions of care; demand for health; the supply of medical services; competition and cooperation, but also to a unifying alternative methods of paying doctors; the hospital as theory of the social sciences. The course begins with a a firm; paying hospitals; economic evaluationinhealth critical revision of the basic tenets of rational choice care; costing health care; measuring health effects theory under circumstances of parametric risk and (economics and epidemiology); valuing human life; uncertainty. The next step is to introduce strategic QALY S—a measure of benefit; designing an economic uncertainty; i.e. uncertainty due to the fact that one's evaluation; disease costing in policy; equity in health fate depends on what others think she/he will think care; different approaches to health care systems; and that they will expect her/him to do. After examining the Australian health strategy review. all the important concepts of game theory (e.g. At the end of the course students should be able to dominance, rationalisabilty, Nash equilibria, mixed describe the key features of health economics as a sub- strategies, subgame perfection, sequential equilibria discipline, discuss health care issues from an economics etc.), the course will scrutinise the legitimacy of game perspective and discuss some of the current theory's claims both within economics and social controversial issues within health economics. During theory (in particular we will look at its implications the course students will be introduced to some of the for the liberal philosophy of the State). Finally the 'classic' articles in health economics and will learn course will turn to evolutionary game theory (a blend something of the other disciplines with which econo­ of game theory and biology) and the expanding use of mists have to become familiar when working in health. laboratory experiments for the purpose of testing the theory's propositions. Economics 111.23: Housing Economics Prereq Economics II or II(P) Economics 111.21: Bargaining, Contracts and This course will cover some of the economic analysis Social Choice used to provide an understanding of housing markets Prereq Economics 111.20 and housing policy. Where possible the Australian Bargaining, Contracts and Social Choice is a natural situation will be placed in a broader context by extension of Risk, Strategy and Rationality. The first comparing the outcomes here with those in other part of the course starts with simple bargaining games countries. before building a theory of bargaining based on the The first part of the course will concentrate on solution-concepts developed by Strategy, Risk and providing background information. It will cover such Rationality. Two types of approaches to. bargaining topics as the nature, structure and operation of housing are examined: (a) axiomatic models (which examine markets, including the determinants of the demand the characteristics of agreements and contracts without for and supply of housing, factors affecting house modelling the process of negotiations which brings prices, rents and tenure choice. The second part will them about), and (b) extensive f ormbargaining models focus on the interaction between housing and finance (in which the analysis focuses on the negotiations step markets and on the nature and effect of the ways in by step). The examination of both types of analysis whichhousingis financed. The third part of the course culminates in a critique of traditional bargaining will concentrate on the institutional framework within theory. The second part of the course (i.e. the one which Australia's housing policies are implemented. referred to by the inclusion ofSocialChoicein the title) It will examine the characteristics of the various begins with the traditional analytical move by liberal housing tenures or sub-markets which exist; viz. political philosophers: thinking of society and the owner-occupation, private rental and public rental, State as a negotiated entity, i.e. as a large scale contract provide an overview of the types of policies directed between individuals (the so-called Social Contract). towards each of these tenures in the post-war period Suddenly the whole spectrum of political, social and in Australia, examine the outcomes of those policies economic debates becomes part of this course. Initially and discuss the policy options being considered by, the issues discussed are straightforward extensions of and available to the government. the bargaining problem: how does a collective agency At the end of this course, you should have a clear (e.g. the State, an environmental protection agency, understanding of the complexities involved in the Civil Aviation Authority, etc.) decide between analysinghousingmarkets;youshouldhaveincreased policies given that each alternative policy will favour your ability to apply the theoretical constructs of first some groups at the expense of the others? Finally the and second year to analysing real world issues; you focus shifts to larger issues such as the evolution of should understand the meaning and implications of social institutions and the history of the distribution of housing tenure; you should be able to critically evaluate social roles in society. current housing policies and policy proposals. Economics 111.24: Monetary Policy and the Economics III Honours 32 units Australian Financial System Prereq Credit or higher in Economics II Honours; or as Students are provided with an opportunity in this otherwise provided by resolution of the Faculty of course to examine the impact and operation of Economics monetary policy within the context of the Australian This course is a calendar year course financial system. The course focuses on the institutions Students who have successfully completed through which Australian monetary policy is affected. Econometrics IIA and IIB are required to take one Topics covered include: Economics III one-semester option instead of the 1. Overview of the Australianmonetary/financial econometrics semester of Quantitative Economics III. system 2. The operation of monetary policy The course comprises three parts: 3. The Reserve Bank of Australia (1) Topics in Economic Analysis 4. The short term money market and authorised This part of the course is comprised of lectures (three dealers hours per week) on a number of more advanced topics 5. The role of commercial banks in economic theory. They are drawn from micro­ 6. Other providers of investment finance economics in one semester and from macroeconomics 7. The impact of deregulation in the other. 8. Recent policy experience. (2) Policy Seminars Economics 111.25: Banking Institutions Each student also takes part in a seminar group (about Management 18 hours in each semester) for study of economic Prereq Economics II or H(P) policy topics. The main focus of this option is the behaviour and performance of banks and other deposit-taking (3) Quantitative Economics III intermediaries. The initial segment examines the The quantitative component of Economics III Honours traditional natureof their product activity in the context consists of lectures and classes (a total of two hours of the financial services sector. The aim is to clarify the per week) dealing with: economic dynamics; main purposes of these intermediaries. These purposes pptimisationin economic analysis; economic decisions embrace the managing of risk through the pooling of under uncertainty; applied econometric techniques. risks across all their customers as well as the provision of services for managing of individual risks. A substan­ (4) Two options tial part of the option is devoted to measurement of Students select two options (each two hours per week risks besetting financial intermediation. Those risks for one semester) drawn from the list of options provided for Economics III. include interest, foreign exchange, liquidity, credit, sovereign, technology and operational ones. The final segment is devoted to the management of those risks. Economics III Supplementary 8 units Prereq Economics II Economics 111.26: Financial Intermediation Coreq Economics III or Economics III Honours Prereq Economics II or II(P) This course consists of any two options (two hours Financial Intermediation attempts to examine the each per w'eek for one semester), not already taken, economic function and theory of the workings of the from the list of options provided for Economics III. financial system from an institutional point of view. It Students who obtain a Credit level or better in this begins with the theory of intermediation, how the size course are qualified to enter the final honours year. and form of financial flows are determined and why intermediaries emerge in the process of Economics III Additional 16 units allocation among investment possibilities. The various Coreq Economics III or Economics III Honours types of intermediaries, their precise functions and behaviour, are considered within the context of the This course consists of four options (two hours each per week for one semester), not already taken, from Australian economy. Some considerationis also given the list of options provided for Economics III. One to the prudential regulation of these institutions and course from Economics III(P), which is equivalent to the problems regulation poses for them and the two options in Economics III, may be included. financial system as a whole. Topics covered include: 1. Overview of the financial system Third Year Economics (P) courses 2. Theory of financial intermediation Prereq for the seven courses listed below Economics II(P) 3. Commercial banks and thrift institutions A major in Economics (Social Sciences) consists of 4. Money market corporations and finance Economics I (Social Sciences), Economics II(P) and companies two full semester 8 unit courses from the list given 5. Insurance and superannuation below. 6. Brokers, mutual funds and collective Note: Not all of these courses will be available in any investments one year. 7. Regulation 1. Australia and World Capitalism 8. Information, disclosure and supervision. 2. Economic Conflict and the State 3. Political Economy of Cities and Regions such as urban socio-economic inequalities, unem­ 4. Political Economy of the Environment ployment, housing and congestion. It examines the 5. Political Economy of Women role of the state in respect of urban and regional 6. Political Economy of Development policies. Throughout the course there is reference to 7. Economics III Elective the contributions of competing paradigms in Descriptions of the courses follow. economics, and the role of interdisciplinary studies in understanding urban and regional issues. 1. Australia and World Capitalism 8 units Prereq Economics II(P) 4. Political Economy of the Environment 8 units (one semester 4hr/wk) Prereq Economics II(P) This course deals with the major forces presently (one semester 4hr/wk) restructuring the world economy, with particular The course introduces students to an appreciation of reference to the institutions involved, and the the nature of environmental problems and how implications of this restructuring for the Australian economists and political economists theorise economic economy. The first part of the course examines the interactions with the environment. The object of the development of capitalism in Australia in its program is twofold. Firstly, the program contrasts international setting and the institutional organisation and develops a critical appreciation of the intellectual of capitalism, of transnational corporations, the nation foundations and analytical bases of the different state and various international organisations. Different approaches within the broad field of study of theories of international economic relations are then environmental and . Secondly, compared with a view to situating Australia inte­ attention focuses on how these different theories rnationally and particularly in the context of economic inform an appreciation of environmental problems in restructuring and crisis. The second part of the course contemporary industrial economies, the formulation considers the process of the restructuring of the and application of policy guidelines and Australian economy in the past twenty years, both environmental economic management, and social and domestically and internationally. Attention is paid to political struggles over the environment. These policy debates which arise in response to the restruc­ concerns are developed concretely by exploring turing process particularly pertaining to issues of different policy measures adopted to date as well as a foreign debt, investment and the balance of payments; range of struggles over particular issues, locally, industry and trade policy; and monetary policy. nationally and internationally. The programis divided into two reasonably distinct 2. Economic Conflict and the State 8 units components. The first concentrates on debates within Prereq Economics II(P) environmental and ecological economics within a (one semester 4hr/wk) neo-classicaleconomicframework, and examines how This course examines conflict and power within the different emphases affectpolicy. The second section contemporary capitalist economies and, against this of the program will focus on a range of theories that background, a range of state economic policies. The conceptualise environmental problems as systemic to modern state is considered capable of resolving, or at contemporary industrial economies. least containing, economic conflict, although in a manner which may reflect its partial dependence on 5. Political Economy of Women 8 units the more powerful parties to conflicts. The course (one semester 4hr/wk) canvasses a number of analytical approaches to The course Political Economy of Women is available conflict, which differ according to their versions of the as a Faculty of Economics interdepartmental, locus and character of economic power. Care is taken interdisciplinary course offered by members of the to acknowledge that the arena of any conflict is typically Departments of Economics and Government. It is broad and complex. Given that the nature of economic available to students in third year Economics and conflict is historically determined and differs between Economics (P), second and third year Government, nations, the examination of state economic policies is and Women's Studies. The course examines Australian undertaken partly by means of case studies of women's workandpoliticalparticipationin Australian significant periods in the development of some of the society. Topics covered include analysis of the major capitalist economies. The overall object of the economics and politics of prostitution, surrogacy and course is to establish the principles on which the housework, and feminist critiques of liberal political efficacy of various state economic policies depends. and economic theories.

3. Political Economy of Cities and Regions 6. Political Economy of Development 8 units 8 units Prereq Economics II(P) Prereq Economics II(P) (one semester 4hr/wk) (one semester 4hr/wk) This option is intended to provide a broad appraisal of This course examines the process of urban and regional the problems of economic development with an development with particular, but not exclusive, emphasis on international economic influences on reference to Australia. It studies the forces shaping the developing economies. The performanceof developing economy and the implications for its spatial structure. economies over the past three decades is reviewed It explores the associated socio-economic problems, and major features inrecent experiences are examined. Attention is given to the major factors in the through the Director of P courses. This course development process reflecting both domestic and comprises a seminar program of two hours per week international influences on developing economies. which runs for the full year. The common features in the development challenge The seminar is on the theme 'Research in Political are treated but characteristics identifiable with Economy' and comprises: individual economies are also taken into account. (i) Methodology in political economy. While the main focus tends to be on the economies of (ii) Critical evaluation of research in political South and EastAsiaand the Pacific this is not exclusive; economy. This is a vehicle for learning about experiences and problems in Latin America and Africa the process of research while simultaneously are also treated during the lectures. The Australian studying important contributions to the connections with developing economies especially in understanding of economic issues. East Asia and the Pacific will be assessed and policy (iii) Preparation for thesis writing. issues related to these connections reviewed. Students will be required to submit additional The main thrust of the first section is the analysis of seminar papers and essays in conjunction with the theoriesof growth and development in aninternational seminar program. setting and then a review of what has taken place. The second section examines the appropriate dimensions Economics IV of an appraisal of development. The third section Prereq Economics III Honours with a grade of Credit or treats development strategies potentially available to better, or as otherwise provided by resolution of the developing economies. The final section of the course Faculty of Economics is concerned with policy issues. It is linked to the wide coverage of domestic and international issues in the 1. Candidates for final honours may complete preceding section. This section will include an requirements in one of three ways: appraisal of Australian policy problems in relation to (a) by taking four subjects, each of about developing economies, especially those of the ASEAN two hours lecture or seminar per week; group, Papua New Guinea and the South Pacific. (b) by taking three subjects and submitting a minor thesis not exceeding 15 000 Reference books words; To be advised (c) by taking two subjects and submitting a major thesis not exceeding 30 000 words. 7. Economics III Elective 8 units 2. The subjects offered will be drawn from the This course consists of any two of the Economics III 4- following schedule though some may not be available unit options listed below. (Each of the 4-unit options in a given year: involves 2 hours of lectures per week for one semester.) (a) Macroeconomic Theory Business Enterprise (b) Microeconomic Theory Corporate Structure and Strategy (c) Economic Development History of Economics: Classical (d) History of Economics: 1860-1960 (e) Economic Classics Capital and Distribution (f) Australian Macroeconometric Model Economic Growth Building Labour Economics A (g) Finance Labour Economics B (h) General Equilibrium Theory Economic Systems (i) Public Economics Health Economics (j) Housing Economics (k) Labour Economics Banking Institutions Management In addition there is an examinable seminar covering Financial Intermediation Australian current policy issues for all students. See the Economics III section in this handbook for . descriptions of these courses. Note: Not all of these options will be available in any Economics IV (Social Sciences) one year. Prereq Economics III(P) Honours Only and three third year Economics (P) courses with a grade of Credit or better, or as otherwise provided by resolution of the Faculty of Honours students wishing to proceed to Economics Economics IV(Social Sciences) must complete Economics III(P) Honours Only and three of the third year Economics Students contemplating Economics IV (Social Sciences) (P) courses with a grade of Credit or better. Economics are advised to consult the Director of P Courses in III(P) Honours Only is set out below. Economics after the publication of third year results in order to discuss the course requirements, thesis topic and appointment of a staff supervisor. Economics lll(P) Honours only 8 units All students are required to undertake a thesis and Prereq Credit or above result in Economics II(P) coursework during their final honours year. The Coreq three third year Economics (P) 8 unit courses coursework requirement is three semester-length In general this course is only taken by students who courses or the equivalent (where the student chooses have obtained a Credit or better in Economics II(P) but a full year course). The semester-length courses include other students may make application for special entry the following: Marxist Economic Theory; Feminism and Economics; Capital Accumulation, Policies and tutorials, and of specified written assessment tasks in Institutions in the Post-War period; State and Economy host subjects for the course. These host subjects are in East Asia; Theories of Social Formations; Industrial usually Legal Institutions and Torts. Host subjects Restructuring and Small-scale Industry Policy; will be advised, Dissecting Liberalism; and Particular Issues in Political Economy. Legal Research Not all of these courses will be available in a given This component of the course aims to promote the year. efficient use of a law library by all students. The major Students may choose one semester-length course Australian legal research resources, both in hard copy or one full year course from among those on offer in and computer based formats, will be located, analysed other programs in the BEc (Social Sciences) degree, and explained. Students will thus gain invaluable subject to the agreement of the relevant department practice in (i) finding relevant primary and secondary and the Director of P courses. Some of the full-year materials, (ii) evaluating them, and (iii) utilising them courses within Economics Final Honours Year (shown effectively. During the course of instruction, students above) are in this category. will be encouraged to adopt efficient and up-to-date research methods. Economics/Law Legal Writing This component of the course aims to provide students with skills in reader-centred approaches to legal For an introductory statement on the Economics, writing, and with a range of generic writing skills Economics (Social Sciences) or Commerce/Law which will equip them both for University study of course, see chapter 1. law and a range of careers open to law graduates. Location These courses are taken on the main University Constitutional Law 8 units campus. The remainder of the course for the Bachelor Classes Sem: two 2hr/wk of Laws degree will be completed at the Law School in The aim of the course is to give students an the city during a period of two years. The Law School understanding of State, and especially Federal is located on the corner of King and Elizabeth streets constitutional law. In the latter area, the aim is to give in the city. Enquiries may be made on: 9351 0344 or an overall appreciation, combined with a more detailed 9351 0345. examination of selected topics. All courses except Legal Institutions may be offered The state context includes the Constitution Act in Semester 1 and Semester 2 depending on availability 1902 (N.S.W.) generally, particular provisions (e.g. of staff. peace, welfare and good government, manner and form, territoriality, separation of powers), the Australia Legal Institutions I 6 units Acts 1986, the State Constitution as affected by, and as Classes: (1hr lec & two 2hr)/wk compared with, the State Constitution as affected by, and as compared with, the Commonwealth Consti­ Legal Institutions II 6 units tution. The Federal content includes introductory material (e.g. Federation, characterisation, severance, Classes: (1hr lec & two 2hr)/wk outline of judicial review and interpretation), selected An introduction to law which explores the origin, federal legislative powers, the judicial power and nature and sources of law in Australia, and the institu­ jurisdiction, prohibitions on power, inconsistency of tions through which it is created and administered laws, Commonwealth State relations. today. Particular attention is given to the legislative process and the constitutional framework in which it Torts 8 units takes place including a study of the judiciary in shaping Classes Sem: two 2hr/wk the law. Major theories about the nature and purpose of the law are integrated throughout the course and This is a general introductory course concerned with the response of law to a range of contemporary social liability for civil wrongs. The course seeks to examine problems is examined. and evaluate, through a critical and analytical study Small group teaching is used for detailed of primary and secondary materials, the function and consideration of the reading materials, which form scope of modern tort law and rationale and utility of the basis of the course and assessment is directed to its governing principles. the development of skills of legal writing, oral Particular topics on which the course will focus communication and argument. include: (a) The relationship between torts and other Legal Research and Writing 0 units branches of the common law including contract This course must be completed before the Bachelor of and criminal law; Laws degree can be awarded. It is graded on a Pass/ (b) The role of fault as the principal basis of liability Fail basis, and all components of the course must be in the modern law; satisfied, including attendance at legal writing skills (c) Historical development of trespass and the and legal research classes, satisfactory completion of action on the case and the contemporary legal research assignments and legal writing computer relevance of this development; (d) Trespass to the person (battery, assault, and Contracts 8 units false imprisonment); Classes Sem: two 2hr/wk (e) Trespass to land; Contract law provides the legal background for (f) The action on the case for intentional injury; (g) Defences to trespass, including consent, transactions involving the supply of intellectual disability, minority, necessity and and one means, arguably the most significant means, contributory negligence; by which ownership of property is transferred from (h) Development and scope of the modern tort of one person to another. It vitally affects all members of negligence, including detailed consideration of the community and a thorough knowledge of contract duty of care, breach of duty, causation and law is essential to all practising lawyers. In the context remoteness of damage and assessment of of the law curriculum as a whole, Contracts provides damages; background which is assumed knowledge in many (i) Injuries to relational interests, including other courses. compensation to relatives of victims of fatal It necessarily follows from the above that the aims accidents; of the course are composite in nature. Perhaps the (j) Concurrent and vicarious liability; central aim is to provide an understanding of the basic (k) Defences to torts of negligence; principles of common law and statutes applicable to (1) Breach of statutory duty; contracts and to provide a grounding in one of the (m) Public nuisance; most important areas of law in practice. A second aim (n) Private nuisance; and is for students to be given the means to evaluate, to (0) Liability for animals make normative judgements, about the operation of the law. This leads to a further aim, admittedly fairly Criminal Law 8 units modestin scope, to make some examination of contract Classes Sem: two 2hr/wk law in other countries. As Contracts is basically a case law subject, the final aim of the course is to provide This course is designed to assist students in developing experience in problem solving by application of the following understandings: principles provided by the decided cases. (1) A critical understanding of certain key concepts which recur throughout the substantive criminal law. (2) A knowledge of the legal rules in certain Educational Psychology, specified areas of criminal law. (3) A preliminary understanding of the working Measurement and Technology criminal justice system as a process, and, the and interaction of that process with the substantive criminal law. Social and Policy Studies in (4) A preliminary understanding of how the Education criminal law operates in its broader societal context. Introduction The understandings referred to in the foregoing The School of Educational Psychology, Measurement paragraphs will have a critical focus and will draw on and Technology and the School of Social and Policy procedural, substantive, theoretical and empirical Studies in Education offer a wide range of courses. sources. Race, gender, class and the interaction of These are not designed to prepare students for teaching these factors will be key themes. but rather seek to promote the understanding of education as a social phenomenon. As such they open Administrative Law 8 units up for analysis the complexities of education through Classes Sem: two 2hr/wk study in a number of fields. For example, there are the This course involves a study of the relationships of study of the nature, context and processes of education individuals and organisations with government through historical, psychological, philosophical and decision-makers. This course examines the legal sociological perspectives; of human growth and principles which apply to those relationships with the development and their implications for education; aim of developing an understanding of the extent to and, across different societies and cultures, of the which decision-makers within executive branch of relationship between education and politics, social government are accountable to Parliament, to the organisation and economic development. courts and to other administrators, such as ombuds­ Details of diploma and degree courses supervised men and review tribunals. The course encourages the by the Faculty of Education such as the BEd, MTeaching development of a critical perspective upon the legal and GradDipTEFL, may be found in the Faculty of principles and an understanding of how the values of Education Undergraduate Handbook and the Faculty of openness, fairness and participationmay be promoted. Education Postgraduate Handbook. The critical perspective requires an appreciation of how political theory and the insights of other Pass courses disciplines may provide a framework for analysing There are two pass courses in education—Education the choices made by administrators, and by judges in 201 and 202 and Education 301 and 302, second and judicial review. third year courses respectively. Students who have completed Education 201 and 202 may proceed to Michael Bailey, BA Oxf. MEd DipEd Brist. PhD Macq. Education 301 and 302. All these courses in Education Neville Goodwin, BA MEd are offered jointly by the School of Educational John M. Harvey, DPhil Sus. GDipEdSt Mitchell C.A.E. Psychology, Measurement and Technology and the MA School of Social and Policy Studies in Education. Lecturers Jennifer Bowes, PhD Macq. BA, MAPsS Prerequisites Sandra H. Nicholls, BA U.N.S. W. PhD Macq., MAPsS A student may only enrol in a course in education MBPS after successful completion of two first year semester David J. Reid, GDipEdSt S.C.A.E. GDipCommMgt courses in Sociology, Social Anthropology, Philosophy Kuring-gai C.A.E. MA DipEd, MACE MASET or Psychology. Alexandra Rivers, BA DipTeach N.Z. MA Any student who has completed two first year Richard Walker, BA DipEd N'cle(N.S.W.) MEd semester courses in Sociology, Social Anthropology, N'cle(N.S.W.) & Syd. Philosophy or Psychology may take the courses Education 201 and 202. Associate Lecturers Eveline Chan, GradDipTeach(TESL) S.A.C.A.E. BEd Noticeboards John Eklund, BEd W'gong GradDipEdStud S.C.A.E. Education students will need to check noticeboards in Gillian Morgan, DipTeach Syd.Teach.Coll. ASCM BA the foyer of the new Education Building Complex Administrative Assistant (A35). Claire KendaU, BEd S.C.A.E. Course Coordinators Social and Policy Studies in Education Education 201 and 202: Mr Darcy Anderson, Room Professor 610, A35 Education 301 and 302: Ms Dianne Butland, Room Associate Professors 632, A35 Phillip W. Jones, BA PhD Honours Geoffrey E. Sherington, MA U.N.S.W. PhDMcM. BA Educational Psychology, Measurement and (Head of School) Technology: Mr Richard Walker, Room 523, A35 Reader , Social and Policy Studies in Education: Dr Marjorie Robert E. Young, BA PhD Monash MA P.N.G. O'Loughlin, Room 528, A35 Senior Lecturers Advice on courses Stephen J. Crump, BA DipEd Macq. MEd PhD Members of staff will be available in the Education Christine B. Inglis, MA A.N.U. PhD Lond. BA Building (A35) before the commencement of the James D. Mackenzie, BA Monash MA PhD U.N.S.W. academic year to give advice on planning units and Marjorie O'Loughlin, MA Macq. PhD U.N.S.W. sequences of units. Students should consult the Anthony R. Welch, HigherDipTeach Melb.CA.E. MA relevant noticeboards for details of appropriate PhD DipEd Lond. advisers. Lecturers Dianne L. Butland, BA LaT. MEd N.E. Registration John Roe, BD MEd MA DipEd Macq. ThL A.C.T. ThC, Students should register with the appropriate course MTCMACE coordinator. Ralph Sadler, BA, MACE Joanne F. Travaglia, GradDipAdultEd I.T.A.T.E. Evening students CertTESOLBSocStud Evening students are advised that it is possible to complete a full sequence of Education II, III and IV Associate Lecturers only if some classes held from 4.15 pm are attended. Nigel Bagnall, BA Auck. BEd Massey MEd Melb. Otherwise, evening students may need to combine Craig Campbell, BA DipEd PhD Adel. day and evening units. Kathleen Robinson, BA Maria Varbaressos, DipEd Syd.Teach.Coll. BA MEd Staff Administrative Assistants Educational Psychology, Measurement and Lorraine Wildman Technology Teresa Wise Associate Professors Raymond L. Debus, PhD III. BA DipEd Courses in Education Bruce D. Keepes, BS S.Calif. MA Long Beach EdD Stan., Students must take a series of options within the one MACE MACS academic year in completing either second or third Kenneth E. Sinclair, EdM PhD III. BA year Education. All options are of one semester's duration. Each option entails some combination of Ian D. Smith, MA PhD Stan. BA (Head of School) lectures, tutorials and/or seminars. Normally, Senior Lecturers students take two options in each semester but, in Darcy R. Anderson, BA MScSoc U.N.S.W. MEd MA, special cases, permission may be granted to do MAPsS MACE otherwise. A measure of specialisation is required in that Department provides an introduction to finance for students must select a sequence from within one of the accounting students. In addition, students interested two programs. To this end, each program contains in a career in financial accounting are encouraged to four levels as shown in the table available in the complete the finance major as a means of enhancing Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Handbook. A student who their career prospects in the financial sector. takes Education 201 and 202 followed by Education Increasingly, prospective graduates in both 301 and 302 would be able to complete a full 'major' marketing and economics are finding it valuable to sequence of four across the two years, and this is obtain a sound knowledge of finance by adding a obligatory for Educational Psychology sequences. For finance major to their primary discipline. For example, Social and Policy Studies the 'major' sequence need financial viability must be established before a new only consist of three options across the two years. product launch. A whole host of new and innovative financial products need to be marketed. A knowledge Education 201 and 202 16 units of financial economics and finance is expected of most Students must take three options: two will be 2001, economics graduates employed by industry. A 2002; and the other will be 2100. combination of finance and commercial law is useful, Education 301 and 302 16 units not only for careers in the corporate sector but also with respect to regulatory bodies such as the Australian Students must select 4 options from the range offered Securities Commission or the Australian Stock to complete the full 16 units. Students who have not Exchange. Just about anyone seeking a career in either completed Education 201 and 202 must select 2001, the State or Federal public service, especially the 2002 and 2100, unless your previous university studies central economic/finance policy areas, is likely to qualify you, in the opinion of the department(s) benefit from an exposure to our subjects. Most concerned, for study at the higher levels. The general engineering graduates these days are expected to be coordinator should be consulted in this regard. In the able to evaluate investment projects, for which some particular case of Educational Psychology, a student knowledge of financial economics is required. who has completed Psychology 201 or Psychology The Department offers a major in the Bachelor of 350 (developmental) is permitted to take level 3 options Economics and Commerce degrees at both pass and in the Educational Psychology program, thus by­ honours levels. The major commences in the second passing levels 1 and 2. year of the undergraduate program and is completed Honours courses in Education in the third year. Students must do both Economics Details of all Honours courses in Education are and Econometrics as well as Financial Accounting in available in the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Handbook. their first year. Undergraduates may also proceed to an honours degree by undertaking the honours components, Finance commencing in the second semester of second year and continuing in both semester 1 and semester 2 of third year. Students who have performed well in Introduction these honours courses may then proceed to the fourth The Department of Finance is located in the West honours year to obtain an honours degree in finance. Wing of the Institute Building on City Road directly This will involve both coursework and a thesis. This behind the Merewether Building. Enquiries: Room would normally be done on a full-time basis. The N253. honours program is primarily designed to provide The Department offers a variety of interesting and students with the requisite research skills in finance to relevant courses in finance /financial economics which proceed to postgraduate study via research but are designed to be both challenging and to have a honours students are also in high demand in the strong career focus. The courses are designed to financial sector. integrate a variety of practical applications along with Students wishing to obtain postgraduate qualifica­ the essential theory and financial reasoning skills. As tions via research by preparing a thesis may undertake a result, students should be well-equipped to embark either anMEc or PhDinFinance, dependent onmeeting on a variety of careers in the financial sector. Possible required entry qualifications. As a general rule, the career avenues include the major financial houses and MEc requires the equivalent of two years of full-time banks and financial intermediaries, financial areas study and the PhD three years. Some coursework may within corporations, corporate advisory work, broking also be required. and dealing in securities markets, portfolio The Department also plays a major role in post­ management with large institutions and financial and graduate education via coursework. Finance is so far investment analysis. the most sought-after area in the new and highly In addition to these sorts of avenues, students may successful Master of Commerce, MCom, program wish to combine finance with related studies in other which was launched in 1995. Over 300 students are commercial and economics areas. Possible combina­ enrolled in this program in 1996. tions include finance and accounting, finance and The research interests of the staff cover a wide marketing and finance and economics. In addition, range of fields. Especially prominent is an under­ finance can be taken as par t of a combined degree with standing of just how security markets operate (financial any one of Arts-Commerce, Engineering-Commerce market microstructure) and how corporations are or Law-Commerce. structured and controlled so as to ensure optimum To satisfy the professional accounting bodies the performance (corporate governance and control). Members of the Department in association with MichaelJ.Aitken,MBSMass^rPhDLZ.N.S.W.,ASCPA collaborators have attracted in excess of $3 million in (Executive Director of the Asia-Pacific Capital Markets current research funds from major sponsors such as Foundation) the Commonwealth Government (AustralianResearch Associate Professor Council), the Australian Stock Exchange and the Gerald Garvey, BEc U.C. Berkeley MA PhD Calif. Sydney Futures Exchange. For example, in the last few years ARC grants totalling $450 000 have been Lecturers awarded to members of the Department to work on Alex Frino, MCom W'gong MPhil Comb. PhD issues such as principal trading by stockbrokers and Michael McCorry, MBA PhD Memphis corporate governance issues. In 1996 the ARC awarded the Department $700 000 to set up the National Micro Associate Lecturers Economic Modelling Laboratory (MEMLab) to carry Elvis Jarnedc, BCom W'gong out data-intensive modelling and simulation utilising Sheri McCorry, MA Memphis supercomputers. The Department's partners in this Gloria Semaan-Younes, BEc(Acct) project are the sister Departments of Marketing and Roland Winn, BEc Econometrics in the Economics Faculty and the Asia- Julianne Wright-Bartels, BEc Pacific Capital Markets Foundation, ACMF, which is Professorial Fellow also headquartered in the Department. The strong Peter Marshman, BCom Melb., FSIA FAIM research profile of the Department, combined with (Director-Administration, ACMF) outstanding support from the financial community including the National Australia Bank, indicates both Administrative Assistant the strength and practical relevance of the Department. Deborah Wright To give some indication of research success, a recent Computer Officer working paper by Jack B. Towe ranks all major finance Franc Carter, BSc and accounting departments in Australia in terms of the number of pages per staff member published in ACMF Research Fellows major refereed journals over the period 1990-94. The Philip Brown (Visiting Professor) Department of Finance at Sydney ranked number one Kingsley Fong, BCom U.N.S. W. with 56 pages per staff member compared with the Maurice Peat (Visiting Senior Lecturer) next best department in the country at 13 pages. While staff numbers at Sydney are still smaller than some ACMF Analysts comparison departments, its publication performance Tim Cooper, BA is still far better than any other departments of Peter Fletcher, PhD A.N.U. economics or econometrics in the country as well, if Camilla Ip, BSc comparisons are made with another study by Towe Tom Jones, BA published recently in The Economic Record. Moreover, Stephen Sainsbury if the results for the Departments of Finance and Tim Smithers, BSc U.N.S.W. Accounting at Sydney are combined, then the combination out-performs all other departments, Finance program including combined departments, in the country. Students may undertake courses on a wide range of The Asia-Pacific Capital Markets Foundation subjects such as Corporate Finance, Corporate Control, (ACMF), which incorporates the Securities Industry Derivative Securities, Financial Statement Analysis, Research Centre of Asia-Pacific (SIRCA), is a co­ Advanced Corporate Finance and Trading and Dealing operative venture between a number of leading in Securities Markets. universities and the financial community. It has been For the purposes of the BEc and BCom degrees a established within the Department to undertake major in Finance comprises four semester courses, research into securities markets. The research and Finance 201, Finance 202, either Finance 302 or Finance related activities undertaken by ACMF is overseen by 303 or Finance 307 and either Finance 304 or Finance a board which includes luminaries from the financial 305. A third-year Finance subject must be done in both sector and a number of major universities. The the first and second semester. Additional Finance Australian Stock Exchange, the Sydney Futures subjects may be taken. Exchange and a number of major banks have made cash contributions to SIRCA in excess of $1 million together with contributions in kind which include the BEc degree provision of trade by trade security market data Year Semester 1 Semester 2 covering virtually every transaction for nearly the last decade. 1 Economics I Economics I Econometrics I Econometrics I Accounting 1A Accounting IB Staff or Financial or Management Professors Accounting Accounting Peter L. Swan, BEc A.N. U. PhD Monash Concepts Concepts or Appointed 1994 Elective (Head of Department) Elective Elective Year Semester 1 Semester 2 Year 3 of the Undergraduate program in 1997 (2nd year of the Finance major) 2 Finance 201 Finance 202 Unit Economics II Economics II value Elective Elective Elective1 Sem 1 Finance 302: Derivative Securities , 8 Finance 303: Corporate Control 8 3 Finance 302 or Finance 304 or Finance 307: Financial Statement Finance 3032 or Finance 305 Analysis 8 Finance 3073 Finance 303 Honours 4 Economics III Economics III Sem2 Finance 304: Trading and Dealing in Finance 302 or Finance 304 or Securities Markets 8 Finance 3032 or Finance 3052 or Finance 305: Advanced Corporate Finance 3073 or Elective Finance 8 Elective Finance 304 Honours 4 Elective1 The Finance major constitutes Finance 201 and Finance 'May be taken either semester 202, plus one of the options Finance 302 or Finance 303 'Depending on the Finance choice above 3Taught by the Accounting Department and sometimes offered in or Finance 307 in first semester and one of the options the Second Semester. Financial Accounting A is a prerequisite. Finance 304 or Finance 305 in second semester. Entry to the Fourth Year Honours program depends upon performance in Finance 202 Honours, Finance 303 Honours and Finance 304 Honours. Finance honours BCom degree will be taken in both the first semester (Finance 303 Year Semester 1 Semester 2 Honours) and in the second semester (Finance 304 Honours). Approval of the Head of Department (not 1 Economics I Economic I automatically given) would be required to treat two Econometrics I Econometrics I courses in the one semester as fulfilling the Accounting 1A Accounting IB requirements for the finance major. or Financial or Management Accounting Accounting Concepts Concepts Finance 201: Corporate Finance 1 8 units Elective Elective Prereq Accounting IA or Financial Accounting Concepts, Economics I and Econometrics I 2 Finance 201 Finance 202 Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/week Assessment one 3hr exam, assignments Economics II Economics II Elective Elective This course provides an introduction to corporate Elective1 finance, including investment decision-making. The first part of the course deals with the analytical 3 Finance 302 or Finance 304 or techniques necessary to make investment decisions, Finance 3032 or Finance 305 both when cash flows are known and when they are Finance 3073 uncertain. The second part of the course deals with the Elective Elective corporation and the Australian capital market, the Finance 302 or Finance 304 or raising of capital; including equity versus debt, and Finance 3032 or Finance 3052 or allocating capital, including dividends, internal Finance 3073 or Elective investments and takeovers. As far as possible, the Elective course will attempt to link theory to practical Elective1 applications via examples, exercises and assignments. 'May be taken either semester 2Depending on the Finance choice above Finance 202: Corporate Finance II 8 units Taught by the Accounting Department and sometimes offered in Prereq As for Finance 201 the Second Semester. Financial Accounting A is a prerequisite. Coreq Finance 201 Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, assignments Structure of the Finance Major in 1997 This course builds on Finance 201: Corporate Finance Year 2 of the Undergraduate program in 1997 (1st I, but is more applied in that it is concerned with the year of the Finance major) actual workings of financial markets. It examines the operation of financial markets from both a theoretical Unit and practical perspective, concentrating mainly but value not exclusively on Australian financial markets. The course deals with the economic role of capital markets Sem 1 Finance 201: Corporate Finance I 8 and theories of capital market behaviour. The Sem 2 Finance 202: Corporate Finance II 8 operations of equity and derivative markets in Finance 202 Honours 4 Australia, including options and futures, are examined along with foreign exchange and debt markets. A new 'management entrenchment'; the packaging of and important area of study known as 'market cashflow and control rights; the 'dual class' share microstructure' is introduced and a number of issues controversy and 'super-voting' shares; leveraged incorporate governance and take-overs are examined. buyouts; employee ownership and profit-sharing; the choice between debt, equity, and more complex Finance 202 Honours 4 units securities; corporate governance including boards, Prereq Credit or higher grade in Finance 201 active investors and regulators; and Anglo-American Coreq Finance 202 style firms versus the 'main bank' systems of Japan Classes Sem 2 and Germany. Assessment assessment of advanced topics covered References A weekly workshop/seminar which deals with more G. Garvey and P. Swan The Economics of Corporate advanced topics in corporate finance and the operation Governance: Beyond the Marshallian Firm' journal of of financial markets. Corporate Finance 2 Entry to Finance 202 Honours is competitive and B. Holmstrom and J. Tirole "The Theory of the Firm' in R. depends on the applicant's grade point average as Schmalencee and R. Willig (eds) Handbook of Industrial well as performance in prerequisite courses. Organization (North Holland, 1989)

Finance 302: Derivative Securities 8 units Finance 303: Honours 4 units Prereq Finance 201 and 202, Economics II Prereq Credit or higher grade in Finance 202 Honours or Classes Sem 1: (2 lec and 1 tut)/wk; one workshop session Finance 202 and Economics II (not every week) Coreq Finance 303: Corporate Control Assessment exams, assignment, tests Classes Sem 1 Assessment assessment of advanced topics covered. Options, futures and swaps are derivatives of under­ lying securities such as equities and bonds. These A weekly workshop/seminar which deals with more relatively new and rapidly growing types of securities advanced aspects of finance, particularly corporate are increasingly used to manage risk exposure and as control and governance. a relatively low-cost-way of taking a position in a Entry to Finance 303 Honours is selective with security or portfolio. They are also being used as part preference given to students with a high grade point of senior management compensation as a way of average. Preference is also given to students who have attempting to align the interests of shareholders with completed or are enrolled in Econometrics IIA and are that of management. undertaking two units of Finance in the first semester. The course is designed to provide an introduction to this important area of finance without requiring on Finance 304 : Trading and Dealing in the part of students a high level of mathematical Securities Markets 8 units sophistication. Students will gain exposure to the Prereq Finance 201, Finance 202, Economics II operations of the Sydney Futures Exchange (SFE) and Classes Sem 2: (2 lec and 1 tut)/wk the Options Exchange and some may even choose to Assessment one 3hr exam, assignments • enhance their learning experience by investing small The purpose of this course is to provide students with sums on these exchanges. a detailed working knowledge of Australia's exchange based securities markets. The emphasis is on Finance 303: Corporate Control 8 units understanding: Prereq Finance 201 and 202, Economics II • patterns of trading behaviour within and between Classes Sem 1: (2 lec and 1 tut)/wk markets; Assessment major practical assignment, several small • the three main features of the markets, namely exercises, one 3hr exam transaction costs, liquidity and volatility; The finance sector requires many professionals to • the roles played by: advise and assist in the process of new company (i) institutional versus private investors; formation and listings on the stock exchange, (ii) brokers and market-makers; acquisitions, mergers, restructurings, issuance of new (iii) principal and agency trading; debt and equity, board structure and composition (iv) informational technology; including outside directors, structuring of executive (v) regulation. compensation packages and the like. These activities The broad aim of the course is to provide students generally fall under the rubric of corporate control, or with both a practical appreciation of the institutional in more modern academic parlance, 'corporate structure of exchange-based securities markets and a governance'. thorough research grounding in the techniques which This course will focus on how corporations are lead to this understanding, namely the relatively new formed, how ownership and control is allocated, and discipline known as 'security market microstructure'. how it changes hands through takeovers, bankruptcies, and reorganisations. The following are provided as Finance 304 Honours 4 units examples of the sorts of topics to be covered: how the Prereq Credit or higher grade in Finance 303 Honours or internal labour market and 'pay for performance' credit or higher in either Finance 302 or Finance 303 within firms impinges on the firm's capital structure; Coreq Finance 304: Trading and Dealing in Securities Markets the role and nature of takeover bids and corporate Classes Sem 2 restructuring; the questionable condemnation of Assessment assessment of advanced topics covered A weekly workshop/seminar which deals with more who are capable of undertaking research in finance, advanced aspects of finance, particularly security either via an advanced research degree at the Master's market microstructure. or PhD level or in the financial community in technical/ Entry to Finance 304 Honours is selective with research-related positions requiring both a high level preference given to students with a high grade point of analytical skills and an ability to work average. Preference is also given to students who have independently. We expect these graduates to be highly completed or are enrolled in Econometrics IIA and are sought after by the banking, stockbroking and financial undertaking two units of Finance in the second consulting communities, as well as by academia for semester. higher degrees followed by an academic career path.

Finance 305 Advanced Corporate Finance The Program 8 units The program consists of four one-semester units or their equivalent, typically taught in the Firs t Semester, Prereq Finance 201; Finance 202, Economics II and a Research Report or thesis which represents the Classes Sem 2: (2 lec and 1 tut)/wk, one workshop session (not every week) Hme-equivalent of four one-semester units in terms of Assessment one 3hr exam, assignment, tests workload and is to be completed in the Second Semester. The Research Report will be weighted This subject covers some of the topics introduced in equally with the coursework. Finance 201 and 202, such as the Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM), the Arbitrage Pricing Theory (APT), Coursework units: dividend policy and corporate policy, in greater depth These are either one semester units or combinations of and sophistication while at the same time extending half-semester units. Typically, half-semester units will the analysis to a number of new areas. Moreover, be offered in research methodology and computer / some of the empirical evidence is also closely examined. data / statistical skills. Initially, other units to be This course draws more heavily on the analytical, offered will most likely be on: quantitative and statistical skills of students. It is • securities market micro-structure; designed for students who wish to be well-equipped • corporate governance, and to join the corporate financial world and for those who • capital markets and information, are preparing themselves for more advanced degrees although actual offerings in any year will depend on in finance or financial economics. staff availability and demand. With approval, the equivalent of a semester unit could be taken from Finance 307 Financial Statement Analysis other departments or faculties. 8 units Research Report Prereq Financial Accounting A The Research Report will be written up in the style of Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 2 prac)/wk anacademicarticlebutwithamoreextensiveliterature Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignments review. Candidates are encouraged to undertake Although the appropriate 'form' of financial analysis research of an original nature and of publishable depends largely on the specific context (e.g. equity quality from the outset. Typically the subject areas are investments, credit extension, analysis of supplier/ broadly going to relate to the securities market customer health, competitor analysis, regulatory microstructure or corporate governance areas, or some overview or intervention, valuation for takeover/ combination of the two, since these are the areas in restructuring), many of the techniques of financial which the Department has expertise and supervisory analysis are common to each. A primary purpose of skills. this course is to develop an understanding of these techniques, as well as the inherent difficulties in their Students who have completed double majors in application. Specific issues addressed include the Finance and Accounting, Finance and Econometrics, analysis of business performance and disclosure, the Finance and Economics or Finance and Marketing, analysis of earnings quality, cash flow assessment, and who are eligible to undertake Fourth Year Honours credit worthiness and accounting-based valuation programs in at least one discipline areas of their two methods. majors, may be eligible to undertake ]oint Honours programs, subject to approval of the Honours Finance IV Honours 24 units Coordinators in both departments. Prereq Finance 202 Honours, Finance 303 Honours and Finance 304 Honours with the grade of Credit or better in at least two, or with the permission of the Head of Geography Department Students contemplating Finance IV Honours are Introduction advised to consult with the Finance Honours Co­ Geography is a varied and versatile subject covering ordinator after publication of the third year results to a broad spectrum of knowledge. It was once concerned discuss course requirements, a thesis topic and the principally with earth description, but modern appointment of a staff supervisor. geography now embraces humanity's relationship The Fourth Year Honours Program in Finance is with the earth both within a scientific and highly directed at producing extremely high quality graduates structured framework and in terms of social science and humanistic perspectives. Currently there are three Honorary Appointments main elements of geography actively pursued by the Emeritus Professor Department. Aspects of physical geography (geomor- T. Langford-Smith, BA Melb. MSc Adel. PhD A.N.U. phology) deal with such phenomena as landforms, BSc plants and soil as elements of physical landscapes. Environmental geography is concerned with the human/ Honorary Associates land relationships. This was a traditional theme but it P. Roy, PhD DIC Lond. BSc has come to the forefront with contemporary concerns J. Rutherford, BA PhD A.N.U. for the environment. Human geography consists mainly T. Wheelwright, DFC, MA SIAnd. of social, political and . Social Research Affiliate geography is concerned with such features as rural P.D. Tilley, BA CertEd Birm. DPhil Bonn MSc and urban settlements, cultural influences and way of life, and is particularly focused on the Sydney metropolitan area. Economic geography includes the Location study of agriculture, industry and resource evaluation The Department's enquiry office is on the third level and use. However, these three divisions are arbitrary, in the Institute Building (Room N421) on the eastern and some courses involve integration of various side of City Road. aspects of them all. The Department's office telephone number is As theoretical understanding and quantitative 9351 2886 and the facsimile number is 93513644. precision have advanced, geography has developed as aninvaluable discipline for analysing and proposing Noticeboards solutions to practical problems, especially thoserelated First year noticeboards are on the second level, Dixon to environmental issues. Geographers have proved Wing of the Institute Building outside Room N332. their value in such fields as local government, town Second and third year noticeboards are between the and regional planning, decentralisation and respective teaching laboratories on the second and environmental management. third levels in the Institute Building. A general It is possible to take up to four years of courses in noticeboard is in the corridor of the Institute Building geography including the honours year and count near the entrance on the ground floor. them towards Faculty of Economics degrees. Human and Environmental Geography courses are Table A Registration courses for the BEc and BEc(SocSc) degrees. In addition to complying with enrolment procedures Geomorphology Geography courses are Table B required by the University all students must register courses for both degrees. All Geography courses are with the Department in the Geography Conference Table B courses in the BCom degree. Room, Institute Building, during the orientation All Geography courses extend over two semesters. period. Students who wish to qualify to proceed to the final year honours course in Geography are required to take special courses in second and third year. Students Tutorials and practical work in those special courses will be required to undertake First year students must attend one 3-hour practical additional work. session per week (see timetable). All students in second and third years are required to attend tutorials and Staff designated practical sessions each week. Professor Reading Students are encouraged to undertake preliminary Associate Professors reading before courses begin. In addition, consistent John Connell, BA PhD Lond. reading is necessary throughout the year, not only of Andrew D. Short, MA Hawaii PhD Louisiana State BA book-length texts but also of periodical literature. Robin F. Warner, BA Birm. PhD N.E. (Head of Reading lists will be supplied for each course. Students Department) are strongly urged to consult members of the Senior Lecturers Department before purchasing textbooks; a single David E.M. Chapman, MEngSc U.N.S.W. BA PhD book will very rarely meet the needs of any given Peter J. Cowell, BA PhD course, and it is likely that some older texts will be Colin Davey, BA N.E. PhD Macq. superseded to meet the requirements of changes in Deirdre Dragovich, MA Adel. PhD course structures. Though every effort is made to Philip Hirsch, BA Oxf. MPhil Dundee PhD Lond. ensure that at least one copy of all works cited for Lecturers courses is available in the Department's library, Stephen J. Gale, MA Oxf. PhD Keele students are encouraged to make use of other libraries in the University (especially the main Fisher Library) Associate Lecturers as a source of reference material. They are also Gavin Doyle, BSc N'cle encouraged to make use of the Fisher Library as a Samantha Graham, BCom U.N.S.W. MSc Edin. source of information as to where material not available Chief Cartographer/Map Custodian within the University may be obtained, and to use the John E. Roberts CD-Roms available there. Assigned work and examinations interactions among people and between people and In first, second and third years, semester assignments their environments. Questions, challenges and issues and examinations will contribute significantly to final that stem from the relationships and transformations marks for the year. in the built, natural social and spatial environments . are introduced and scrutinised. Social structures and Conducted field excursions development are explored and principles of human In each of second and third years, students are required geography are presented through study of the location to take part in a long excursion, of about a week's and distribution of economic activities with special duration, based on a centre remote from Sydney. In reference to Australia and the Asia-Pacific Region. most years a Third Year field excursion is offered in one or more countries in Southeast Asia. In physical and environmental geography there may be the chance Geography 200 courses 16 units each of substituting this remote excursion by having a Each course extends over two semesters with three number of days each semester in the field (up to 5 days lectures and the equivalent of five hours' assignment each semester). It is expected that basic costs per work (which maycomprise tutorials and/orindividual student this year will be around $250. Excursion work course work including fieldwork) weekly. The will be assessed by written assignment and/or by following courses are offered: examination. Students requesting exemptions must Geography 201F, 202S (Geomorphology)—not apply in writing to the head of department. Students Table A who wish to apply for an interest-free loan to enable Geography 211F, 212S (Environmental)—Table A them to meet the costs of excursions should consult Geography 221F, 222S (Human)—Table A the SRC or Students'Financial Assistance. Students may choose to undertake either of 211 & 212 Further details of departmental activities, courses, or 221 & 222 in the BEc or BEc(SocSc) degree. excursions and other relevant material are contained in the Geography Department Handbook available Geography 201F & 202S (Geomorphology) from the Secretary, Institute Building. 8 units The Department of Geography offers a wide range Available only as a Table B course in Faculty of of courses in each year. Economics degrees. See descriptions in Faculty of Geography 101,102 (12 units) Arts or Faculty of Science Handbook. Geography 201,202 (Geomorphology) (16 units) Geography 211,212 (Environmental) (16 units) Geography 211F 8 units Geography 221,222 (Human) (16 units) Environmental Change and Human Response Geography 301,302 (Geomorphology) Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 2 prac/field)/wk Geography 311,312 (Environmental) Assessment (one3hr exam, 1500w assign/pracreports)/sem Geography 321,322 (Human) This course considers in even greater detail geomorphological, biophysical and undulated. Geography 101F 6 units environment problems. Part of the course may be Physical Geography taken in Soil Science. This deals with soils and landforms and is useful to pedologists and geomor- Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 3hr prac)/wk phologists. The other two components are concerned Field excursion one half day/sem with weathering rocks, whether on-site or as building Assessment (one 3hr exam & 1500w report)/sem materials and a specialised topic in the fluvial area. In Morning or afternoon course recent years, the major element in environmental This course is an introduction to the earth's physical geomorphology has rotated and varied. Topics environment. The course begins by considering the emphasised include: urban geomorphology; environ­ earth's place in the Universe, it's origin and mental impacts of mining; river management;, development, and the nature and evolution of the environmental problems of stormwater. All these earth's structure. This is followed by the evolution of topics are relevant to sustainable environmental the earth's physical environment and environmental management.. change over time. With this background, the course goes on to examine the earth's hydrosphere and Geography 212S 8 units atmosphere and the major land forms produced by the interaction of the atmospheric and ocean processes Environmental Management with the earth's surface including fluvial, and, coastal, Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 5 tut/prac/field)/wk Assessment (one 3hr exam, 2000w essay/tut papers/prac karst and glacial systems. and fieldwork reports)/sem This course forms part of the Environmental Geography 102S 6 units Geography and Resource Management stream which Environmental and Human Geography is designed to evaluate human interaction with the Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 3hr prac)/wk biophysical environmentand use of the earth's surfaces Assessment (one 3hr exam, 2000w essay & prac exercises)/ and its resources. Emphasis is upon human impacts sem and environments through social, economic and Morning or afternoon course political processes and through deliberate decision Environmental and Human Geography develops making and management. Policy responses are understandings of processes and consequences of considered at a range of scales. The course examines the nature and characteristics of selected resource 311, 312 (Environmental) would have undertaken processes with reference to Australian (and, as Geography 211,212 (Environmental) in second year, appropriate, other national and international) contexts, and those doing Geography 321,322 (Human) would and, on a more global and regional scale, focuses on have undertaken Geography 221, 222 (Human) in the changing relationship between people and second year. In certain cases cutting across these environments in tropical Asia and the Pacific. streams is possible.

Geography 221F 8 units Geography 301,302 (Geomorphology) Social and Cultural Geography Available only as a Table B course in Faculty of Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 5 tut/prac/field)/wk Economics degrees. See descriptions in Faculty of Assessment (one 3hr exam, 2000w essay/assign/prac and Arts Handbook. fieldwork reports)/sem Geography 311F This course has two components. The first deals with the significant role that society and culture play in Fluvial Environments influencing spatial structures. The course examines Consult Faculty for unit value how people perceive and construct space in western Classes Sem 1: (3 lec, 1 tut & 8prac/field)/wk and non-western contexts. Topics include the relativity Assessment (one 3hr exam, two 1500w assign)/sem and subjectivity of geography, mental maps, language, This course consists of two parts, one concerned with religion and music. The manner in which social values ancient environments and the other with the and ideologies shape rural and urban space is environmental geomorphology of today's and examined in different cultural contexts. Differences in tomorrow's rivers. The first section deals with the perception and use of landscapes are compared against long-term history of the Australian biophysical various social variables. The second component environment, tracing changes from the start of the focuses on population and gender. Population Cenozoic up to the present. The second sectionfocuses processes and structures are applied and extended to on human (European) impacts on fluvial systems in national and global scales. Relationships between catchments, on floodplains and in channels, using population, resources and development are recorded data and historical records to assess human considered, as are population policies. The geography influence oh the environment. of gender and sexuality is examined with reference to the role of distance and the area constructing relations Geography 312S between men and women. Spatial variation in gender Fluvial Environments relations is also covered. Consult Faculty for unit value Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 6 prac/field)/wk Geography 222S 8 units Field excursion one 2 day . Assessment (one 3hr exam, two 1500w assign/prac reports) / Geography of Restructuring sem Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 5 tut/prac/field)/wk Assessment (one 3hr exam, 2000w essay/assign/prac and The coastal zone provides an ideal area for the study fieldwork reports)/sem of resources management, since virtually all the central This course starts by examining urban processes and concerns of resources management are exemplified in problems in developed and developing countries. For that zone. Hence, the structure of the course will be determined by these concerns, with application to the developed countries, the focus is on urban economies, coastal zone providing the central unifying theme. suburbs, urban politics and the nature of the built The course first addresses critical physical systems environment. For developing countries, urbanisation and natural hazards in the coastal zone, and the ways trends and ideology of planningpolicies are in which decisions are made about resources considered, including governments' perceptionof and management. The course then applied geographical response to the informal sector, slums and rural- information systems in environmental assessment urban migration. The course presents the main and management of coastal drainage catchments. It principles of economic geography, examining the focuses on development and application of GIS models processes which distribute and redistribute economic for strategic planning and is structured around a field activities around the world, within nations and within exercise in location-analysis within the coastal regions. It examines the impact of geography from the catchment. Practical work involves extensive use of global to the local level on economic dynamics. The computers. course discusses the major alternative theories in economic geography and their implications for policy and politics. Geography 321F Socio-Economic Development in the Asia- Pacific Rim Geography 300 courses Consult Faculty for unit value Geography 311,312 (Environmental) Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 9 tut/prac/field)/wk Geography 321,322 (Human). Assessment (one 3hr exam, two 2000w essays, tut papers, prac and fieldwork reports)/sem Students may choose to undertake 311 & 312 or 321 & 322 in the BEc or BEc(SocSc) degree. This course deals with processes and consequences of It would be assumed that those doing Geography development and restructuring in the dynamic Asia- Pacific economies. It provides a regional geography of Australia's neighbouring region and focuses on key Government and Public social, political, economic patterns and trends. The Administration region is presented as a highly differentiated entity undergoing rapid social and spatial transformation. Introduction Historical and contemporary processes of uneven Thisdepartmentis concerned withthestudy of politics development constitute a thematic focus for the course. in its broadest sense. It focuses mainly on the The course builds onkeyhumangeographicprinciples institutions of government, the processes of decision­ from the sub-disciplines of economic, development, making and the ideas that have been central to classical social and urban geography. and contemporary political thought. As politics takes The course contains three options. Two are taught place not only in parliaments and parties but also in sequentially within the semester by Assoc Professor the family, in private organisations and in social Connell and Dr Hirsch. The third is a field course run movements, it must also study how politics interacts by Dr Hirsch and held in South-East Asia before the with the surrounding society. It also studies the commencement of Semester 1. Students who international dimension of politics. undertake the field option only take one of the other Courses in Government are available in the BEc, options within the semester. BEc(SocSc) or BCom degrees, pass or honours. The courses are listed below. The first year courses provide Geography 322S an introduction to the study of politics. In later years Urban and Regional Change in Australasia students can specialise, choosing options from the Consult Faculty for unit value main strands of the subject: comparative politics, Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 9 tut/prac/field/indivresearch)/wkpolitica l theory, political sociology, international Assessment (one 3hr exam, two 2000w essays, tut papers, politics, Australian politics and public policy and prac and fieldwork reports)/sem administration. For honours students there are special This course develops and extends an understanding seminars and an additional honours year in which of the varied human geographies of urban and regional students write a research thesis. Australia with an emphasis upon geographic change The department is part of both the Faculties of Arts in response to local, national and international and Economics, but its courses are available in some influences. The intention is that students completing other faculties, as well as to students taking the this course will have a sound knowledge of the range combined Arts//Law, Economics of issues relevant for further study or policy (Social Sciences)/Law or Commerce/Law degrees. applications to urban, rural and remote regions of For career purposes, the study of politics is particularly Australia. Topics covered include: the interaction of useful for economists, journalists, public servants, economic restructuring, the relationships among lawyers and in many policy and executive roles in the structures and processes, metropolitan and large city private sector—indeed, in almostallpartsoftheprivate spatial management, policies and processes pertaining and public communities and where an international to smaller settlements and regional development perspective is relevant. issues. Staff Geography 4 Honours Professor Prereq Credit results in second and third year Geography Graeme J. Gill, MA Monash PhD Lond., FASSA courses in the same area (i.e. Environmental or Human) Appointed 1990 Students contemplating Geography Honours will be Professor in Chinese Politics (Personal Chair) invited to complete a preliminary registration form in Frederick C. Teiwes, BA Amherst PhD Col. Semester 2. Following the publication of Geography Appointed 1992 300 results, those eligible students who have pre- Professor in Government and Public Administration enrolled will be invited to formally enrol. They are (Personal Chair) required to consult the Head of Department as soon as Michael W. Jackson, BA Nebraska MA PhD Alta possible after the publication of third year results Appointed 1993 concerning the choice of topic and the appointment of Reader a staff supervisor. Information on Honours Patricia M. Springborg, MA Cant. DPhil Oxf. requirements will be provided by the Head of Department. Associate Professors Honours students are required to undertake formal Michael C. Hogan, BA PhD coursework during first semester and to participate in Terence H. Irving, BA PhD seminars through the year as arranged. They will be Michael B. Leigh, BA Melb. PhD C'nell required to study original problems, working as Helen G. Nelson, BA WAust. MA PhD appropriate in the field, the laboratory, libraries, and Martin J. Painter, MA Sus. PhD A.N.U. in some instances in conjunction with other university Rodney E. Tiffen, BA PhD Monash or government departments. A dissertation of not Linda Weiss, BA Griffith PhD Lond. more than 20 000 words must be submitted during Senior Lecturers second semester, followed by an examination that Deborah Brennan, MA Macq. BA PhD may include both written and oral work. Ernest A. Chaples, MA Mass. PhD Kentucky Robert F. Howard, BA N.E. PhD A.N.U. Registration Diarmuid Maguire, BA N'cle(U.K.) MA Johns H. MA As well as enrolling with the University, students PhD C'nell must register with the Department in their choice of Barbara Page, MEc Senior options. Information about registration should Randal G. Stewart, BA Qld PhD A.N.U. be obtained from trie Department. There are quotas on Lex Watson, BA options and entry is not automatic. Lecturer Noticeboard Felix Patrikeeff, BA Essex On level 2, Merewether Building, outside rooms 260 Associate Lecturers (Government Junior level courses), 280 (Government Christopher Green, BA Qld MSocSc Griffith Senior level courses). Paul Rutherford, BA Deakin Administrative Officer Government Junior Courses 6 units each Jennifer McCallan, BA Open Government 1 comprises a number of 6 unit semester courses from which students choose. To proceed to Administrative Assistants later year courses in the Department, students must Jackie Biggs pass two of these 6 unit courses. No more than three Betty Leone, BSc Macq. BMus U.N.S.W. 6 unit junior courses in Government can be counted Maria Robertson towards the degree. Senior Research Assistant The courses are listed below. Classes normally Kathy Dempsey, BSc LaT. MA consist of two lectures and one tutorial per week. In any year not all may be available. There will be up to Research Assistant five to choose from,each semester. Students are Wendy Lambourne, BSc Melb. MA GradDipIntLaw encouraged to follow their own interests in making A.N.U. GradDipInfServ R.M.I.T. their choice. None is recommended above any other as a first year course, nor does any later year course Location require that you have completed any specific course In the Merewether Building (corner City Road and from among them. Each of the courses, while standing Butlin Ave). The departmental office where enquiries alone and containing different subject matter, has the can be made is Room 269. following in common: Telephone 9351 2054. 1. the material isjpitched at an introductory level; E-mail [email protected]. 2. the course objectives include a grounding in wwwHomepage http://www.econ.su.oz.au. key concepts and methods in the study of politics Course structure and government; A three-year major in Government consists of six 3. the learning outcomes include generic skills semester courses: in first year, two of the options appropriate to future study across the whole available and, in second and third year, four specialist discipline. options. Normally, unless department permission is given, the six courses are taken in consecutive Government 101 Introduction to Australian semesters over three years. politics The two first year introductory courses are This course aims to introduce students to debates prerequisites for all later year courses. The second and about the nature and limits of Australian democracy, third year specialist options are of one semester's to the major institutions of Australian politics, and to duration. They may be offered in either first or second the distribution of power in Australian society. Major semester, but not both. institutions and forces such as parliament, executive The list of options includes all those offered from government, the federal system, political parties and time to time by the department. Not all options are the media will be examined as arenas of power, conflict offered every year. The department reserves the right and consensus. Who rules? How? Which groups are to make amendments and withdraw or add options excluded? according to circumstances. In first year, students may do one additonal semester Government 102 Introduction to world politics course but no more than three 6 unit junior courses in This course aims to introduce students to the major Government can be counted towards the degree. In concepts and approaches in international and second and third years, students may also do an comparative politics. It will examine the role of the additional 8 unit course per semester (203 and 204 or state and of non-state actors in inter actions—military, 303 and 304). economic and political—between states. It will also The Department is part of both the Arts and introduce the variety of non-Western political systems Economics Faculties, but its courses are also available and the uses and problems of comparative methods. in some other faculties, as well as to students taking The course will examine the interactions between the combined degrees. The study of politics is particularly internal and external influences on state behaviour, useful for career purposes for economists, journalists, and how these can interact to produce radical change public servants, lawyers and those interested in in both spheres. There will be a strong emphasis on administration within firms and voluntary theoretical and normative issues in international and organisations. comparative politics. Government 103 Politics of world development at the conditions facilitating the consolidation of new This course compares the main varieties of political regimes. Examples will be taken from various parts of organisation in the contemporary world with the aim the world to provide a comparative perspective. of understanding their evolution and impact on social and economic development. Drawing on the Government 107 Global politics and the ' developmental experience of Western Europe, Asia, environment and Latin America, the course will try to shed light on Global environmental problems are often regarded as the following kinds of questions: Why do we live in part of a 'new agenda' in international relations, nation-states and how did they become the dominant potentially requiring a re-evaluation of traditional form of political organisation? Why did some countries notions of international politics such as national end up with authoritarian regimes while others sovereignty and security. This course will examine evolved as democracies? What difference does the adequacy of more traditional notions of democracy make for contemporary social and international politics in the light of the potential economic development? Why have some states challenges posed by global environmental problems. succeededindeveloping their economies, whilstothers The aims of the course are to introduce students to the appear trapped in conditions of poverty? basic concepts employed in the study of international politics, the political nature of global environmental Government 104 Power in society problems and the connection between these problems and processes of 'globalisation' and 'modernisation'. This course is an introduction to political sociology. It The course covers issues such as the nature of the aims to get beneath the surface of media accounts of international politics, the influence of non-state actors public opinion, political personalities and events to (eg environmental movements, international make sense of what is going on in politics. At the end environment agencies), the link between scientific of the course students should be able to think in a knowledge and political action, international equity social science way, and to see the usefulness of this in and environmental problems (the North/South their daily life. The organising principle of the course debate), etc, is power: how it is socially structured; the pluralist, class and elite theories of political power; parties, Government 108 Environmental politics and interest groups and social movements; voting; the policy in Australia new middle class and the 'new polities'; and cultural Environmental issues and problems have become and materialistic approaches to the study of politics important political issues both within Australia and and society. There will also be some topical issues, eg internationally. Once the province of radical social the 'underclass' and neo-fascism. movements, environmental problems have become a 'mainstream' issue addressed by national governments Government 105 Australian politics in and international agencies (such as the World Bank). comparative perspective This course aims to provide students with an This course examines Australian politics against the introduction to the key debates in environmental background of general writings on comparative politics set against an examination of the major democratic politics, off eringboth general comparisons Australian political institutions and processes. The with the other seventeen advanced industrial states focus is on suchissues as the reasons for the emergence which been liberal democracies continuously for the of the environment as a problem in contemporary last fifty years, as well as specific bilateral comparison. political thought and hence an area of public policy, the political impact of interest groups and environment The course examines the central institutions of liberal movements, the emergence of minor parties and their democracies—parliaments, parties, the electoral role in the Senate, the High Court and its influence in system, the mass media—and how these interact with Commonwealth-State disputes over the exercise of the pursuit of major conflicts and the conduct of environment powers, etc. The course also includes policymaking. several case studies which look at issues such as Aboriginal land rights and environmental questions, Government 106 Political change in the modern environmental problems and the role of markets, world Green parties and the influence of 'green preferences' The last two decades of the twentieth century have in recent elections. seen a wave of democratisation sweep the world. In Latin America, Southern and Eastern Europe, East Government 109 Ethnicity, nationalism and Asia and Southern Africa, new regimes have replaced citizenship authoritarian governments and sought to build Decay of Empires like the Ottoman and Soviet democratic systems. But such changes of regime have unleashes nationalist forces that seem to involve an not been a feature only of this period; regime change infinite regress: fragmentation into the smallest ethnic has been common throughout history. This course units. What is duty-worthy in the nation? Ties of will focus upon the politics of regime change. It will blood and soil, like those of family, clan and tribe, analyse the ways in which changes of regime occur, characterise primordialism rather than ethical including coup d'etat, revolution, and the more behaviour as such. Is this a truth or merely the way gradual process of evolution. It will study the types of that we persuade ourselves that nationalism, racism actors involved and the social and economic forces and ethnicity are intractable to morality, beyond good which assist (or hinder) this process. It will also look and evil? Are philosophical reflection and ethical consciousness solvents of primordialism, and can with the Head of Department. Besides a substantial multi-ethnic polities hold it at bay? These, the burning thesis, students will normally take two seminars from questions, of post-modernity, which have been raised such areas as Australian politics, international politics, at critical junctures in the development of the state, politics and society, comparative politics, public policy and answered by theorists ancient as well as modern, and adrmnistration, and rights, justice and democracy. will be the focus of this course. Government 110 Comparative politics and Options economic change in East Asia Australian Politics This course analyses political processes and institutions in major countries in the East Asian region that (i) Human Rights and Australian Politics 8 units apparently share rapid economic development. Are The course focuses on the recent and growing political there identifiable political models that underpin rapid debate and policy initiatives in Australia aimed at economic growth and what have been the political implementing human rights policies in a number of consequences of this economic change? While areas. The emphasis of the course is distinctly emphasising key conceptual issues in comparative Australian and concerned with public policy aspects politics, the course will expose basic social, economic of human rights. It will however touch on the question and political characteristics of countries in the region. of what are human rights and where do they come Similarities and dissimilarities will be drawn between from. It will also be set in the context of the various Japan, the first wave of new industrialising countries international instruments (UN Covenants and (NICs), particularly South Korea and Taiwan, and Conventions, International Labour Organisation some of the rapidly changing countries of Southeast instruments and the European Bill of Human Rights) Asia. as standards for the Australian debate, and pay attention to the role of governments to protect human Government in Second and Third Years rights in addition to the traditional concern of individual rights beingprotectedagainstgovernments. Students who intend to complete a major in Government normally complete one option each semester over three years, two Government 1 courses (ii) A ustralian State Politics 8 units are prerequisites for later courses. A comparative study of the Australian states, with To pass a semester course, students must complete special reference to New South Wales. Topics include all assignments and examinations at a satisfactory the institutional rules of the game (constitutional level, as well as achieving a pass overall. Classes development, parliamentary procedures, electoral normally consist of two lectures and one tutorial per methods). Considerable attention will be given to the week and assessment comprises usually one role of political parties and interest groups in state examination, essays and class work. politics. Attention will also be given to state Students who intend to complete a major may also bureaucracies, new developments and proposed take additional semester courses in second and third reforms together with policy formulation and years and count them towards their degree. All implementation in some key areas of public policy. students may count single-semester courses towards their degree, so long as the prerequisites are satisfied. (Hi) Australian Political and Electoral Behaviour All options are of one semester's duration. They 8 units may be offered in either first or second semester but The focus of this course is the increasing amount of not both. The list of options is provisional—not all literature on electoral behaviour and mass-based options are given every year. political behaviour in Australia. There will be a The Department reserves the right to make concentration on the processes by which Australians amendments and withdraw or add options according acquire their political attitudes, express them as public to staff availability or other circumstances. Before pre- opinion, and put them into practice through different enrolling, students must consult the Department to forms of political participation. Part of the course is find out which options will be offered in the next year. concerned with the methodology of the behavioural In addition there are quotas on options. study of politics, and students will be expected to take part in some survey-based project as a key element in Government II Honours 8 units the course. Prereq two Junior Government courses at the level of Credit or better, or with the consent of the Head of Department (iv)The Australian Political Party System Coreq Government 201 and 202 8 units The course will look at the Australian political party Government III Honours 16 units system in a number of ways: historically—the Prereq Government 201, 202 and 290 each at the level of development of parties and the explanations for Credit or better, or with the consent of the Head of periods of hegemony, decline, splits, etc.; organisa­ Department tionally—the differing views, and their evolution, of Coreq Government 301 and 302 models of organisation, and their relation to the wider . body politic; philosophically—the presence or absence Final Honours Year of philosophical and ideological bases for the parties, Students work as far as possible under individual and the importance of this for electoral purposes; supervision. Courses to be attended will be arranged sociologically—the presence or absence of class bases for parties, the end of class parties; functionally— (//; Politics of International Economic Relations interest aggregating and articulating, parties or 8 units pressure groups, the role of minor parties and their This option will provide an overview of the principal prospects, the 'independent' phenomenon. theoretical approaches to international political economy and how these shape the principles and (v) Religion in A ustralian Politics 8 units practices of a number of substantive issue areas: The course will concentrate on Australian politics in international trade relations; the activities of multi­ the twentieth century, especially the institutional national corporations; the logic of the accumulation of aspects of Australian politics, includingpolitical parties capital on a world scale; the restructuring of global and pressure groups. Issues to be discussed may labour markets; international patterns of investment include: and financing; the international aid industry. • ideological links between the labour movement (Hi) The Superpowers and After 8 units and various religious value systems (Roman The course will survey the major diplomatic and Catholic, Protestant, secularist, Islamic, Judaic); strategic issues in the recently concluded superpower • the extent of a Protestant ascendancy among non- conflict. Beginning with a study of the Cold War and labour parties—the conservative tradition and its origins, the course will proceed to investigate the wowserism; rise, decline, rise and triumph of detente, focusing • a secularist world view as manifested in the 'old closely on the reasons for the collapse of the Soviet Union as a superpower and state. Emergent left', the 'new right' and the Australian Democrats; international relations within the former U.S.S.R. Will • the religious left in Australia—justice, peace, be explored, together with the sources of nationality feminism, ethnic minorities and anti-racism; conflict and ways of resolving it. The course will then • the religious right—Festival of Light, Call to assess the prospects of the post-Cold War world— Australia, anti-abortion, anti-feminism; multipolarity, unipolarity, and a United Nations 'with • the role of confessional groups in issues such as a teeth'. Bill of Rights and anti-discrimination legislation; The course will cover the following areas of super­ • the impact of religion in the process of political power conflict and cooperation in the Cold Warperiod: socialisation in Australia; alliance management in Europe, relations with China, • is religion an electoral issue in contemporary arms control, strategic doctrine, military intervention Australia? and crisis management. The course will also cover the • the impact of newer sects and alternatives to superpower role in regional conflicts and conflict mainstream religions; resolution in the Third World—especially in South • a religious dimension in the struggle for Aboriginal and Southeast Asia and the Middle East. The Australian rights; role in global and regional balances will receive some • the links between religion and other politically attention. important social cleavages such as ethnicity, gender, (iv) Peace Studies 8 units age and education. The course will cover in some depth such topics as: The basic methodology inspiring the course will be conflict resolution; the causes of war and peace; the an historical one (although largely dealing with politics of arms control and disarmament; the contemporary history). Nevertheless, there will be consequences of nuclear war; the role of non-violent some discussion of the value of behavioural resistance in national defence; the moral dimension of approaches, especially in the interpretation of public global politics; human rights in armed conflict; the opinion poll and survey data. At the end of the course just war tradition and nuclear war; and the history there will be an attempt to evaluate the role of religion and role of pacifism, peace movements, peace research in Australian politics in the light of a number of more and peace education. theoretical approaches to the study of religion in society. (v) Australian Foreign and Defence Policy 8 units This course is designed to provide students with a broad understanding of the formation, execution and International Politics nature of Australian foreign and defence policy. The (i) Introduction to International Politics 8 units course will commence with an examination of the The course will introduce students to international aims and objectives of Australian foreign and defence politics. After surveying major concepts and policy and of the global and regional environments in approaches in international politics (such as power which Australia is required to operate. It will provide a detailed analysis of the policy-making process by and the balance of power, sovereignty, anarchy, order, examining the role of all relevant factors such as intervention, imperialism, the role of force and parliament, the political parties and the various morality), the course will turn to the role of the state government bureaucracies. The largest section of the andits instruments in theinternational arena. Attention course will concern itself with a number of major will be focused upon the system, and hierarchy, of issues in Australian foreign and defence policy such states and the interaction between these states. The as the defence debate (ANZUS or non-alignment), the role of non-state actors (like transnational corporations) Australian-Indonesian-Papua New Guinea triangle, and the making of foreign and defence policy within and the problem of Australia's relations with the states will also be analysed. Third World. (vi) International Communism 8 units Politics and Society Development of International Communism from the (i) Politics and Society 8 units 19th century to the present. Brief examination of 1st The course will introduce students to the study of and 2nd Internationals. Study of relations of non- political sociology in Western, industrialised ruling Communist parties with Soviet Union during democracies. Particular emphasis will be put on the Comintern period. Relation of Soviet foreign policy analysis of Australian society. Four major topics will and Comintern strategy. Interaction of Soviet Union be covered: the relationship of the social structure to and new Communist states after World War II. the exercise of power; political culture and political Disintegration of world movement after 1956, inclu­ socialisation; parties, movements and groups in ding Sino-Soviet conflict and disarray in the Warsaw Western democracies; and the nature of social and pact. Relations among the remaining state socialist political change in such societies. regimes and between them and former Communist states following the collapse of Communism in East (ii) Socialist and Labour Politics 8 units Europe and the Soviet Union in 1989-91. This course undertakes a comparison of Australia, Britain and the United States within three areas: (a) (vii) Politics of Globalism 8 units Background history: the making of the working class; The course will consider a range of problems which bourgeois radicalism and socialism; early political are regarded as 'global' in character and the record of activity; parliamentary reform; working class attempts by international organisations and mobilisation and party formation; the revolutionary movements to cope with these problems. tradition; the first labour governments; depression There will be a review of 'globalisf thinking— and war; the welfare state; the end of the second long especially the ideas of Falk and the World Order boom, (b) Socialist and labourist political strategy: Models Project—and the organisations (UN organs, problems of social change and social structure, conferences, etc.) convened to meet global problems. especially the nature of the state; bureaucracy; The main par t of the course will deal with par ticular revolution or evolution; cultural change; methods of issues in this area: mass organisation, (c) The institutions and political sociology of labour, socialist and social-democratic • ecological decline, pollution, resource depletion parties: leadership; composition; electoral support; • anti-terrorist activity current problems (the social contract; technocratic • promotion of human rights/protection of refugees labourism; middle-class radicals, etc.). • 'common heritage' issues—Law of the Sea, Antarctica (Hi) Politics of Information 8 units • The New International Information Order—issue This course focuses upon news—-its production, of UNESCO, etc. contents and impacts, the special demands of different The aim of the course would be to reveal basic news organisations and of different news areas, the tendencies in contemporary world politics—more interests and strategies of various groups in affecting particularly, the extent to which such tendencies news content, and policy issues in regulating it. It will continue to frustrate Utopian solutions. Such issues also focus upon the structures of Australia's media might include the continuing relevance of power institutions and how these impinge on the processes politics and sovereignty/nationalism; the limited of news production. cohesiveness of the Third World; problems of cultural relativism, etc. (iv) Australian Labour: Politics and Culture 8 units (viii) The International Security Problem in the This course explores the changing political culture of Twentieth Century 8 units Australia, focusing on the ideas and culture of the The course will examine the causes of major inter­ . labour movement. The three main areas of discussion national conflict and efforts to promote international are labour movement traditions, the changing security this century. There will be an emphasis on character of the working class, and the culture of comparative perspectives and consequently the mateship in labour politics. Among the topics are material will be divided into three sections: pre-1914; masculinity and labour; violence and terror in working the interwar period; the Cold War. Major themes will class politics; labour populism; socialism and the Labor include: the causes of wars, with special references to party; respectability and larrikinismin labour politics; the debates about the causes of World Wars I and II ethnic and sexual politics in the labour movement; the new labour right; the new middle class and labour; and the Cold War; the nature and perception of threats; elegies for communism; and the politics of post- the dynamic and outcomes of conflicts; the nuclear fordism. revolution, deterrence, and the future of war; conventional and revolutionary (peoples) wars; and (v) Social Movements, Politics and Identity an examination of measures designed to contain 8 units international violence such as the balance of power, This course begins with a discussion of social international law, crisis management, disarmament, movement theory in sociology (particularly collective arms control and collective security (the latter to behaviour and resource mobilisation approaches) and United Nations). The course will conclude with an of the historical setting within which this theory examination of the current debate about the meaning developed. We thenmove on to 'new social movement' of security. theory in radical social thought and its critique of industrialism, paying special attention to the work of (iv) Problems of Transition in European Politics Touraine, Habermas and Cohen. This body of thought 8 units is also situated historically. The third part of the This course will examine the problems of transition in course deals with the labour movement as an 'old European politics in three key areas: the shift towards social movement'. Lastly, the course will examine the advanced capitalist democracy in the southern empirical literature on recent social movements, Mediterranean; the steps towards transnational unity concentrating on ecology, youth and peace (through the EC) by northern European nations; and movements. The aim is to develop a comparison of the slow process of economic and political reform in new and old socialmovements and theories associated eastern Europe. Different theoretical approaches will with them. be used to examine these phenomena and these will (vi) Women and Politics 8 units include perspectives that stress the role of the world economy,politicalinstitutions and social movements. Do women and men today occupy the same place in political life? What is the significance for our (v) American Politics 8 units understanding of 'politics' of the fact that for so long The major national institutions in the U.S.A., like the politics has been seen as a man's world and that Presidency, the Congress and the Supreme Court, and almost all great political theorists argued that women the underlying values that support the American were unfitted for political activity and citizenship? system of liberal democracy. Particular attention will The course will: introduce students to the new and be paid to America's superpower role in world affairs, rapidly growing body of research on women and to U.S. hegemony in Australia and to the significance politics. Issues to be discussed may include why it of recent U.S. election results. took women so much longer than men to win the franchise; women's political activities before (vi) Reform, Revolution and Post-Communism citizenship; the manner in which women have been 8 units discussed in political science; the representation of At the end of the 1980s the communist regimes of women in parliament and the bureaucracy; policies to Europe collapsed, leading to the emergence of a improve women's social position; the question of the number of newly-independent states. This develop­ 'gender gap'; the political significance of the women's ment was unexpected, because the communist regimes movement past and present; women and the welfare had seemed to be so powerful and solidly established. state; women and the politics of personal life. This course will analyse why such regimes fell, and in particular why the attempts at reform of them failed. It will then look at the attempt to build a new post- Comparative Politics communist future characterised by political democracy (i) Japanese Politics 8 units and a market economy. Specific attention will be A study of the politics and government of postwar given to issues like the attempt to develop a post- Japan. Main topics will include: the governmental communist identity, efforts to construct a new political structure, the bureaucracy and policy making, the system, and the course of economic reform and its political party system, the relations between business consequences for political development. The focus and government, and recent issues in domestic and will principally be upon Russia, but some attention foreign policy. Emphasis will be given to examining may also be given to other former communist states. various interpretations of the character of contemporary Japanese politics: a society structured (vii) Revolution, Nationalism and Modernity in a hierarchy of patron-client relations; the causative 8 units role of traditional attitudes and cultural values; the The course examines two forms of social and political manipulation of those values in the interest of the change which have shaped the modern world— capitalist state; modernisation theory; 'Japan revolution and nationalism. It traces some of the social Incorporated'. and political processes which have helped produce revolutionary and nationalist movements, identifies (ii) Government and Politics of Modern China and evaluates the role of various actors (classes, 8 units individuals, institutions), and studies and evaluates Introduction to government and politics of modern the role of.ideas and ideologies In revolutionary and China. Brief examination of traditional background nationalist movements. It examines how some of the and modern revolution from 19th century to 1949. ideas which characterise 'modernity' have been Primary focus on ideology, leadership, institutions produced and used for legitimation. Examples will and political processes of the People's Republic. Covers focus on the French, Russian and Chinese revolutions politics of social groups, major issue areas, the Cultural and the Indian and Indonesian nationalist struggles, Revolution and the politics of reform. and themes include the role of peasants in'revolution and emergence of 'mass' politics. (Hi) Politics of Development 8 units An analysis of changes in political systems which (viii) Southeast Asian Politics 8 units have accompanied economic development of The course provides a comparative analysis of the contemporary less developed countries. We will political, social and economic transformation currently consider the utility of the principal theoretical taking place in Southeast Asia. The prime forcus will approaches to the politics of development and the be upon the rapid changes taking place in Malaysia actual experience of selected industrialised and and Indonesia, with particular attention also given to industrialising countries. comparisons with Burma, Singapore and the Sultanate of Brunei. Participants in the course will focus upon performance? Finally, in what ways, if at all, might the relationship between economic and political democratisation and globalisation be expected to sources of power, the conflict between authori­ undermine the distinctive blend of politics and tarianism and democratic processes, the clash of economics in the region? Such questions lead to a nationalisms plus the political significance of religious consideration of the extent to which East Asia has values and cultural identity. developed a distinctive type of political economy, different from the Anglo-American and European (ix) South Pacific Politics 8 units varieties. The course covers contemporary politics in the Pacific and the interaction between the Island Pacific and (xiii) The Comparative Politics of Ethnic Conflict major states of the Asian-Pacific rim. Particular 8 units attention is given to the processes of change in the The course examines the role that ethnic conflict plays Pacific, and what some regard as the 're-Asianisation' in national and international politics. One key issue to of the Pacific as Western influence recedes in the post- be addressed is the persistent and destructive nature Cold War years. of this form of political conflict. Settler societies, former colonies, ex-communist nations and liberal (xj Authoritarian Politics 8 units democracies have all had to deal with the political This course will compare a range of different types of consequences of ethnic tensions. How each regime authoritarian regimes. Traditional authoritarian type has managed this task will be the empirical focus political structures will be contrasted with what one of this course. Among the nations to be studied are author calls 'modern authoritarianism' before looking Northern Ireland, South Africa, Israel, the United in more detail at the types of political systems which States, Australia, Sri Lanka and Jugoslavia. The course would fall into the latter category. Among the types of is comparative and covers competing theoretical systems to be covered will be single party regimes approaches (such as Marxist and liberal). (both narrow and broad), military regimes, police states, fuhrerist systems and corporatist structures. (xiv) Northeast Asian Regional Politics: Conflict These will be compared principally in terms of their and Change 8 units institutional configurations, modes of operation, Concentrating on Korea, Taiwan and Hong Kong, the legitimating ideologies and conditions making for course will examine the reasons for conflict and change and sustaining them. Major concepts, such as in the region. It will focus especially on: why it has authoritarianism, totalitarianism, militarism, been considered a political and economic centre of praetorianism and corporatism will be investigated in gravity, whether there are unifying strands of ideology the context of particular states. or common interest that would allow the region to rival the emerging European/Atlantic bloc, what are (xi) States and the Politics of Economic the potential sources of disharmony in the region, Development 8 units what are the politics of resources and development in The course examines the role that states have played the region, what place is there for Western influence in in economic change, concentrating on the task of its political/economic evolution, and does Big Power explaining how and under what conditions the politics or a new co-prosperity notion best sum up its structure, interests and policies of the state have future. impinged on economic processes. Four principal areas of controversy are covered: the relation between Public Policy and Administration political forms and economic advancement, the international and domestic sources of capitalist (i) Public Policy and Administration 8 units development, the political conditions of growth and The course provides an introduction to the field of decline, and the limitations and capacities of state public policy and administration. It focuses principally bureaucracies. For each one of these areas, the course upon the structures and processes of policy-making. considers alternative theoretical perspectives and Attention will be devoted to inputs into decision­ selected comparative-historical studies touching upon making, the personnel and machinery of decision­ a range of topics in different times and places. making, and the processes and machinery of policy­ making and evaluation. (xii) Capitalism and Democracy in East Asia (ii) Policy A nalysis 8 units 8 units This course examines Australian public policies in the In less than twenty years, the East Asian region has context of modern theories and techniques of policy witnessed dramatic political and economic changes. analysis. Policies in areas such as social welfare, As the processes of democratisation and industrial immigration, foreign policy, broadcasting and the development continue, the causes and consequences environment will be discussed in the framework of of these changes are still being debated. Concentrating the main themes and their application. The course on Korea, Taiwan, Hong Kong, Singapore, and to a also examines stages in the policy cycle, including lesser extent, Japan, the course will examine the policy initiation, formulation and allocation, imple­ relationship between political and economic mentation, evaluation and termination. Students will transformation in the East Asian region. It will focus be encouraged to specialise in specific policy areas. on three central issues: How distinctive are East Asia's political institutions and what has been their impact (Hi) Organisational Analysis 8 units on economic performance? Conversely, how is This course is an introduction to some of the main ' economic strength affecting state power and political concepts in the field of organisational studies. The development of these concepts will be traced through internship with the Commonwealth Parliament and the works of major writers in the field, such as Weber, enrolment in the 'Public Sector Internship A' course, Michels, Blau and Crozier. Some questions considered conducted at the Australian National University. are: why and how do people combine to form Students undertaking the internship will be required organisations? What is the nature of organisational to complete a substantial supervised research project authority? What is the role of organisational culture or equivalent to at least one or two months of full-time style? How useful are organisational concepts in the work. See the Head of Department for further details. analysis of government bodies, private corporations, political parties, trade unions, the churches and Political Theory voluntary associations? Is the bureaucratic form of organisation inevitable? (i) Political Theory: Classical 8 units Many familiar political ideas and concepts were (iv) Comparative Federalism 8 units discussed and debated in the ancient world of the The course comprises a comparative analysis of Greek polis and other city-republics. This course cultural, political and institutional aspects of federal introduces students to some of the writings of political systems of government, and policy-making processes theorists in the classical period, the most famous of in such systems. The topics to be covered will be whom were Plato and Aristotle. The focus of the drawn from the following areas of study: federal course is upon reading the texts so that students can theory, the notion of a federal society and how this become familiar with some of the problems of influences federal institutional arrangements and interpretation. Among questions that may be policy decisions, federalism in multilingual societies, considered are those of justice, the relation of the federal and 'constitutional' reform, judicial review, citizen to the city-state, war and peace and the good second chambers, federal financial arrangements, life, the place of men and women in political life and intergovernmental relations, and various policy area the relation of the public and the private. case studies. Federal systems to be compared include Australia, Canada and the United States of America, (ii) Political Theory: Early Modern 8 units with the comparative framework extended to other Political theorists in the early modern period were federal systems where appropriate. writing when the modern state was developing and the ideas of individual freedom and equality were (v) Citizenship, Work and Welfare 8 units becoming widely influential, and the claims of reason This course will provide an introduction to the major were advanced. Arguments to be considered include theoretical approaches used to explain the those of the social contract theorists, controversies development of the welfare state and will also give an about sovereignty and political obligation, ideas of overview of the key substantive debates surrounding natural lawand natural rights and the political morality the provision of welfare in Australia/Attention will be of rulers. The focus of the course is on reading and given to the role of political parties, the labour move­ analysing the texts. ment, business interests, welfare lobby organisations and other pressure groups which attempt to influence (Hi) Political Theory: Modern 8 units welfare policy. The course has both an historical and This course examines the arguments of selected contemporary focus, and will consider critics of welfare theorists from the late eighteenth century to the present on the right and left. day. Theorists in this period have been concerned (vi) The Politics of Government-Business with questions that arise in the context of the Relations in Australia 8 units consolidation of capitalism and the nation state, the The course will focus on the patterns of relations development of universal suffrage and the welfare between government and business in theory and state and the emergence of modern ideologies. Among practice in Australia. A key question will be 'who the problems thathave preoccupied theorists are those controls whom?' Does the state and the public control of freedom, justice and equality, the relation of the the market, or is the state an instrument of the private individual to the state and the relation of the state to power of business? In the first part of the course, society, power, legitimacy and revolution. The focus economic and political models of the relations between of the course is on reading and analysing texts. government and business will be examined. In the second partof the course, thesemodels willbeapplied (iv) Democratic Theory 8 units to various policy arenas in Australia. Topics for One of the major controversies among democratic discussioninclude: business developmentin Australia, theorists is over the meaning of 'democracy' itself. the Australian financial system, business law and The course will examine conflicting conceptions of taxation, tariffs, arbitration and industrial relations, democracy and other major debates among manufacturing and rural industry. The course will contemporary theorists. These include questions conclude by discussing corporatism and industry concerning citizenship and forms of political policy in Australia in a changing global economy. participation;problemsof consent, political obligation and the position of minorities and majorities; the (vii) Australian National Internship Program question of representation; the issue of workplace 8 units democracy; the problem of social inequality and Second and third year students may apply for entry democracy. The focus of the course will be on recent into the national internship program located in contributions to democratic theory but, where Canberra. The program comprises a one-semester appropriate, reference will be made to classic texts. (v) Marxism 8 units Honours seminars Marxism has been a major influence on the course of All students in Government II Honours are required political events and movements in the twentieth to take the seminar Tolitical Analysis'. All students in century. The course introduces students to the writings Government III Honours must take the course 'Political of and his collaborator Frederick Engels Power: Concepts and Methods' and the Research and examines their arguments about capitalism, the Seminar; together, these two components of state and communism, private property, the fetishism Government III Honours comprise 16 units. of commodities, classes and class struggle, alienation and ideology and revolution. The theories of other Political Analysis 8 units prominent Marxists may also be consider ed including The course aims to help honours students develop the Lenin, Bernstein, Luxemburg, Gramsci and disciplines and skills which they will need to excel in contemporary theorists such as Althusser and any area of substantial political inquiry. It will include Poulantzas, together with wider questions about the attention both to theoretical approaches (problems of development and social and political context of conceptualisation, explanation, comparing contending revolutionary movements. Recent feminist criticisms theories and ideologies) and to empirical data (the of Marxism, the controversy over Marxism and uses and limits of different research designs including morality and rational choice Marxism may also be the use of statistical data). It will examine these discussed. analytical themes in substantive areas such as war, elections and political change in Africa. (vi) Ethics and Politics 8 units If being ethical is hard, is being ethical in a political context possible? Politics has always been one of the Political Power: Concepts and Methods primary expressions of a nation's ethic, yet the 16 units relationship between ethics and politics has never Power is one of the central concepts in the social been clear or comfortable. Does politics produce sciences;indeed,itisoftenarguedthatpolirical science immorality? Can politics be moral? Such questions as can be defined as the study of power. Power is also these can be examined regarding two of the most extremely controversial: theoretically, methodo­ serious aspects of political life: violence and logically and empirically. One of the major debates in technology. Historically, violence has always been a political science has been about the way to investigate part of politics. But can violence ever be ethical? More community power and what the investigations show recently the development of technology has raised about its distribution. This is the debate about the numerous ethical questions that defy political answers. pluralist, elitist and class conceptions of power These and other related questions are examined in structure. Another controversy exists about the this course. meaning of power and its relationship to other cognate concepts such as influence, authority, coercion, force, (vii) The Politics of Modernity 8 units persuasion or manipulation. The course will examine The politics of post-modernity raise the following these debates. This will permit us to look at a number question. Why did citizens acquiesce to the of central analytical issues in the social sciences: concentrationof state power thatconstitutes the politics contending approaches to social explanation of modernity? Courtiers on the cusp of modernity (functional, causal and intentional); the essential engaged in a discourse counselling the king in prose contestability of key political concepts; the agency/ and in verse producing greatliteratures of Renaissance structure debate. We will also look at the way the Europe. But the instability of patrilineal kingship, the concept 'power' has been used in the political science volatility of court politics and the premonition or literature dealing with such fields of study as experience of civil war prompted theorists like Hobbes international relations, state theory and business/ and Locke to turn to the political and quasi-legal government relations. constraints of social contract backed by state coercion. Their social contract has become the model for modern Research Seminar state formation and citizenship based on The seminar focuses on skills necessary in order to individualism. Isolated from its historical context, undertake fourth year thesis work. Areas covered contractarianism is no longer seen as the trial and include the selection of a thesis topic, research design error theory that it was at its inception. The short­ and the organisation and writing up of research. comings which modern critics of contractarianism Students are required to prepare a thesis prospectus. raise—an incapacity to deal with collectivities and the tendency for rights-based cultures to deny the duties of community—are shortcomings of which the Government IV Honours classically grounded humanists of the seventeenth Students work as far as possible under individual century were clearly aware. Despite the later criticisms supervision. Courses to be attended will be arranged of Mary Astell and others, social contract entered the with the Head of Department. Besides preparing a mainstream as the badge of democracy. Only now, substantial thesis, students will normally take two when contract has been extended to all forms of social seminars from such areas as political theory, Australian relations and when community is seriously under politics, international politics, and public policy and threat, is the model seriously contested. administration. Honorary Appointments Industrial Relations Honorary Associates Pauline Griffin, AM, PhD Macq. BA Introduction Peter Harley, MCom MB A U.N.S.W. DipLabRelations Industrial relations is a relatively new and fast- and the Law expanding social science area. The department, The Hon. J.T. Ludeke, QC, LLB founded in 1976, aims at providing students with a The Hon. James Macken, HonLLD well-rounded understanding of industrial relations, Sir John Moore, BA LLB HonLLD and fundamental knowledge for the commencement Vic Techritz, AM, DipElectEng S.A.I.T. of professional training in the field. The overall program reflects a two-fold approach Location to the systematic study of industrial relations. First, Institute Building. the field embraces what is popularly known as 'industrial relations', namely, an understanding of Industrial Relations First Year the institutions and process of job regulation and evolving concepts of basic rights in industry. This The first year is designed as a comprehensive involves studying the theory and practice of relations introduction to the field and as a foundation for the between employers, employees, unions, the state and second and third years. the future of industrial society. Secondly, fundamentals Macro Industrial Relations I 6 units of professional training are also offered through Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk disciplines such as human resource management, industrial sociology, labour law, labour history, labour A broad introduction to the institutions and processes economics, and labour theory, which have contributed of Australian industrial relations beyond the level of successfully towards a deeper understanding of the individual organisation. Topics will include: contemporary problems. • introduction to industrial relations theory; The department offers a limited work experience • historical and legal background to Australian industrial relations; program for third year Industrial Relations students • trade unions; during vacations, with placements in local unions, • employer associations; employer organisations and companies. Graduates • the role of the state; can find employment in the areas of personnel • industrial relations processes, such as conciliation, administration, union research and organisation, arbitration and collective bargaining; industrial advocacy, human resource management, • industrial relations issues and outcomes: including industrial relations, management, and in public service industrial conflict, wage determination; departments. Additionally students who have • recent trends in Australian industrial relations. combined a study of industrial relations with a law degree often find specialist practice in industrial law. Micro Industrial Relations I 6 units Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk A broad introduction to organisations in Australia Staff and industrial relations (including human resource Professor management) within those organisations. Topics will Russell Lansbury, MA DipEd Melb. PhD Lond. include: Appointed 1987 • theoretical perspectives on organisations; (Head of Department) • historical and legal background; • the nature of Australian enterprises; Associate Professor • management structures within the enterprise; Ron Callus, MEc • management strategies; • workers and work groups; Senior Lecturers • workers and union organisation within the business Mark Bray, MA Warw. PhD U.N.S. W. BEc enterprise; Suzanne Jamieson, BA LLB U.N.S.W. GradDipPub • human resource management activities: including SectMgt U.T.S. LLM job design and unilateral control, analysis, planning, Jim Kitay, MA Well. PhD AN. 17. recruitment, selection, performance appraisal, Gregory Patmore, BEc PhD remuneration and training. Lecturers John Campling, BA Sus. MA Qu. PhD Camb. Industrial Relations Second and Third Year Susan McGrath-Champ, BA WAust. MA Br.Col. PhD The second and third years of Industrial Relations Macq. comprise eight courses chosen from the following. Mark Westcott, BEc Not all will be available in any one year. Associate Lecturer Grant Michelson, MCom Cant. & Otago Sociology of Industry and Labour 4 units Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial Administrative Assistant Relations I Vera Differding Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk This course provides an introduction to general in wage determination and dispute resolution; the sociology and the sociological study of work and Accord and labour politics; union amalgamations; the society. The course begins with a consideration of the use of penalties in resolving industrial conflict. nature of Australian society and the patterns of stability and change that can be observed, including class, Human Resource Management 4 units gender, ethnicity, ideology, occupations and labour Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial markets. The primary emphasis is upon how work is Relations I organized and experienced, and the relationship Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk between workandnon-workstructures and processes. This course will build upon concepts and materials Particular attention is given to current developments covered in earlier courses by examining human in work and organizational design. resource activities and the place of human resource function in the context of work organisations and the Labour History 4 units wider environment. Topics will include: Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial • product markets, competitive strategies and Relations I employment practices; Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk • strategic HRM; This course concentrates on developments in Australia • staffing practices (including equal employment prior to 1972. It draws on research and concepts from opportunities); business, labour and economic history as well as • job evaluation, performance evaluation and industrial relations. Topics addressed include convict payment systems; labour; management strategy and union responses; • human resource development; the foundations of arbitration, unions and politics. • workplace and organisational governance; • new production concepts and work arrangements. Legal A spects of industrial Relations 4 units Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial Work Safety 4 units Relations I Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk Relations I Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk This course examines the Australianlegal framework, the scope of industrial law, the employment relation­ Work Safety is an examination of the industrial ship, the Federal-State division of legislative power in relations implications of occupational health and safety industrial relations and the industrial arbitration issues. The course will be taught so as to bring out the systems; courts, tribunals and awards. Current interdisciplinary nature of an appropriate study of developments in the law and politics of the systems occupational health and safety by drawing on will be referred to throughout the course. industrial law, labour history, sociology, economics and the physical sciences. A major area of study will Economics of Labour Markets 4 units be the role of the state over the past 150 years, especially Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial inits attempts to deal with the prevention of accidents Relations I and disease and the compensation and rehabilitation Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk of the victims of accident and disease at the workplace. This course examines the manner in which labour Organisational Analysis and Behaviour 4 units economists have analysed some of the key issues Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial relating to the employment relationship and industrial Relations I relations. Emphasis is placed on applied topics of Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk special relevance to the contemporary Australian A disciplinary introduction to organisational labour market. behaviour and a survey of its usefulness for the study of industrial relations. Topics will include: Industrial Relations Policy 4 units • organisational theory Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial • motivation Relations I Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk • groups • leadership This course will be concerned with a range of policy • organisational structure areas in the public and private sectors. Primary • culture consideration will.be given to current Australian • power debates, although parallels will be drawn withoverseas • conflict in organisations experience. Attention will be given to the formulation • control and implementation of industrial relations policies, • decision-making the approach of the parties to particular issues, and • organisational change. the evaluation of the consequences of industrial relations policies. Discrimination and Equality in Employment Substantive areas to be covered in the course may 4 units include: award restructuring; the emerging enterprise Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial focus and its implications for workplace industrial Relations I relations; management and union structures for Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk collective bargaining; the role of industrial tribunals A multi-disciplinary analysis of discrimination in employment and initiatives designed to address such This course traces the development of management discrimination and promote equality at work. Topics theory and practice in Australia to the present. The will include: course will focus on the changing nature of job and • origins of discrimination in employment; organizational design and control, human resource • reaction by the state in the U.S.A., the EEC and management and industrial relations. Consideration Australia; will be given to the influences on management thought • EEO, Affirmative Action and Anti-Discrimination and practice, employee involvement arrangements, legislation in Australia, including its implemen- compensation practices, and the relationship between ' ration and effectiveness; management and trade unions. • case studies: sex discrimination, physically disabled, IIIV; Industrial Relations Practice 4 units Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial • case studies in the public sector. Relations I and four 4-unit Industrial Relations courses Comparative Industrial Relations 4 units Classes Sem 2 Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial The course is intended to go some way towards Relations I bridging the gap between theory and professional Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk life. The course will consist of: An introduction to comparative industrial relations • one week of structured work experience with a (within the enterprise and beyond) in Western government agency, trade union, business or developed economies. The countries and the topics employer association in a relevant area of either covered will vary over time and according to the staff Industrial Relations or Human Resource member in charge, but will normally include: Management; • introduction to comparative method; • a four day practical advocacy course simulating the • anhistorical and contemporary survey of industrial, presentation of a simple case before the N.S.W. relations institutions in each country; Industrial Relations Commission; and • exploration of the broader economic, political and • a 1500-word essay of the student's design linking a social environment of industrial relations in each theoretical aspect of Industrial Relations/Human country; Resource Management wi th practice and procedure • the role of the state in industrial relations; or issues raised in the simulated advocacy training. • the structure and strategies of unions and employer organisations; Industrial Relations II Honours 8 units • management and union organisation and strategy Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial within the enterprise; Relations I at credit level or above • bargaining structures. Classes Yr: 2 lec/wk Intended primarily for students who wish to proceed Strategic Management 4 units to final honours Industrial Relations. The honours Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial program involves two courses, one in each semester. Relations, I Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk ' Industrial Relations III Honours 16 units This course provides an introduction to the strategic Prereq Industrial Relations II Honours and four half semester management of enterprises. It introduces conceptual courses at credit level or above problems and applied issues informed by research Classes Yr: 2 lec/wk from a variety of disciplines. Key topics, include: origins, nature and current issues in strategic manage­ The honours program consists of two courses, one in ment; the relationship of strategy to internal and each semester. Students proceeding to fourth year external environments; strategy implementation and honours must take a course in Research Methods. evaluation. Final Honours Year Strategic Human Resource Management Prereq Industrial Relations III Honours and four half semester 4 units courses at credit level or above Coursework, thesis Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial Relations I The primary focus is on an original dissertation of Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk approximately 20 000 words. In addition, students This course examines the relationship between must undertake coursework as specified. competitive strategy and human resource manage­ ment. Topics include: strategic approaches to HRM; the role of the human resources and industrial relations Interdepartmental courses and functionin organisations; organisational performance programs and governance; organisational culture. COURSES The Development of Australian Management 4 units Communication and Critical Analysis 1A Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial 6 units Relations I Michael J. Paton Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk Classes Sem 2: 2hr sem/wk This course aims to enhance oral and written Departments of Economic History, Economics and communication skills and in the process provide a Government and Public Administration will greater understanding of the philosophy underlying participate in the teaching of this course. Problems of academic discourse. Weekly units are oriented around poverty, unemployment and underemployment, a progressive series of tasks which consider academic unequal distribution of resources and lack of human texts in context and require learners to understand, development in South Asia will be examined together analyse and produce spoken and written texts with the nature of the internally regimented and appropriate to the context of academic English. The differentiated socioeconomic systems in these contextualisation of these tasks is the philosophical countries; the roles of cultures, religions, languages, aspects of critical analysis. Themes, such as the political systems, economic management and the difference between convention, fact, opinion and military in the contemporary period, will be the main preference; deductive and inductive proof; validity focus. International political and economic relations and truth; evidence; and the ethics of persuasion, are between these countries and the rest of the world will the basis on which the skills are taught. This course is be analysed with a special emphasis on Australia's meant for native speakers of English. relationship with South Asia.

Communication and Critical Analysis 1B Methods and Statistics in Social Science 6 units Assoc. Prof. Stilwell (convenor), Mr Goodhew, Dr Jones, Dr Michael J. Paton Patmore Classes Sem 2: (2hr sem & 1 tut)/wk Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 prac)/wk [Not currently available] This course is very similar in terms of bo th content and the enhancement of communication skills to This is an interdisciplinary course available to students Communication and Critical Analysis IA. However, in the BEc(SocSc) degree. the students targeted in this course are those with low The course aims to help students become competent levels of English language proficiency. The great but critical consumers of social science techniques. It majority of students involved in this course are is taught as two simultaneous streams each of two expected to come from non-English speaking hours per week. One stream deals with general issues backgrounds and thus it will be taught with a focus on of method in the social sciences and the other with the learning of English at the highest (tertiary) level. statistical techniques, there being a degree of interconnection between the subject matter of the two streams. Students must take both streams. Classes take Political Economy of Women 8 units the form of integrated lecture/workshop sessions, Ms G. Meagher varying the form of presentation according to the Prereq any 4 first year full semester courses Classes Sem: (two 1hr lec & one 2hr workshop)/wk material being taught. Assessment exam, essay, group project Stream A. Methods in Social Science The course Political Economy of Women is available 1. Social Science Methods: introduction to critical as a Faculty of Economics interdepartmental, perspectives: alternative frameworks for interdisciplinary course offered by members of the analysis; case studies of controversy in social Departments of Economics and Government. It is explanation. available to students in third year Economics and 2. —Use and Abuse: the social Economics (P), second and third year Government, context and conceptual underpinnings of and Women's Studies. The course examines Australian economic data; construction and interpretation women's workand political participationinAustralian of 'facts'; case studies, e.g. national income society. Topics covered include analysis of the accounting, balance of payments and economics and politics of prostitution, surrogacy and unemployment statistics. housework, and feminist critiques of liberal political 3. Survey Methods, Design and Analysis: collecting and economic theories. information through social survey; how samples are designed and how survey results can be Contemporary Economics and Politics of analysed. South Asia 8 units 4. Historical Method: interpretation of historical Assoc. Prof. Bhattacharya information; documentary sources; oral and Prereq any 4 first year full semester courses visual sources. Classes Sem 2: 2 lec/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, one 5000w essay or two 2500w Stream B. Statistics in Social Science essays Summarising data: tables, charts. The study of political and economic developments in Descriptive statistics: central tendency; spread; Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan correlation and regression. and Sri Lanka. The course will follow a multi­ References disciplinary approach to the study of contemporary D. Freedman et al. Statistics (Norton, 1978) South Asia, and lecturers from Indian Sub-Continent A series of selected articles to be read for the methods Studies of the School of Asian Studies and the component of the course INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMS Japanese Politics Asian Studies Northeast Asian Regional Politics: Conflict and Change Reform, Revolution, and Post-Communism. Courses in Asian Studies are concerned with the study of Asia or parts of Asia employing a range of History options methodological approaches. The aim is to develop Indian Civilisation and Social Change—from the Indus interdisciplinary and comparative examination of the Valley Civilisation to Gandhi historical, cultural, economic, political and religious Modern Southeast Asia aspects of Asian societies. Consequently, while based Protest, Dissent and the State in Modern Japan 1860- in the School of Asian Studies, Asian Studies courses 1960. draw on the expertise of Asian specialists from other departments and faculties in the University. Althoughstudy of an Asian language is encouraged MarKstincj in conjunction with Asian Studies courses, it is not required as all courses are conducted in English and Introduction utilise English language texts. No prior study of Asia The Department of Marketing is situated in the is required for entry into the first year course, which Basement Level of the Institute Building. Initial introduces students to the study of Asia through an enquiries regarding the department may be directed emphasis on comparative themes and concepts. A to the general office, Room N154, tel. 9351 4283. wide pool of options for senior level courses is available Students should not hesitate to contact members of for completing a major in Asian Studies, made up of the teaching staff if they need information about their Asia-related courses in the departments of Economic particular subject. History, Government and Public Administration, and The two-year program in Marketing commenced History, as well as the School of Asian Studies. in 1994 for second year students in the Bachelor of The courses available are: Commerce and Bachelor of Economics degrees. It is Asian Studies 101 6 units built On four one-semester core courses, followed by Classes Yr: 2hr/wk options. The major consists of the four core courses plus at least one option. The core courses include Note: Asian Studies 101 may notbe taken with Japanese Marketing Principles offered in Semester 1; Marketing A10 or Indonesian and Malayan Studies A10 or Research I and Consumer Behaviour offered in A102. Semester 2; and Marketing Research II offered in Semester 1 of the third year. The options are Marketing Asian Studies 201, 202, 203 and 204 each 8 units Communications, Retail and Services Marketing and Prereq 12 units in Asian Studies 101 (6 units) and/or an New Products Marketing offered in year three. Options Asian language (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Indonesian, are available to all students who have completed Indian Studies, Thai), Economic History, Government or Marketing Principles and Marketing Research I, as History well as Economics I and II and Econometrics I. The Classes Sem program in Marketing emphasises critical and Each of the courses Asian Studies 201,202,203 and 204 analytical thinking and the practice of marketing as an consists of one semester course (8 units) chosen from applied science. Students are expected to have a the pool of options listed below. Not all options listed reasonable level of knowledge in mathematics and will be available in 1997. Consult the participating econometrics; and emphasis is placed on analytical department for details, or the Faculty of Arts skills and the application of principles inmost courses. Undergraduate Handbook, or the Faculty of Economics The department is participating in the Master of Timetable for Economic History and Government Commerce and Graduate Diploma in Commerce options. program within the Faculty of Economics. AnHonours program is offered in fourth year to students accepted Asian Studies level 3 courses may be available from 1997. into the program. PhD students will be accepted Semester options subject to the availability of supervisory members of the department. PhD programs will be tailored to School of Asian Studies options each individual, but generally will constitute a Contemporary Indonesia Program combination of coursework and research. Both full- Early Modern Japanese History and part-time students will be accepted. Economic Change and Religious Conversion Modern Japanese Social History Southeast Asian Politics Staff The Meiji Restoration. Professor Jordan Joseph Louviere, BA S.W. Louisiana MA Economic History options Nebraska PhD Iowa Economic Development in Southeast Asia Appointed 1994 Economic Development of Modern Japan (Head of Department) Issues in Modern Japanese Economic History Historical Development of the Chinese Economy. Senior Lecturers Benedict Dellaert, MSc PhD Eindhoven Univ. of Government options Technology Government and Politics of Modern China Pamela D. Morrison, BEc Old MCom PhD U.N.S.W. Lecturers Marketing 302: Marketing Communications Jeffrey D. Brazell, BA Utah 8 units Thomas J. Crook, BS MBA Utah Prereq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles, Marketing 202: Visiting Lecturers Consumer Behaviour, Marketing 203: Marketing Research Terence W. Beed, Visiting Professor, BA PhD I, Economics II Bernard Pailthorpe, Associate Professor, BA Coreq Marketing 301: Marketing Research II Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Marketing 201: Marketing Principles Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments Introduction to and overview of current theory and 8 units practice in advertising, sales promotion and personal Prereq Economics I, Econometrics I selling. Course includes case study and research Coreq Accounting IA or Financial Accounting Concepts practicum. Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments Introduction to the terminology and functions of Marketing 303: Retail and Services marketing in modern business practice. Market forces Marketing 8 units and opportunities, with reference to the role of social, Prereq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles, Marketing 202: economic, political and global influences and trends. Consumer Behaviour, Marketing 203: Marketing Research Macro (societal) and micro (individual and firm) I, Economics II implications of the market process and marketing Coreq Marketing 301: Marketing Research II decision-making. Classes Sem 1:1 lec/wk Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments Marketing 202: Consumer Behaviour The role of marketing and the marketing function within retail and service organisations. Special 8 units marketing issues involved in these organisations. Coreq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles, Marketing 203: Course includes case study and research practicum. Marketing Research I Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments Marketing 304: New Products Marketing Introduction to and overview of economic, psycho­ 8 units logical and sociological bases of consumer behaviour Prereq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles, Marketing 202: as they relate to the purchase and consumption of Consumer Behaviour, Marketing 203: Marketing Research I, Economics II goods and services. Marketing implications of Coreq Marketing 301: Marketing Research II consumer behaviour and the interaction of consumers Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk and the marketing process of organisations. Assessment one 2hr exam, assignments Development and marketing of new consumer and Marketing 203: Marketing Research I industrial products and the role of the marketing 8 units function in that process. Identification of potentially Coreq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles, Marketing 202: profitable target markets and demand estimation. Consumer Behaviour Dynamics of new product introductions. Course Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tuf)/wk includes case study and research practicum. Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments Introduction to marketing research and the marketing Marketing IV Honours research industry. Basics of problem recognition, Prereq Major in Marketing with an average grade of Credit formulation, research design and reporting. or better, plus Econometrics IIA andBor Applied Statistics Qualitative research methods. Survey design and data 2 (offered by the School of Mathematics and Statistics). collection. Data entry and coding. Introduction to Classes Year long basic quantitative analysis. Research practicum. The program consists of two full year courses or Marketing 301: Marketing Research II equivalent, plus a scientific marketing research project leading to a research paper or thesis which represents 8 units the time equivalent of two full year courses and is to Prereq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles, Marketing 202: be completed in the second semester. Consumer Behaviour,Marketing203:MarketingResearch I, Economics II Courses: Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk (1) Marketing Honours Seminar. This is a full year Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments course and is integrated with the research project. It Quantitative marketing research methods, including involves introducing students to the scientific method, multivariate research methods and models. Analysis the notion of scientific research teams, preparation of and interpretation of data, report preparation and a research proposal, defence of this proposal, planning presentation. Applications to market segmentation, and designing the research, undertaking the research, targeting, positioning and demand forecasting. analysing and presenting the results, writing a scientific Advanced research methods and overview of current research paper (thesis) and defending same. state-of-the-art. Research practicum continued from. (2) Research Seminar series. This seminar meets weekly Marketing 203: Marketing Research I. in both semesters and discusses recent and emerging literature in marketing, papers prepared by seminar John Grumley, BA PhD participants or visitors, or other topics that are Damien Byers, BA Macq. PhD Melb. consistent with the interests and objectives of the Christiane Schildknecht, MA PhD Konstanz participants. Adrian MacKenzie, BSc U.N.S.W. BA PhD Research Paper: This will be written up as an academic Administrative Assistant article but with a more extensive literature review. Sue O'Connor Students will work in research teams supervised by a staff member of the Department. They are encouraged Traditional and Modern Philosophy to undertake research of an original nature and of Challis Professor of Philosophy publishable quality from the outset. Typically the Keith Campbell, MA N.Z. BPhil Oxf. PhD, FAHA subject areas are broadly going to be related to methods Appointed 1992 of marketing research, new technology marketing or (Head of School) retail and services marketing since these are the areas in which the Department has especially strong Readers expertise and supervisory skills. John Bacon, BA Wabash MA PhD Yale Stephen W. Gaukroger, BA Lond. MA PhD Camb., Combined Honours are available in Marketing and FAHA Econometrics, and in Marketing and Finance. Senior Lecturers Michael McDermott, BA PhD School of Philosophy Huw Price, BA A.N.U. MSc Oxf. PhD Camb. Lloyd Reinhardt, BA Calif. Philosophy is a Table A course in the Bachelor of Adrian Heathcote, BA Adel. PhD LaT. Economics (Social Sciences) degree and a Table B Lecturers course in the Bachelor of Economics and Bachelor of Eugenio Benitez, BA WMd PhD Texas Commerce degrees. Jean Curthoys, BA The School of Philosophy consists of two departments: General Philosophy (GP) and Traditional Administrative Assistants and Modern Philosophy (T&M). Anthea Bankoff First, second and third year courses are offered by Veronica Leahy the two departments jointly. Honorary Appointment There is a separate IV (Honours) year for each Emeritus Professor ., department, but with the same pool of courses. David Mallet Armstrong, AO, BPhil Oxf. PhD Melb. Intending honours students should note the entry BA, FAHA requirements mentioned in the fourth year section. The General Philosophy office is located in the Registration southeast corner of the main quadrangle (by the Philosophy 101,102 and 103 jacaranda tree) up one floor (Room S432, phone A first year information sheet and a registration form 9351 2225). The Traditional and Modern Philosophy will be available during Orientation Week. Please office (Room S241, phone 93512466) is in the same complete the form and return it during your allotted area, but on the ground floor. Noticeboards adjoin the registration time (see below). offices. Philosophy 101,102 and 103 students are advised to The General Philosophy office administers matters register with the Department of General Philosophy concerning first year (Dr Buckle, Room S443, phone in the southeast corner of the main Quadrangle (behind 93512205). the jacaranda tree) at the following times during The Traditional and Modern Philosophy office Orientation Week. administers matters concerning second year and third year courses (Dr Benitez, Room S502, phone 9351 2559). Second and third year Philosophy Intending second and third year students should Staff register during Orientation Week at the Department General Philosophy of Traditional and Modern Philosophy. A booklet Professors containing details of courses and other relevant Paul J. Crittenden, DD Catholic Inst.Syd. BLitt Oxf. information will be available from the department in Appointed 1991 January, and the last page of this booklet will comprise Gyorgy Markus, DipPhil Moscow CandSciPhil a registration form which should be completed and Hungarian Acad.Sci. (Personal Chair) handed in to thedepartmentduringOrientation Week. Appointed 1994 Descriptions of second and third year Philosophy Senior Lecturers courses are given in the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Moira Gatens, BA U.N.S.W. PhD Handbook. Paul Patton, MA DU Paris Paul Redding, BA PhD Philosophy 101 6 units Denise Russell, BA PhD Semester 1 Lecturers Philosophy 101 consists of the following two Stephen Buckle, MA Macq. PhD A.N. U. components: Philosophy and Society Textbook Dr Buckle J.B. Bacon Basic Logic (available from the Department of Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Traditional and Modern Philosophy) Assessment one tut paper, one essay An introduction to central themes and methods in Option Pool B political philosophy. The course will be divided into Criticism and Argument two halves: an introduction to the beginnings of Dr Russell political philosophy in Plato's Republic; and an Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk examination of the social contract theories of Thomas Assessment coursework Hobbes and his critics, which aimed to provide a fresh This course aims at developing practical skills in start in political thought based on the insights and detecting flaws in arguments and in presenting good methods of modern science. The course aims to provide arguments. The emphasis is on informal reasoning an introduction to some major philosophical works, rather than formal logic. and also to show the wider questions a political theory must answer in order to be properly philosophical. Textbook Available from the Department of General Philosophy Textbook Readings will be available from the Department of General Feminism 1 Philosophy Ms Curthoys Lecture tapes will be available from Fisher Library Classes Sem 2: two 1hr lec/wk Assessment one essay Epistemology DrHeathcote This course will discuss the major developments in Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk feminist theory of 'the second wave' by situating them Assessment one tut paper and one 2hr exam within the context of the changing nature of the women's movement itself. It will begin with the An introduction to the theory of knowledge. What is analysis of the psychological dimensions of power of knowledge and what can we know? What is the role the early Women's Liberation movement which of (a) observation, (b) reason, in the acquiring of provides the assumed background for much of the knowledge and/or reasonable belief? Plato's defence later theory and then move on to the 'feminism of of objective truth and Descartes' treatment of difference' which was developed as the movement scepticism will be discussed. became more successful. Although the idea of sexual Textbook difference was developed in terms of a number of Notes available from the Department of Traditional and different theories which refer to each other, the Modern Philosophy. Tapes available from Fisher Library - discussion willfocusonits implications forphilosophy and particularly on the debate oyer whether there is Philosophy 102 6 units 'male' and 'feminist' philosophy. But another kind of Classes Sem 2 philosophical question will also be raised. As an exercise in evaluating the nature of the feminist move­ This course consists of two components, one chosen ment which provides the context for such debates, it from Option Pool A and one chosen from Option Pool will be an exercise in political philosophy. Central to B. this will be the very current debate concerning feminism and 'political correctness' embodying the Option Pool A charge that feminism has itself become a repressive Introduction to Metaphysics movement. Prof. Campbell Reading Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk A course booklet consisting of a collection of readings will Assessment one tut paper and one 2hr exam be available from the Department of Traditional and An introduction to problems concerning the general Modern Philosophy character of Reality. Topics will include nature and supernature, space and time, life, mind and matter, Foundations of social theory free will and morality. Ms Curthoys Classes Sem 2: 2hr/wk Textbook Assessment one essay Notes available from the Department of Traditional and Modern Philosophy. Tapes will be available from Fisher The course will discuss the emergence of modern Library. social theory with reference to philosophy. It will be divided into three sections: Marx and the beginnings Elementary Logic of 'critical theory'; Weber's sociology and the method Dr Bacon of understanding (Verstehen); Durkheim and the seeds Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk of structuralism. In this way we shall examine the Assessment one 2hr exam, class work historical foundations of what are still three of the Criteria ofvalid reasoning: extensive practice applying major streams in social theory. The'reference to rules of deduction to draw correct conclusions from philosophy will be twofold. We shall look at the given premises couched in a special symbolic language. emergence of social theory out of philosophy, and Both sentence connectives and quantifiers will be examine the philosophical assumptions of these three covered. social theorists. Textbook List of options Readings will be available from the Department of History of philosophy: Traditional and Modern Philosophy Descartes and 17th Century continental philosophy Locke and empiricism Students should note that no individual results given Plato and Aristotle throughout the year can be regarded as definitive and that Origins of modern political philosophy adjustments to grades may be made at the Board of Presocratics Examiners'Meeting of the Faculty. Epistemology, metaphysics and logic: Elementary logic • Senior courses—200 level Intermediate logic Descriptions of the courses are given in the Faculty of Philosophical logic Arts Undergraduate Handbook. History and philosophy of science A History and philosophy of science B Philosophy 101 and 102 are prerequisites for 201. Philosophy of language Kinds of objectivity Courses Hume and the problem of causation The following second year courses will be available: Philosophy of mind Philosophy 201,202,203,204 Philosophy of religion. Philosophy 201 is a corequisite for 202; 202 is a Post-metaphysical ethics: Levinas corequisite for 203 and so on. Heidegger and Gadamer Each course is an eight-unit course. However, 201 Classical phenomenology and 202 must be completed before either canbe counted Literary forms of philosophy towards the BEc (SocSc) degree. Philosophy 201,202, etc. are Table B courses in the BEc and BCom degrees. Moral, social and political philosophy: History of ethics Options Moral psychology Each of the courses Philosophy 201, Philosophy 202, Philosophy of law etc. consists of two components, or 'options', selected Critical feminist theory from the list below. Philosophy of economics Some options are offered in the first semester (2 Theories of modernity A hours per week), some in the second semester (2 hours Theories of modernity B per week). All Philosophy second and third year Marx: history, society and the individual courses are designated 'full year' courses—you can Humanity and animality choose options from either semester as components of HeUer any course. Students must enrol at the beginning of Fate, luck and choice Semester 1 and remain enrolled in the courses for the Distributive justice year. Results are given at the end of the year. Students taking Philosophy 203 can also choose the Some options are assessed by an essay and an additional option: exam, some by two essays; logic options have exercises 5 Strands of Indian Philosophy and an exam. In certain circumstances students may (For details consult School of Asian Studies.) choose to be assessed by a single essay of double the normal length. All options count equally in calculating The list is provisional only. Before enrolling, consult course results. the booklet obtainable from the Traditional and Modern Philosophy Office. Rules governing choice of options Students should note that no individual results given (i) Philosophy 201 comprises any two options. throughout the year can be regarded as definitive and that (ii) Philosophy 202 must include one of the adjustments to grades may be made at the Board of following options: Examiners' Meeting of the Faculty. Plato and Aristotle Descartes and 17th Century Continental Philosophy Senior courses—300 level Locke and Empiricism. The following third year courses wil be available: (iii) A student doing 201, 202 and 203 must do at least one option from each program.* Philosophy 301, 302, 303, 30* (iv) Intending honours students should note the The prerequisite for Philosophy 301 is 16 Senior units entry requirements to Philosophy IV(T) and of Philosophy. Philosophy 301 is a corequisite for TV(G) set out in the fourth year sections. It is Philosophy 302; Philosophy 302 is a corequisite for advisable for such students to attempt 201,202 Philosophy 303; and Philosophy 303 is a corequisite and 203, at least, in the second year. for Philosophy 304. Each course is an eight-unit course. However, 301 "Options are classified into three groups, or 'programs': History of and 302 must be completed before either canbe counted philosophy; Epistemology, metaphysics and logic; Moral, social and towards the BEc (SocSc) degree. Philosophy 301,302, political philosophy. etc. are Table B courses in the BEc and BCom degrees. Options Nature of experiment Each of the courses Philosophy 301, Philosophy 302, The nature of the self (pre-honours seminar) etc. consists of two components, or 'options', selected Literary forms of philosophy from the list below. Sense and reference: Frege and Derrida Some options are offered in the first semester (2 Moral, social and political philosophy: hours per week), some in the second semester (2 hours Theories of modernity A per week). All Philosophy courses are designated 'full Theories of modernity B year' courses—you can choose options from either Philosophy of economics semester as components of any course. However, you Art and society must enrol at the beginning of Semester 1 and remain History of ethics enrolled throughout the year even if your work is Philosophy of law completed in one semester. Results are determined at Marx: history, society and the individual the end of the year. Distributive justice Some options are assessed by an essay and an Critical feminist theory exam, some by essay and take home exam and some Humanity and animality by two essays; logic options have exercises and an HeUer exam. In certain circumstances students may choose Moral psychology to be assessed by a single essay of double the normal Morality and modernity length. All options count equally in calculating course Fate, luck and choice results. Students taking philosophy 303 or 304may also choose the following options: Restrictions on choice of options Philosophy and phenomenology of religion (i) Philosophy 301 must include one of the Philosophy and theology following: The death of God Plato and Aristotle (For details and restrictions, consult the School of Studies Kant in Religion.) Hegel, subjectivity and society History and philosophy of medicine: scientific Origins of analytic philosophy. controversies (ii) Your second and third year courses must (For details consult the History and Philosophy of Science together include at least one option from each Unit.) program.* This listis provisional only. Certain options offered by (iii) Intending honours students should note the the School of Asian Studies may also be available to entry requirements for Philosophy IVG and Philosophy students. Before enrolling, consult the IVT in the fourth year sections. booklet obtainable from the Traditional and Modern List of options Philosophy Office. History of philosophy: Students should note that no individual results given Plato and Aristotle throughout the year can be regarded as definitive and that Kant adjustments to grades may be made at the Board of Hegel, subjectivity and society Examiners' Meeting of the Faculty. Origins of analytical philosophy Origins of modern political philosophy Philosophy IVG Honours The requirements are six options together with a Epistemology, metaphysics and logic: thesis on an approved topic (10 000 to 15 000 words, Classical phenomenology equivalent of three options). The thesis is supervised Hume and the problem of causation by a member of the Department of General Philosophy. Elementary logic The entry requirements for Philosophy IVG are: Intermediate logic students must have passed six senior level Philosophy Kinds of objectivity courses including 3 at 300 level, and must have gained Philosophical logic an average of a Credit mark for Philosophy courses Philosophy of mind taken at 300 level; at least two options from each of the Philosophy of physics 1 three programs (History of philosophy; Epistemology, Philosophy of physics 2 metaphysics and logic; Moral, social and political Philosophy of religion philosophy) should have been passed; and students Philosophy of language must complete at least four options from the History Post-metaphysical ethics: Levinas of philosophy program by the end of Philosophy IV. Heidegger and Gadamer Conditionals Courses Wittgenstein See list of courses below under Philosophy IVT Metaphilosophy Honours: no restriction on choice. Philosophy IVT Honours "Options are classified into three groups, or 'programs': History of philosophy; Epistemology, metaphysics and logic; Moral, social and The requirements are six options together with a political philosophy. thesis on an approved topic (10 000 to 15 000 words, equivalent of three options). The thesis is supervised Information about registration meetings for by a member of the Department of Traditional and Psychology 201,202,301 and 302 students will also be Modern Philosophy. Some of the options may be posted at the Enrolment Centre, and on the chosen from those offered by the Department of departmental noticeboards on the 5th floor of the General Philosophy. However, two of the six options Griffith-Taylor Building. are nominated each year as the Philosophy IV seminar (one in each semester), and students are expected to Enquiries take these options. The main enquiry office of the Department is Room 416, Griffith-Taylor Building (tel. 9351 2872) where j The entry requirements for Philosophy IVT are: details may be obtained from the staff members students must have passed six Senior level Philosophy available throughout the year to discuss particular courses, at least 3 at 300 level, and must have gained courses. an average of a Credit mark for Philosophy courses taken at 300 level; at least two options from each of the Honours three programs (History of philosophy; Epistemology, In order to be eligible to graduate with honours in metaphysics and logic; Moral, social and political Psychology, it is necessary (except as provided in the philosophy) should have been passed. Elementary by-laws or resolutions) to gain a year average of a pass logic, or equivalent, is also a prerequisite for IVT. with at least credit in Psychology 201 and 202 and also in Psychology 301 and 302. Students wishing to Courses graduate with honours in Psychology are urged to (Consult relevant department for course details.) discuss their choice of other subjects with a Faculty adviser as soon as practicable. There is currently a Semester 1 quota on entry to Psychology 4. The first person (fourth year seminar) Hegel, subjectivity and society Examinations Origins of analytic philosophy Undergraduate courses are examined at the end of Mind and world each semester and include classwork by way of essays, Kant reports or practical/laboratory work. At the beginning Habermas of each course or section of a course, students are Art and society advised of its relative weight and the contributions of Aristotle: Nicomachean ethics exam and classwork for assessment purposes. Ayer and Quine Sense and reference: Frege and Derrida Textbooks Check departmental noticeboards before buying Semester 2 prescribed texts. Conditionals Spinoza's Ethics and political theory Staff Philosophy of physics 2 Professors Metaphilosophy Robert Alan Boakes, BA Cant. PhD Harv. Wittgenstein Appointed 1989 Nature of experiment Indigenous rights and political theory Stephen W. Touyz, BSc PhD Cape T. BSc Witw. Morality and modernity Appointed 1996 Readers Dale M. Atrens, BA Windsor MA Hollins PhD Rutgers Ian S. Curthoys, PhD Monash BA Psychofogy Lazar Stankov, MA Belgrade PhD Denver Associate Professor Introduction Helen C. Beh, BA PhD N.E. Psychology is the study of behaviour. As a study it is approached on a scientific basis, with provision for Senior Lecturers professional training at the postgraduate level. The Brian D. Crabbe, BA PhD research activities of the Department cover almost all Alan E. Craddock, BA PhD of the main branches of the subject. R.F. Soames Job, BA PhD David J. Kavanagh, BA PhD Stan. DipPsychol Registration and noticeboards Cyril R. Latimer, BA PhD Students in all years must register during the David J. Livesey, BSc PhD WAust. orientation period. Psychology 101 students register Roslyn H. Markham, MA PhD by going to the Carslaw Building during orientation Terence McMullen, BA PhD and collecting a personalised computer-generated Joel B. Michell, BA PhD timetable, which will indicate the lecture times and John M. Predebon, BA PhD the tutorial group to which they have been allocated. David E. Schotte, BA Delaware MS PhD Virginia Further information will be posted at the Enrolment John Soyland, BA MA Adel. PhD Camb. Centre and on the Psychology 1 noticeboard on the 4th Robyn Tate, MA MPsychol U.N.S.W. PhD N'cle Floor of the Griffith-Taylor Building. (N.S.W.) Alison M. Turtle, MA Psychology 201 deals with material on both basic and Michael B. Walker, BSc WAust. BA Adel. DPhil Oxf. complex psychological processes and covers the Lecturers following topics: Pauline M. Howie, BA PhD U.N.S.W. Psychological statistics Iain McGregor, MA Oxf. PhD Classes : (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Kick van der Zwan, BSc PhD Assessment one 1hr exam, quiz Stephanie Whitmont, BA MPsychol PhD Associate Lecturers Personality Laurel Bornholt, BA Melb. PhD Macq. Classes : (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 1hr exam, one 1500w essay Robert M. Buckingham, BA Cant. MA Auck. Margaret Charles, BA PhD Individual differences James Dalziel, BA Classes : (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Agi O'Hara, BA Assessment one 1hr exam Fiona Hibberd, BA Agnes Petocz, BA PhD Neuroscience and Perception Sandra Rickards, BA Classes (1 lec & 1 prac)/wk Lynne Sweeney, BA PhD Calif. Assessment one 1hr exam Administrative Officers Textbooks Sandra Cheng, BBus U.T.S. CPA To be advised Kathy Pearce, BA U.N.S.W. Psychology 202 8 units Honorary Appointments Entry requirement Psychology 201 Emeritus Professors CZasses Sem 2: (4 lec & up to 4hr tut/prac)/wk Richard Annells Champion, MA, FASSA Assessment two 2hr exams, essays, prac, reports Philip Ley, BA Mane. PhD Liv. MPsychol Lond. Psychology 202 deals with material on both basic and John Philip Sutcliffe, MA PhD, FASSA complex psychological processes and covers the following topics: Psychology 101 6 units Classes Sem 1: (3 lec, one 1hr tut & one 1hr demonstration)/ Psychological statistics wk Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, one 10OOw essay, tut test, Assessment one 1hr exam, quiz experimental participation Behavioural neuroscience and learning The course is a general introduction to the main topics Classes : (1 lec & 1 prac)/wk and methods of psychology, and is the basis for Assessment one 1hr exam, prac report advanced work as well as being of use to those not proceeding with the subject. The course covers the Social psychology following areas: subject matter and methods of Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk psychology; basic statistics and measurement; Assessment one 1hr exam, quiz behavioural neuroscience; sensory processes; social psychology; personality theory. Cognitive processes Classes (1 lec & 1 prac)/wk Textbook Assessment one 1hr exam, one prac report To be advised Textbooks and To be advised Handbook and Practical Worksheets for Psychology 1 (1997) Psychology 301 12 units Psychology 102 6 units Entry requirement Psychology 202 Entry requirement Psychology 101 Classes Sem 1: (4 lec & up to 6hr of tut/prac)/wk Classes Sem 2: (3 lec, one 1hr tut & one 1hr demonstration)/ Assessment four 45 min exams, essays, prac reports wk Assessment one 3hr exam, one 1500w prac report, tut test; Classes experimental participation The course consists of four lectures and up to six hours of practical-tutorial work each week. The class work The course covers the following areas: human develop­ includes essays and reports of practical or laboratory ment; human mental abilities; learning, motivation work done under supervision. and abnormal psychology; visual perception; cognitive processes. Courses Because of timetabling difficulties some courses are Textbook offered at times other than those listed for Psychology As for Psychology 101 301 and 302 in the timetable for Senior courses. Students wishing to proceed to Psychology 4 Psychology 201 8 units Honours must complete History and Philosophy of Entry requirement Psychology 102 Psychology I and II and the options in Measurement Classes Sem 1: (4 lec & up to 4hr tut/prac)/wk and Psychometrics and Statistics and Research Design, Assessment two 2hr exams, essays, prac, reports plus two options in each semester. Students not wishing to proceed to Psychology 4 Environmental and organisational psychology Honours must complete four options each semester. Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 45min exam, one prac report All Psychology options are offered subject to the History and philosophy of psychology II; availability of staff and on the condition that they are philosophical principles chosen by an adequate number of students in each (Required of students wishing to proceed to Psychology case. The topics include: Honours) Prereq History and philosophy of psychology I: historical Abnormal psychology foundations Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 45min exam, one 1500w essay, tut paper Assessment one 45min exam, one 2000w essay, tut paper Cognitive processes: recognition, search and Human performance memory Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 45min exam, 10 short reports, tutorial quiz Assessment one 45min exam, prac reports Language and communication History and philosophy of psychology I; Classes (1 lec & 2 prac)/wk historical foundations Assessment one 45min exam, assignment (Required of students wishing to proceed to Psychology Perceptual systems Honours) Classes (1 lec & 1 up to 2hr of tut or prac)/wk Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 45min exam, prac report Assessment one 45min exam, one 2000w essay, tut paper Personality Intelligence Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 45min exam, assignment Assessment one 45min exam, one prac report, tut paper Statistics and research design (Required of students wishing to proceed to Psychology Learning and motivation Honours) Classes (1 lec & up to 2hr of tut or prac)/wk Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 45min exam, prac report Assessment one 45min exam, prac report The nature/nurture controversy in psychology Measurement and psychometrics Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk (Required of students wishing to proceed to Psychology Assessment one 45min exam, one 1500w essay, tut paper Honours) Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 45min exam, prac report Psychology 4 Honours Entry requirement a year average of Credit or better in Psychology 201 and202, and also in301 and 302; specified Social psychology options in Psychology 301 and 302 Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 2hr & one 3hr exam or equivalent, report of Assessment one 45min exam, prac report empirical research project, theoretical thesis or review Due to restricted resources for research supervision, Theoretical bases of development the intake to Psychology 4 Honours will be limited to Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk approximately 55 students and will be determined by Assessment one 45min exam, prac report academic merit. Students are required to (a) devise, conduct and Psychology 302 12 units report upon an empirical research project, (b) write a Entry requirement Psychology 202, except History and theoretical thesis or review, and (c) attend one lecture Philosophy II option requires History and Philosophy I course, two seminar courses and, two method courses. Classes Sem 2: (4 lec & up to 6hr of tut/prac)/wk The areas of psychology in which these activities may Assessment four 45min exams, essays, prac reports occur depend on the interests and specialities of staff Classes and Courses information: See Psychology 301 members. above. Reference lists will be supplied by staff handling The topics include: the numerous special fields that are available. Behavioural neuroscience Classes (1 lec & up to 2hr of prac or tut)/wk Assessment one 45min exam, prac report School of Studies in Religion

Child abnormal psychology Religious Studies is a Table A course in the Bachelor of Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Economics (Social Sciences) degree and a Table B Assessment one 45min exam, one 10OOw essay, tut paper course in the Bachelor of Economics and Bachelor of Developmental issues Commerce degrees. Descriptions of Religious Studies Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk courses are given in the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Assessment one 45min exam, report Handbook. studied include those formulated at all levels of Social Work, Scciai Policy and government, by non-government welfare organisa­ Sociology tions and by the private sector. Policies studied include: income support, housing, work and employment, Registration health, family and children's services, youth policies, Students must register with the Department of Social policies for the aged, urban and regional development. Work, Social Policy and Sociology at the same time as Social Policy and Administration 301 is a third year their University enrolment, by completing a regis­ course. tration card. It is also necessary to register for tutorials in the first week of lectures. Social Policy and Administration 301 16 units Location Prereq Sociology 201 and 202 The Department of Social Work and Social Policy Classes Yr: (1 lec & one 2hr tut)/wk which offers courses in Social Policy and Assessment one 3hr exam, two tut papers, two essays Administration and Sociology is in the R.C. Mills In Semester 1, the Australian experience of universal Building on the lower floor. Telephone 93512650. themes in social policy is explored: the legal frame­ work; relationships between family and state; the Staff public/private mix; work, non-work and welfare; Professor and the relationship between institutional and Stuart John Rees, BA DipSocStud CertSoc Casework community-based provision. S'ton PhD Aberd. In Semester 2, the focus shifts to the principles of Appointed 1978 welfare allocation, setting that analysis into the Professor of Sociology and Social Policy (Personal Chair)demographi c framework of Australian society and Bettina Cass, AO, BA PhD U.N.S.W., FASSA the organisational mechanisms for welfare planning Appointed 1990 and service delivery. From a philosophical analysis of social justice and principles of allocation, their Associate Professors implications are developed with respect to selected Alan G. Davis, BA Sheff. MScSoc U.N.S.W. MichaelD. Horsburgh, MSW U.N.S.W. BA DipSocWk contemporary debates, and to effects on social, (Head of Department) occupational and fiscal welfare. Senior Lecturers Janet E.G. George, BA N.E. MPhil H.K. PhD SOCIOLOGY Sociology is the study of human societies. The subject John Hart, MA Brad. DiplSocAdmin Lond. PhD matter of sociology includes human behaviour in Jude L. Irwin, BSW U.N.S.W. MA Macq. various social contexts, social interaction, social Mary Lane, BA MSW DipSocStud institutions, social organisation, social change and Alec Pemberton, BSocSt MA Qld development. A major focus of sociological research Robert M. van Krieken, BA PhD U.N.S.W. has been the emergence, characteristics and conse­ Lecturers quences of industrial societies. The sociology taught Sue Goodwin, BA A.N. U. at the University of Sydney emphasises both an Renee Koonin, MA(Social Work) Witw. historical and a comparative approach to the discipline Jan Larbalestier, BA PhD Macq. and its subject matter. Glenn Lee, BSocStud MSW U.N.S.W. The study of sociology is a rewarding and M; Lindsey Napier, MA Aberd. DipSocStud Edin. stimulating enterprise, both intellectually and in terms DipMH Lond. MSW of future career prospects in a variety of professional Zita I. Weber, BSocStud PhD fields. It is also an important addition to related Marie Wilkinson, BSocStud U.N.S.W. MSW disciplines such as government, economics, Associate Lecturers philosophy, education, psychology, anthropology and Christine Crowe, BA U.N.S.W. history,anditusefully complements studies in English, Annette Falahey, BA U.N.S. W. fine arts, languages, and science. Agi O'Hara, BA Students may proceed in their third year to Social Administrative Officer Policy and Administration 301. Janice Whittington, BA Registration Administrative Assistants Students must register for tutorials in the first week of Sylvia Devlin lectures, with the Department of Social Work and Nancy Reimer Social Policy. Mary Yew Quota SOCIAL POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION There will be a quota on enrolment in Sociology 101. Social policy is the study of a range of policies which Entry is restricted to new first year students in Arts, affect the social and economic welfare of individuals, Economics (Social Sciences) and Education who families and broader social groupings. The policies achieve a high TER (or equivalent). Overlap Sociology 290 8 units Students are not permitted to take a course which Prereq Sociology 101 at Credit level overlaps significantly with previously completed Coreq Sociology 201 and 202 courses, or with courses being taken concurrently. Classes Yr StudentsshouldconsulttheDepartmentin cases where This course consists of an additional two options there is a possibility of overlap. chosen from those listed below under 200 options. Availability of courses The descriptions of courses do not indicate their Core units availability. Some courses may be available in first or Sociological Theory second semester only, and may not be offered when Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk there are unexpected variations in staff availability or Assessment open book exam insufficient student demand. Students should consult the Department early in the year for the details of This course will examine the main strands of timetabling and availability of courses. sociological thought, identifying the key concepts, debates and issues in the development of sociological Honours theory while situating the production and inter­ Students intending to proceed to Sociology IV pretation of that theory in its social and political (Honours) must complete 56 Senior units of Sociology context. It will focus on the writing of leading social including Sociology 390 and 391, and obtain results theorists and sociologists, their contribution to the averaging Credit or above in all their Senior units of development of a distinctly sociological theory, and Sociology. their continuing impact on current theoretical debates in sociology. Sociology 101 12 units Topics covered will include: the origins of sociology; Classes Yr: (2 lec & one 2hr tut)/wk industrialismand the beginnings of a science of society; Assessment two 2hr exam, 4 written assignments evolutionary social theory; classic theorists: Marx, The course is designed to provide students with a Durkheim, Sirnmel, Weber; sociology of urban society, basic understanding of the concepts and vocabulary early feminist critiques of industrial society; used in sociology and to familiarise them with the interactionism and everyday life; functionalism and major theoretical orientations and areas of research in systems theory; critiques of functionalism; psycho­ sociology. It aims to enable students to develop a analysis and socialisation; sociology of knowledge critical and historically informed understanding of and culture; feminist challenges to sociological Australian and other industrial societies, as well as paradigms. providing a comprehension of diverse cultures and Textbooks social systems. Consult department noticeboard 1st semester: an introduction to the major concepts and areas of debate in sociology; the development of Social Enquiry: Research Methods in Sociology sociology as a separate discipline in response to Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk industrialisation and urbanisation; social interaction, Assessment 3000w essay social institutions, social organisation, culture and In this core unit we introduce students to some of the socialisation. methodological issues and debates in contemporary 2nd semester: an exploration of some major areas of sociology and their impact on the range and types of sociological investigation, such as inequality in research methods that sociologists commonly use. industrial societies; the social distribution of Emphasis is placed on developing a critical ability to knowledge; social change in modern society; the read sociological texts with an eye to their methodo­ impact of war, technology and globalisation. logical adequacy, as well as an appreciation of their Textbooks theoretical contribution. Examples will be drawn from Consult department a range of sociological research monographs, both classical and contemporary, to show the ways in Sociology 201 8 units which theory and method have been used to produce Prereq Sociology 101 sociological knowledge. The major types of research Classes Sem 1 technique employed by sociologists will be described along with problems of interpretation that arise from Sociology 202 8 units their use in particular studies. Coreq Sociology 201 CZasses Sem 2 Sociology 201 and 202 will provide students with an Level 200 options extended grounding in sociological theory and Classes one 2hr seminar/wk Assessment 3000w essay research methods, as well as a detailed understanding of their application in at least two areas of sociological Descriptions of the courses below are available in the investigation. Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Handbook. Each course consists of one core unit and one level Social inequality in Australia 200 option. Options may be available in either first or Sociology of the family second semester only. Students should consult the The body and social theory department early in the year for timetable details. Sociology of religion Youth identities, transitions and policies theorists. As well as studying the essential features of Sociology of ageing the differing theoretical developments in twentieth- Feminist theory and sociology century sociology, we shall also look at the ways in Sociology of work and welfare which seemingly different traditions of theorising Sociology of deviance about society oftenhave common origins, if not always Sociology of childhood and youth common concerns and outcomes. The course will Sociology of health and illness cover the following topics: functionalist theory in Sociology of social development post-war American sociology, its critics and Sociology of the professions alternatives such as symbolicinteractionism, exchange Social movements theory and ethnomethodology; systems theory; Sociology of mental illness Goffman—the sociology of everyday life, the presen­ tation of self and micro-sociology; structuralism—its Sociology 290 8 units origins and effects in French social theory, linguistics Classical sociological theory and anthropology; trends in Marxist social thought, Classes Sem 1: one 3hr seminar/wk including Louis Althusser and structuralist Marxism; Assessment 3500w essay, exam psychoanalysis and social theory; feministsocial theory since the 1960s and 70s, the critique of male reason; The course provides a critical and detailed study of Foucault and after—discourse theory and post- the work of Marx, Weber, Durkheim and Simmel. structuralism; Giddens and the action/structure Students will examine the various features of these debate. writers' work, the ways in which they constitute central paradigms in sociological reasoning and research, Textbook and the ways in which their ideas continue to exert an I. Craib Modern Social Theory (New York, 1992) influence on current debates in sociology. Sociology 391 8 units Sociology 301 8 units Empirical methods of sociological investigation Sem 1 Classes Sem 2: one 3hr seminar/wk Sociology 302 8 units Assessment workbook, 3500w essay/research design, exam Sem 2 This unit will enable students to develop (a) an Sociology 301 and 302 will further consolidate students' understanding of a variety of empirical techniques understanding of sociological theory and research used in sociological research; (b) a critical appreciation methods, providing for a close examination of the of the strengths and weaknesses of these various classical basis of sociology as well as recent debates methods; (c) an understanding of how to deploy and current areas of sociological investigation. empirical techniques in a variety of research designs; Sociology 301 and 302 each consist of one option and (d) the ability to evaluate the adequacy of the selected from those listed below under Level 300 research that employs such techniques. The sessions Options. Each option runs for one semester only, and dealing with specific techniques will use exercises availability may vary according to staffing and student and will be conducted on a workshop basis. Students demand—please consult the Department early in the will be expected to complete a weekly workbook that year for timetable details. will be handed in and assessed at the end of the course. The unit will also cover a number of substantive Level 300 options issues, including the relationship between theory and Classes one 3hr seminar/wk method, contemporary critiques of empirical research, Assessment 1500w tut paper, 3000w essay the quantitative/qualitative debate in sociological research, the uses of official data sets and problems in Descriptions of the courses below are available in the meta-analysis. Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Handbook. Sociology of urbanisation and modernity Science, technology and social change Sociology IV Honours Media in contemporary society Sociology IV students are required to undertake the Sociology of organisations three courses listed below and write a thesis of between Sociology of the environment 15 000 and 20 000 words, depending on the research Comparative sociology of welfare states method. Arrangements concerning dissertation topics Sociology of social problems and the welfare state and supervision will be made late in the preceding Self and society year. The thesis will beworth 60% of the final Sociology Sexuality and society IV mark, and the courses will be worth 40%. The Department will also consider the possibility of Sociology 390 8 units incorporating a research placement into the supervisory arrangements of those students and thesis Contemporary sociological theory topics which are considered suitable. Classes Sem 1: one 3hr seminar/wk Assessment tut paper, two 3000w essays Contemporary issues in sociological thought In this option we shall examine the central strands of Classes Sem 1: one 2hr seminar/wk sociological thought since the work of the classical Assessment tut paper, one 3500w essay This seminar will examine current debates in sociological thought and the ways in which they are stimulating and informing recent, and especially Australian, Social research. Topics covered will include the reconceptualisation of class, economy and society in the modern state; feminist critiques of and contributions to sociological analysis; the contributions made by sociologists to contemporary economic and social policy debates; the relationship between micro and macro sociology, the implications of neo-Parsonian and neo-Weberian sociological theories for contem­ porary social analysis; recent work on social action and social movements; theories of power and empowerment, current debates in historical sociology; and conceptualisations of 'post-modernity'.

Understanding and explanation in sociology Classes Sem 1: one 2hr seminar/wk Assessment two 1500w essays This course considers key features on understanding and explanation in sociology. It explicates activities of 'understanding' and 'explanation' from the point of view of the practising sociologist, in contrast to considering issues from the perspective of the philosophy of the social sciences. The course has two main components. The first considers dominantareasof sociologicalinvestigation, value relevance inherent in sociological research and processes involved in theory construction. The second component addresses issues, debates and con­ troversies within sociology by way of exemplars. Evolutionary theories, structural functionalism, theories of ideology, exchange theory, deconstruc- tionist and dramaturgical perspectives will be considered. These theoretical approaches will be explored in relation to contemporary research projects concerning class and social mobility, crime, technological changes and issues of agency.

Research Seminar Classes Sem 1 and 2: one 2hr seminar/wk Assessment one 2000w exercise, one 3500w essay, progress reports on dissertation The seminar will examine issues concerning methods and perspectives in sociological research emerging from students' dissertation projects, as well as research design and organisation. Students will also be required to present reports on the progress of their research throughout the year. NOTE: This chapter of the handbook contains Computer facilities information specific to the Faculty of Economics and The Faculty has a range of up-to-date computing some general information. For further details about facilities that virtually all students will use at some the University—its organisation, examinations, time during their studies. Students of Accounting, assistance for students with disabilities, child care Econometrics, Economics, Finance and Marketing will facilities, accommodation, health, counselling, most certainly be concerned with computer usage financial assistance, careers advice and a range of and, increasingly, students in disciplines such as other matters—see the University of Sydney Diary, Government and Industrial Relations will find that available free from the Student Centre and student computer applications are an important part of the Union outlets. curriculum. The computers are generally networked personal computers. Enrolment In the Institute Building on City Road, next to the Special enrolment instructions Merewether Building, there is the Upper Institute From 1995 compulsory pre-enrolment has been Computer Laboratory which contains over 100 introduced for local undergraduate students in second computers, all of the PC486 variety. There are six high or later years. Students should reply to the pre- speed printers. This laboratory is used largely by first enrolment request in October of each year for the and second year undergraduate students, but other following year. It is therefore very important for students will also often find that these modern facilities students to have a correct semester and long vacation are suitable for their needs. address on the University system. Changes of address The Faculty also has a smaller Advanced Users can be made through the Student Centre or the Faculty Laboratory, housed in Room N471 of the Institute of Economics Office. The enrolment procedure is Building. There are about 25 Pentium computers which explained in special leaflets available from the Student are at the leading edge of current personal computer Centre. A successful pre-enrolment means that you technology. They are used by third year, students, do not have to attend the University to enrol at the honours students and postgraduates. A dedicated beginning of the academic year. high-speed dot matrix printer and a laser printer are available. This area is also used for small group Discontinuation teaching. The table below sets out the dates by which variations Research postgraduate students are additionally of enrolment should be made. Faculty of Economics catered for through a set of 36 individual study carrels, students should make changes at the Faculty Office each of which is lockable and supplied with a modern where variation of enrolment forms are available. networked personal computer. Many departments Changes may also be made by submitting changes, within theFaculty including Econometrics, Economics, via the confirmation of enrolment form which you Finance and Marketing also have computer receive in the mail, to the Faculty of Economics Office. installations of their own, catering for the particular If you withdraw from a course, the course does not needs of their students. Finally, there is a small appear on your academic transcript and you are not computer laboratory in the Merewether Building charged the Higher Education Contribution. If you which is used by students for word processing their discontinue with permission or discontinue a course, work. Nearby the Faculty offers computer facilities it will appear on your transcript with the date when suitable for students with disabilities. you made the change. The Associate Dean (Under­ graduate Studies) may consider that a course may be discontinued with permission after the relevant date Lecture and seminar rooms if there is evidence of serious illness or misadventure. Information as to where the lectures will be held is on Withdrawal from a course or discontinuation with noticeboards in the foyer, Level Two (Courtyard level) permission are not considered for the purposes of of the Merewether Building. exclusion. As far as is practicable, lectures and tutorials provided by the Faculty of Economics are held in the First Second Full year Merewether Building or the Institute Building, but the semester semester course increasing division of classes and the introduction of course course semesters may result in more lectures and tutorials being held elsewhere in the University. In any case, Withdraw by 30 March 30'August 30 March during the annual examinations students will find Discontinue end of 7th end of 7th end of first themselves allotted seats in any part of the University. with permis­ week of week of week of It is useful, therefore, to discover the whereabouts of sion by Sem 1 Sem2 Sem2 lecture theatres and lecture rooms. The following will Discontinue last day of last day of last day of assist in direction and students are reminded that a by lectures lectures lectures map of the Main Campus of the University is at the Sem 1 Sem2 Sem2 end of this handbook.

/ Merewether Lecture Theatres 1 and 2 the symbol 'V (result to come). Any incomplete result These are fitted with tiered seats; the larger theatre is not finalised by the commencement of first semester thatnearer theButlin Avenue/City Road corner. Entry in the next academic year will be altered to 'Fail', on is from the downstairs corridor or from the assembly. the approval of the Associate Dean (Undergraduate area atthe Covered Way level. Students late for lectures Studies)in consultation with theHead of Department. will assist if they enter by doors at the Covered Way 5. The Head of Department is responsible for the level, that is, if they go to the back of the theatres. timetabling and conduct of further tests, which may Merewether Lecture Rooms 3,4 and 5 take such form as the Head of Department directs. Courtyard level, entry from the Colonnade. Students in a course must be given notice of the proposed date for conducting further tests no later Merewether Lecture Room 6 than the date of publication of the final University Butlin Avenue level, entry from downstairs corridor. examinations timetable. Merewether Seminar Rooms 1,2,3,4,5 and 6 6. Individual students granted a further test ButlinAvenue level, entry from downstairs corridor. should, wherever possible, be given at least three days' prior notice. A candidate who is absent from a Merewether Seminar Rooms 7,9 and 11 further test without sufficient reason may be deemed ButlinAvenue level, entry from downstairs corridor, to have failed the test. past entrance to Lecture Theatre 2. 7. Inrespectto the notification of students referred Institute Lecture Theatre 1 to in sections 5 and 6, students will be deemed to have In Institute Building at the front on City Road next to been notified as a result of the posting of information Merewether Building. by the due date on the Faculty of Economics noticeboards. Institute Lecture Rooms 2 and 3 and Institute Rooms 331 8. It is the responsibility of the student to provide and 386 evidence of illness or misadventure to the appropriate In Institute Building on City Road next to Merewether Head of Department as soon as possible and practicable Building. after the date of the final examination in a course. Bosch Theatres Where such evidence is not presented in time for the On Western Avenue; these form part of the lecture student to be offered a further test on the advertised facilities of the Faculty of Medicine and adjoin the date, it will only be considered by the Head of Royal Prince Alfred Hospital area. Department where there is sufficient reason why it has not been presented by that date. Carslaw Theatres and Seminar Rooms On Eastern Avenue in the main University area; the 9. The highest grade of award at a further test is theatres form a wing extending north from the main Pass, except where the further test is granted on the structure and are reached by stairs from the main grounds of illness or misadventure. court. 10. These regulations apply to the BEc, the BEc(SocSc) and the BCom. PNRTheatres The name given the Peter Nicol Russell Theatres of the Aegrotat results Engineering Faculty. The Engineering 'precinct' is The Head of a Department may recommend to the along Darlington Road; a point of identification is, for Board of Examiners that a candidate be awarded the example, the bright blue hydraulics tower of Civil result of Pass (aegrotat) in a course or Honours Engineering. (aegrotat) in a Final Honours year in cases where: (a) because of serious illness or misadventure the Stephen Roberts Lecture Theatre candidate has been unable to sit for the annual On Eastern Avenue; a separate building with irregular examination; and copper roof near Carslaw Building, and close to the (b) it is unlikely, for the same reasons, that the boundary of the public park. candidate would be able to attempt a further test; and Examinations and further tests (c) the Head of Department is satisfied beyond Extract from the resolutions of the Faculty doubt on the basis of the work performed 1. No supplementary examinations are awarded throughout the year, that had the candidate to candidates for the BEc, BEc(SocSc) and BCom. been able to sit for the examination the candidate 2. Further tests may be awarded where the candi­ would have achieved at least the result recommended. date has been prevented by sufficient and duly certified illness or misadventure from completing a course. The only aegrotat result available on first, second 3. Further tests may also be awarded in a course and third year courses, whether pass or honours, is where the examiner requires further evidence to reach pass (aegrotat). a final assessment of a candidate who has failed a Slip-back passes course and whose performance is borderline. Where A student enrolled in the courses Economics III or possible and practicable, all further tests will be Economics III Additional maybe granted a 'slip-back' administered before theBoard of Examiners'Meeting. pass if he or she fails one option in the course and 4. All incomplete results at the time of submission passes the other. The result will be recorded as a pass of marks to the Board of Examiners are recorded by in the short course Economics III Supplementary. Restriction upon re-enroiment in another Faculty, College or another There are certain circumstances in which you could be Board of Studies, may apply for such asked to show good cause why you should be enrolment after at least two academic permitted to repeat any previously attempted study. years and that other Faculty, College LiabiHtyforexclusionh-onire-enrolrnentisdetermined Board or Board of Studies may permit by academic attainment during the immediate past . himorhertoenrolinthecourseorcourses one or two academic years. The resolutions of the from which he or she was previously Senate restricting re-enrolment may be found in the excluded. University's Statutes and Regulations, indexed under 4. Except with the express approval of the Faculty, 'Re-enrolment'. You should acquaint yourself with College Board or Board of Studies concerned a student the studies in which you are enrolled. If you are in any excluded from a year or course who is readmitted doubt about your liability for exclusion following shall not be given credit for any work completed in academic failure or discontinuation of courses, you another Faculty, College or Board of Studies or another should ask advice of the Exclusions Officer in the university during the period of exclusion. Records Services section. 5. Before exercising its powers under section 2 or It is not possible to define in advance all the reasons 3 in relation to an individual course, a Faculty, College that constitute 'good cause' but serious ill health, or Board or Board of Studies shall consult the Head of the misadventure properly attested, will be considered. Department or School responsible for the course. In addition your general record, for example in other 6. The Senate authorises the Faculty, College Board courses, would be taken into account. In particular, if or Board of Studies as a whole or a Faculty or College you were transferring from another faculty your record Committee or Board of Studies Committee represen­ in your previous faculty would be considered. Not ting the main teaching departments in each Faculty, usually acceptable as good cause are such matters as College or Board of Studies, to carry out all duties demands of employers, pressure of employment, time arising out of sections 1,2,3,4 and 5. devoted to non-university activities and so on, except as they may be relevant to any serious ill health or 7. [Section 7 relates to appeals to the Senate. The misadventure. full text appears in the University of Sydney Statutes and Regulations 1996, p. 133.] The resolutions of the Senate concerning 'Restriction upon Re-enrolment of certain students who fail in Annual Examinations' are as follows: A. Students in all Faculties, Colleges and 1. The Senate authorises any Faculty, College Boards of Studies Board or Board of Studies to require a student who 8. The Senate authorises any Faculty, College comes within the provisions of sections 8 to 24 below Board or Board of Studies to require a student to show to show good cause why he or she should be allowed good cause why he or she should be allowed to repeat to re-enrol or to repeat a year of candidature or a in that Faculty, College or Board of Studies (a) a year course in that Faculty, College or Board of Studies. of candidature in which he or she has failed or 2. Subject to section 5, the Faculty, College Board discontinued more than once, or (b) any course in or Board of Studies may exclude a student who fails to which he or she has failed or discontinued more than show good cause from— once, whether that course was failed or discontinued (a) the degree course or year of candidature when he or she was enrolled for a degree supervised concerned, and/or by that Faculty, College Board or Board of Studies, or (b) the course or courses concerned both in by another Faculty, College Board or Board of Studies. that Faculty, College or Board of Studies 9. The Senate authorises the several Faculties, and in any other Faculty, College or Board Colleges or Boards of Studies to require a student of Studies in which that course or those who, because of failure or discontinuation has been courses may be taken. excluded from a Faculty, College or course, either in 3. Subject to section 5— the University of Sydney or in another tertiary (a) Any student who has been excluded from institution, but who has subsequently been admitted a year of candidature or from a course or or readmitted to the University of Sydney, to show courses by a Faculty, College Board or good cause why he or she should be allowed to repeat Board of Studies in accordance with either (a) the first year of attendance in which after section 2 and who wishes to re-enrol in such admission or readmission he or she fails or that year of candidature or that course or discontinues, or (b) any course in which in the first those courses, may apply for such re- year after admission or readmission he or she fails or enrolment after at least two academic discontinues. years and that Faculty, College Board or Board of Studies may permit him or her to re-enrol in the year or the course or F. Faculty of Economics courses from which he or she was 14. (1) The Senate authorises the Faculty of previously excluded. Economics to requite a student to show cause (b) Any student who has been excluded from why the student should be allowed to re-enrol a course or courses by one Faculty, for the degree of Bachelor of Economics, College Board or Board of Studies in Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) or accordance with section 2 and who Bachelor of Commerce, if (i) the student fails to wishes to enrol in that course or courses gain credit for at least half of his or her enrolment in any year, or (ii) in any two successive years from the Scholarships Office with whom applications of enrolment, the student fails to gain credit for generally close in the third week of second semester. the equivalent of at least six semester courses. 4. Bursaries: Bursaries are awarded on the combined (2) In cases where the Faculty permits the grounds of financial need and academic merit and re-enrolment of a student whose progress has . application may be made at any time to the Financial been deemed unsatisfactory, the Faculty may Assistance Office (open Monday to Thursday from place restrictions on the number and type of 9.30 am to 2.30 pmonlevel7of theEducationBuilding, courses in which the student may re-enrol in Manning Road tel. 93512416). that year and may require the completion of specified courses in a specified time, and if the 5. Grants-in-aid: These are offered by application student does not comply with these conditions (closing date: 31 May each year) to postgraduate the student may again be called upon to show students seeking assistance with travel or maintenance. good cause why he or she should be allowed to 6. Postgraduate research scholarships tenable at the re-enrol in the Faculty of Economics. University of Sydney: Prospective postgraduate students should consult the Scholarships Office in August/ Prizes and scholarships September each year about Australian Postgraduate This handbook contains simplified details of some of Awards with stipend (closing date: mid October). the prizes and scholarships offered by the University. Postgraduate travelling scholarships For full details you are advised to contact the Each year the University offers five or six travelling Scholarships Office. scholarships with a closing date in November. The scholarships and prizes may be scheduled as Generally, applicants need to have a first-class honours follows: degree approaching medal standard to be successful. 1. Prizes awarded automatically on results: Successful Applications for the major travelling scholarships students are notified of these by the Records Services offered by external bodies generally close in August section. or September. All postgraduate scholarships are advertised in the 2. Prizes awarded on application: Closing dates for these Bulletin Board which is available in departments or may be obtained from the Scholarships Office. from the Scholarships Office in the Main Quadrangle 3. Prize compositions: Details of these may be obtained area.

Value Title $ Qualifications Undergraduate Accountancy Placements Prize 250 Proficiency in Financial Statement Analysis Frank Albert (3) 50 Proficiency in first, second and third years Frank Albert (2) 40 Proficiency in Anthropology I and II Applied Statistics Prize 100 Proficiency in third year Econometrics Australian Human Resources Institute Prize 250 Proficiency in Human Resource in Industrial Relations Management Australian Institute of Political Science 50 Proficiency in first year Government Prize in First Year Government Australian Society of Certified Practising 500 each Proficiency in Accounting IB, Financial Accountants (N.S.W. Division) (3) Accounting A and Management Accounting B Australian Transport Officers' 100 Proficiency in second year Industrial Federation Prize in Industrial Relations Relations Sir Alexander Beattie Prize in 100 Proficiency in elective 'The Historical Industrial Relations Development of Industrial Relations' Mary Beddie Scholarships (2) 75 and Best women candidates in second and third 150 year Economic History—must proceed to next year in Economic History Frank Bell Memorial 50 Most outstanding Anthropology student of the year BHP Prize in Industrial Relations 750 Proficiency in final honours year in Industrial Relations Sir Hermann Black Prize 150 Proficiency in first, second and third year Economic History Michael Casper Blad Memorial Prize 175 Proficiency in Economic Theory in Economics III Honours Emeritus Professor F.A. Bland 30 Best student in third year Government Dr Mary Booth Scholarship 1250 Most proficient woman student in first and second year Economics Value Title $ Qualifications R.L. Bowra Prize 500 Proficiency in third year Commercial Law over 2 semesters G.S. Caird Scholarship 650 Proficiency in second year Economics G.S. Caird Scholarship 650 Proficiency in third year Government proceeding to fourth year Chamber of Commerce 200 Best student at graduation.who specialised in commercial subjects Commonwealth Bank Officers' 50 Most outstanding student in first year Association Prize in Industrial Relations Industrial Relations Commonwealth Bank Scholarships (6) 225 Students proceeding to fourth year Coopers and Lybrand Prize in Accounting 400 Most distinguished in three-year Accounting sequence Donald George Crew Memorial 20 Proficiency in Economics III Donald George Crew Memorial Prize 35 Most proficient student in third year who is for Officers of Commonwealth an officer of the Commonwealth Bank or Banking Corporation and of Reserve the Reserve Bank of Australia Bank of Australia Crooks Michell Peacock Stewart Pry Ltd 250 Most proficient student in third year Operations Research in the Department of Econometrics C.S. First Boston Australia Limited 2000 Excellence in Finance entering fourth year Scholarship Geoffrey Dale 30 Proficiency in third year Economic Research Society 50 Proficiency in first year Economics Economic Society of Australia Prize 200 Most outstanding student in Economics final honours year in Economics Economics Graduates' Association (2) 20 Awarded at graduation for proficiency throughout the course Bert Evans Fellowship in Industrial 2000 Donated by the Metal Association of Relations Australia to a student proceeding to final honours year who has demonstrated potential to become a successful modern industrial relations practitioner Evening Students' Association 15 Proficiency in Economics III by part-time student Federated Ironworkers' Association 200 Proficiency in Industrial Relations 50 Best candidate in Economics H(P) ICCH Prize 1000 Proficiency in Investments Industrial Relations Society of N.S.W. Prize 200 Proficiency in third year Industrial Relations Ivo Whiston Kerr Memorial 40 Best essays in first year Accounting A.M. Magoffin Memorial 100 Best student in third year Commercial Law who has completed or proceeds to third year Accounting 50 Best student in Economics TV{F) Arthur Oakes Memorial 500 Best student in History of Economic Thought Tish Proctor Memorial Prize 100 Best woman student in first year Government Public Service Association of N.S.W. 250 , Proficiency in second year Government Pass, —John S. D'Arcy Memorial (4) second year Government Honours, third year Government Pass and third year Government Honours QANTAS Honours Scholarship in 5000 Awarded to a student proceeding to final year Industrial Relations honours who has achieved excellence in their r undergraduate studies G.C. Remington 250 Most outstanding student in Government in any year 50 Best candidate in third year Economics option 'Post-' Randolph G. Rouse 40 Awarded at graduation to most proficient fourth year student in Economics R.S.G. Rutherford (2) 50 Proficiency in second and third year Econometrics Value Title $ Qualifications Seamen's Union of Australia Eliot V. 125 Proficiency in elective 'The Sociology of Elliott Prize in Industrial Relations Industry and Labour' Shell Prize 200 Awarded at graduation to most proficient student in Government Statistical Society of Australia 200 + Awarded at graduation to final year (N.S.W. Branch) membership Econometrics student for proficiency (1 year) throughout course Paul Sweezy 50 Best student in Economics III(P) Universities Credit Union Prize (3) 100 Proficiency in first year Accounting and Commercial Law; Economics III Honours; and final honours year course Finance in Economics. Universities Credit Union Prize (2) 200 Proficiency in Financial Markets and Intermediaries; and Monetary Economics. E.L. Wheelwright Prize 50 Proficiency in Economics I (Social Sciences) R.J. Chambers PhD Scholarship in 20 000 PhD candidate in Accounting Accounting Walter Noel Gillies Prize 1000 Most meritorious MEc thesis

Societies dealing room tours and career talks through the year. Sydney University Economics Society Events are detailed in the Society's Newsletter, DOLIAR$ and Sense. All undergraduate students enrolled in the Faculty of Activities are always well attended and partici­ Economics are members of ECOSOC. pation in running the Society is encouraged from all The Society is responsible for making students' years. A committee of students is elected yearly to lives outside of lectures and tutorials more fun and coordinate the activities of the Society. exciting through a host of different events. The Society creates the annual ball, holds a welcoming bar party, Sydney University Economics Graduates' produces a newsletter {Merewether 90210), organises Association jerseys and debating, has heaps of barbecues and This association seeks to maintain contact between industry representatives to speak, holds a careers graduates and the Faculty on the one hand, and evening, a champagne breakfast with a famous guest between graduates themselves on the other. It does and provides teams for the interfaculty sport this by means of social functions during the year and competitions. The Society also produces the Economics by the promotion of talks to graduates by notable Revue—a musical, theatrical and humorous people in the field of economics and allied subjects extravaganza, held at the Footbridge Theatre to show­ and other activities. The President of the Sydney case the extracurricular talents of all the Society's University Economics Society is an ex officio member members. of the USEGA council. Graduates wishing to join The Society is also responsible for promoting staff should getin touch with Mr Tom Togher, the Convenor and student communication and putting forward the of the Membership Committee, USEGA, Common­ wealth Banking Corporation, GPO Box 2719, Sydney student point of view through faculty meetings and 2001. departmental committees. Formoreinformationabout getting involved or faculty events, students should Economic Society of Australia (N.S.W. Branch) have a look at the noticeboards in Ecoeats, the Student Students are eligible for membership of the Economic Common Room and coffee shop, or drop in to the Society of Australia at a concessional rate through the office, Room 250 of the Merewether Building. New South Wales Branch. The branch's financial year commences on 1 April and a special student member­ Sydney University Accounting Society ship rate is offered. The Sydney University Accounting Society caters for Membership forms and information about the the specific academic, vocational and social needs of Society are available from the Honorary Secretary, accounting students. Every student who takes any Economic Society of Australia (N.S.W. Branch), PO accounting subjects is automatically a member at no Box 211, Mosman 2088. cost. Members receive the Society's journal The Economic The Society holds numerous activities such as an Record, which is published four times a year, Economic annual employer-student cocktail party where Papers (three or four times a year), monthly mono­ students are able to meet potential employers in a graphs on current topics, and advice of recently relaxed atmosphere; the Grand Ball, a highlight on the published books. They may also subscribe at University's social calendar; and a harbour cruise and concessional rates to The Australian Quarterly, The regular BBQs. The Society also runs functions such as Australian Economic Review, and Economic Analysis and interview techniques workshops, foreign exchange Policy. Initial enquiries about student membership of the to the Honorary Secretary, Ms Anja Morton, Society may be directed to members of staff of the Department of Accounting. There is a special Department of Economics or the Administrative subscription rate for students which includes a Officer, Mr Peter Clarke. subscription to Abacus.

Royal Institute of Public Administration Australian Agricultural Economics Society Australia (N.S.W. Division) The Secretary of the N.S.W. Branch is Ms Carolynne Students may join for a special subscription. The James, Economic Services Unit, N.S.W. Agriculture, Institute holds monthly meetings and periodic Locked Bag 21, Orange N.S.W. 2800. Meetings are conferences. Its members include public servants, held regularly throughout the year. A special student university teachers and others interested in public subscription includes subscription to the Society's administration.Itpublishesajournal,AMsfrflZffln/owr«flZ publications, The Australian Journal of Agricultural of Public Administration, four times a year. The address Economics and The Review of Marketing and Agricultural is Box 904, GPO, Sydney 2001. Economics.

Statistical Society of Australia (N.S.W. Branch) AIESEC (The International Association of The N.S.W. Branch offers student membership to all Economics and Management Students) students who are interested in joining and who include AIESEC is the largest non-profit, non-religious, non- statistics in their degree. political student organisation in the world. Its The Society publishes The Australian Journal of objectives include promoting understanding and Statistics three times a year, and members (including cooperation between the 67 member countries and student members) receive the journal. Applications providing practical business experience for its and requests for further information should be members. The objectives are achieved through an forwarded to the Honorary Secretary, Dr Neville exchange program and a wide range of related Weber, School of Mathematics and Statistics, The activities. The exchange program gives students the University of Sydney, N.S.W. 2006. opportunity to supplement their academic training by working overseas short term (between 2 and 18 Industrial Relations Society of N.S.W. months). Full-time students may join for a special student AIESEC offers traineeships in the areas of accoun­ subscription. The Society brings together represen­ ting, computing, economics, industrial relations, tatives of top management, the trade unions, the statistics, etc. Other activities of interest to students government services, the professions and specialists include business games, seminars, conferences, in the various academic disciplines concerned with international congresses, as well as a receptions industrial relations. Meetings and weekend conven­ program (weekends away, sailing, skiing trips, theatre tions are held and study groups arranged. The Society parries and international lunches). publishes a periodical, The Journal of Industrial Relations. Generally AIESEC is an opportunity to have a lot of Enquiries should be addressed to the Honorary fun at University while gaining invaluable practical Secretary, GPO Box 4479, Sydney 2001. experience, and with the prospects of working overseas before or after graduation. Australian Human Resources Institute The Institute is a professional association for practitioners, consultants and academics working in Libraries human resources and related fields. Special Note: See also the University of Sydney Library entry membership rates are available for students. Monthly in the University of Sydney Diary. meetings with guest speakers are held in Sydney and the Western Suburbs, and special interest groups Wolstenholme Library meet on a regular basis. Members receive the quarterly The Wolstenholme Library is named after S.H. Asia Pacific Journal of Human Resources, HR Monthly, Wolstenholme, a former member of the Faculty. It is and a monthly newsletter. Enquiries should be directed on Level 1 of Merewether Building and the entrance is to PO Box 508, Neutral Bay, N.S.W. 2089, tel. (02) near the Butlin Avenue/Darlington Road corner. It 9908 3155. supports the Fisher Library'sundergraduate collection for courses in the Faculty of Economics and holds the Sydney University Pacioli Society research collections in accounting and industrial The object of the Society is to foster the discussion of relations. accounting and financial problems among members During the semester the library is open: of universities and the business and professional Mondays 9 am to 5 pm community. Meetings are held three to four times a Tuesdays 9 am to 7 pm year. Topics of discussion are generally based on Wednesdays 9 am to 7 pm issues that are of current interest to practising Thursdays 9 am to 7 pm accountants. A well received meeting on international Fridays 9 am to 5 pm. harmonisation of accounting standards was held by Times of opening during vacation are notified on the Society in 1995. The speakers were Sir David boards at the library entrance. Tweedy, Mr Michael Sharpe, Mr Ken Spencer and Mr Information about the arrangement of materials in Warren MacGregor. All enquiries should be addressed the library, borrowing procedures, the closed reserve system for books in heavy demand, and rules Who Audits Australia? Editor: A.T. Craswell. governing its use, is available from the Wolstenholme Journal of Political Economy. Editors: Frank Stilwell, Librarian, Mrs Gloria Muir, or her staff. Students are Gavan Butler, Dick Bryan, Evan Jones, Peter Kell and encouraged to become familiar with the procedures of Stuart Rosewarne. the library, and in particular to make full use of the catalogue, which is the key to its resources. A correct bibliographical reference makes things easier for both Research units students and staff. Accounting Research Centre Since it was first established the Wolstenholme The Accounting Research Centre is an adjunct of the Library has received support from various sources: Accounting Foundation of the University. The objects the Commonwealth Bank of Australia, the Bank of of the Centre are to enhance the reputation of the New South Wales, the Walter and Eliza Hall Trust, the University of Sydney as a centre for excellence in Economic Society of Australia (N.S.W. Branch), the teaching and research in accounting and to provide Australian Societyof Certified Practising Accountants, support for membersof the Departmentof Accounting. the Chamber of Commerce, the Public Accountants' The Centre provides financial and other support Registration Board, and from the Sydney University for members of staff, visiting academics and students. Economics Graduates' Association. Of special Comprehensive files are kept of the annual reports of assistance have been the regular annual donations by, Australian and overseas companies, and of and gifts of books from, individual graduates. professional pronouncements and other material from EMAR (the Economics Macintosh Access Room) is all major English-speaking countries. Papers and a student-managed facility located in the monographs on accounting and finance topics are Wolstenholme Library, and is available for word published and marketed world-wide. processing on a once-a-year subscriptionbasis. Details Regular research seminars are conducted at which are posted on the noticeboard in the room. membersof the Departmentof Accounting and visiting The Dean welcomes suggestions about ways to academics present research papers. The Centre assist the Wolstenholme Library and, where sponsors the R.J. Chambers Research Lecture and appropriate, gifts are acknowledged by the use of edits the twice-yearly journal Abacus. bookplates. The Centre offers consulting services on a limited and confidential basis and.has among its objectives Map Library the achievement of a closer rapport with other sections The Map Library within the Department of Geography of the professional community that have research in the Institute Building is open to all faculties and interests. departments in the University. The Centre is administered by a Director, Professor The collection offers world coverage with 45 A.T. Craswell. topographic series produced by agencies within the various countries, together with geological, regional, Research Institute for Asia and the Pacific thematic and specialist maps. There are also a number Established as a foundation of the University in 1987, of maps of historic interest. Atlases are held in the RIAP aims to provide business and policy related Geography Library close by. research, teaching and advice which will assist Among the local holdings of the library are the Australians to define their role and operate effectively Australian topographic series of 1:1 000 000,1:250 000, in the region. RIAP draws extensively on the and such sheets published of the inch-to-1-mile series, intellectual resources of the University and the practical as well as maps produced by the Department of experience of the business community, the professions Mines, State forests, conservation and planning and the arts. It is developing links with other establishments, census departments, and most other universities and institutions in the region. map-producing agencies throughout Australia. RIAP focuses on three key strategic issues in the The Map Library, which contains 80 000 maps, is region: human resource development; globalism and open from 8.30 am to 4.30 pm on weekdays. Its localism (the 'global paradox'); and individual rights comprehensive collection of wall maps is available for and social responsibilities. RIAP offers five core lecture use throughout the University. In other respects programs to respond to these issues: the library is for reference only, map identity being • the Asia Pacific Business Training Program obtained from a visual index or catalogue. The map providing a one-stop-shop service for Australian custodian is the cartographer of the Department of organisations in Asian markets; Geography. • research programs on human resource development. RIAP has been appointed National Publications Lead Institution for the APEC Human Resource Abacus, a journal of accounting and business studies. Development Business Management Network. Editor: G.W. Dean. Research is also being undertaken in related areas such as changing social structures, bureaucracies, Australian Accounting Review, published by the changing roles of government, evolving concepts Australian Society of CP As. Managing Editor: L of the family, the individual within society and English. labour mobility; Labour History, journal of the Australian Society for • publications with a clear and practical focus; theStudy of Labour History. Editor: Terry Irving. • briefings, lectures and round table discussions on such issues as business ethics and values, strategic database on enterprise agreements, the Agreements relationships in the region and the impact of new Database and Monitor (ADAM). In addition to a technologies; quarterly report to subscribers, a fee for service facility • joint projects with partners in Australia and the is available for specific information requests on region on issues such as the challenge of global provisions in agreements. media to local identity. The Director of the Centre is Associate Professor The Director of RIAP is Mr John Menadue, AO. RonCallus. For further information, tel. (02) 9351 5626 For further information tel. (02) 9290 3233 or fax and fax (02) 9351 5615. (02) 9262 4796, GPO Box 7068, Sydney 2000. Centre for Microeconomic Policy Analysis Australian Centre for Industrial Relations Established in 1990, the role of the Centre is to promote Research and Training (ACIRRT) interest and develop expertise in the application of ACIRRT was established in 1989 as an Australian microeconomic analysis to policy issues, especially Research Council National Key Centre for research those issues currently identified by the term 'micro­ and teaching. The role of ACIRRT is to promote and economic reform'. The Centre undertakes research assist the development of excellence in industrial and teaching, and is involved in external activities relations education and research in Australia. The such as participation in public discussion of policy focus of the Centre's research and teaching is the issues and consulting work. study of industrial relations processes and outcomes TheCentreisbuildingacollectionofannualreports at the workplace. Integral to this is an examination of and other documents of public sector authorities and the wider institutional, economic and social structures corporations, especially for N.S.W, and Australian as they impact on the workplace. government instrumentalities. The first Director is ACIRRT fulfils this role through internally Professor Gordon Mills (on secondment from the generated research, seminars and conference programs Department of Economics). His personal interests as well as commissioned research. The Centre's include enterprise pricing and investment policies, services are used by public and private sector organisa­ and he has particular experience of transport policy. tions, employer associations and unions. TheCentre seeks to assiststudentswithspecialinterests ACIRRT's principal research objective is to provide in its field. For further information, tel. (02) 93513744. a comprehensive analysis of the long-term restruc­ turing of Australia's industrial and labour relations. Public Affairs Research Centre (PARC) The Centre has also been commissioned to research The Public Affairs Research Centre is part of the projects on the process of labour adjustment at the Department of Government and Public firm level, the incidence and operation of incentive Administration. The Centre is an applied research payment systems, industrial relations in small facility offering its expertise to public and private business, workplace bargaining in Australia, organisations in the conduct of impartial survey evaluating the Training Guarantee, prospects for research projects, consultancies and evaluations. It enterprise bargaining in workplaces with a significant produces studies of a high standard and offers a non-English speaking workforce, enterprise unique service to the community. The Centre draws bargaining and occupational health and safety issues, on a wide range of academic and technical expertise, and an evaluation of the Pilot Australian Vocational in both quantitative and qualitative research and in Certificates for DEET. specific subject knowledge. It provides assistance to The Centre is also involved in a range of international undergraduate and postgraduate students and staff research activities. For example, it was commissioned in various aspects of their research. Enquiries should by the International Labour Organisation (ILO) to be made to tel. (02) 93512054. prepare a report on the impact of labour relations on Projects have been undertaken by the Centre for, productivity in the Australian coal-mining industry. among others, the University of Sydney Centre for The Centre is also the Australian Coordinator for the Teaching and Learning (on behalf of the Faculty of ILO's AsianParific network of labour studies institutes. Medicine); the Department of Geography (on behalf The Centre's education program is designed to of the Blacktown Migrant Resource Centre); ABC-TV; complement and extend existing programs by theN.S.W.Departmentof Education; Arthur Andersen exploring new options in education and training. A Consulting; the Trades Practices Commission and major education initiative is the establishment of various State Government departments and courses in Trade Union Administration funded by the authorities and universities for the 1990 ODEOPE N.S.W. Education and Training Foundation. This is EEO Survey. modular-based and will soon become available by distance education. The Centre for the Study of the History of The Centre undertakes a range of activities for Economic Thought graduates and practitioners working in industrial The Centre was established in 1989 to promote study relations. These include briefings on current and research in the history of economics both within developments and short courses in new skills. The the University and outside its framework, and to objective is to pass on information and skills held by arrange lectures by distinguished visiting scholars in University staff to a wider audience who can then the field, hold seminars and organise workshops in draw on these ideas in their own work. ACIRRT has relevant fields, participate and arrange conferences also developed Australia's most comprehensive on the history of economic thought and more widely the history of political and social thought, publish capital markets research to complement existing reprints of economic classics including Australian regional centres in Europe (London) and the United economic classics and other work on the history of States (Chicago and New York). economic thought, encourage postgraduate studies, SIRCA provides PhD scholarships and supplements and provideresearchfacilities and accumulate research to SIRCAresearchfellows undertaking higher degrees. material on the history of economic thought. It has also acquired and maintained a number of large The Director of the Centre is Professor Peter elective databases on a number of Australian security Groenewegen of the Department of Economics, tel. markets and is continually adding to these databases (02)93513074. which are the basis for the security market research that SIRCA undertakes. SIRCA also supports security The Asia-Pacific Capital Markets Foundation market research undertaken by members of the (ACMF) Department of Finance. The Executive Director of On 15 April 1994 researchers from four Australian SIRCA is Professor Michael Aitken of the Department universities (Sydney, Western Australia, Melbourne of Finance (tel. (02) 9660 8799). and Queensland) formally established the Asia-Pacific Capital Markets Foundation (ACMF) under the Professional organisations administrative guidance of the University of Sydney. The central purpose of the Foundation is to coordinate Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia: the resources of universities, industry and government grants exemption from all but its professional year to enhance the international competitiveness of examinations to graduates who have completed the industry. Toward this goal the ACMF has established appropriate accounting and commercial law subjects. separate research and training arms. The research arm Applicants to the Institute for exemption and for is known as the Securities Industry Research Centre of examination must, at the time of application and Asia-Pacific (SIRCA), and the training arm, the examination, be in the service of a chartered Securities Industry Training Centre of Asia-Pacific accountant in public practice or in an accredited PY (SITCA). in commerce organisation. SIRCA contributes to the central purpose by building the infrastructure (data, personnel and Chartered Accountants Students' Society computing power) necessary to sustain capital market All accounting students can be associated with the research, the objective of which is to increase the above Institute (ICAA) by becoming members of the liquidity and efficiency of Asia-Pacific capital markets. Chartered Accountants Students' Society (CASS). More liquid and efficient capital markets provide Members of CASS receive a number of services larger and cheaper sources of finance for industry, in including one volume of the Accounting and Auditing turn facilitatingproductinnovationand development. Handbook, subscription to the Institute's journal Charter, SIRCA provides PhD scholarships and supplements access to the Institute's libraries and discounts on to SIRCA research fellows undertaking higher research bookshop purchases, invitations to attend professional degrees. It also supports research in the Department development courses and young member social and of Finance and at universities around the country by sporting functions, and a regular CASS newsletter. providing access to its databases, its software and its For further information and anapplication form for hardware. CASS, please contact the Institute of Chartered SITCA contributes to the central purpose by making Accountants in Australia, 37 York Street, Sydney (tel. the research findings of SIRCA widely known and 9290 1344). understood. The faster and the broader research findings are disseminated, the quicker will be actions Australian Society of Certified Practising to eliminate impediments (e.g. technological and Accbuntants: admits graduates to provisional regulatory) to liquid and efficient capital markets. membership. Those who have completed the The director of all three organisations is Professor appropriate accounting and commercial law subjects Michael Aitken, tel. (02) 9351 6452. may undertake the program leading to associate membership and Certified Practising Accountant Securities Industry Research Centre of Asia (CPA) status. Pacific (SIRCA) SIRCA involves a strategic alliance between research Institute of Corporate Managers, Secretaries personnel (academics, graduates and others) from and Administrators five Australian universities, the Australian Stock The Institute of Corporate Managers, Secretaries and Exchange, the Sydney Futures Exchange and the Administrators is the professional association for Australian Financial Markets Association. The 10 000 company secretaries and corporate managers objective of the Centre is to develop and market the around Australia. combined intellectual capital of universities, industry The Institute accredits units both at undergraduate and government on any issue associated with the and postgraduate level by which you can satisfy its development of financial markets. The proposed academic requirements for membership. For further outcome is the enhancement of both the regional and information, please contact Chris McRostie, the international competitiveness of these marketplaces Institute's New South WalesBranch Manager, on (02) and the businesses which make use of them, by 9223 5666. He can also advise you about how to become promoting the world'sbest financial practice. Through a student member during your studies and a this process, SIRCA is developing a regional centre for provisional associate following graduation. Bankers Institute of Australasia: grants exemptions from six of its examination subjects to graduates who have passed courses currently offered in Economics I, Commercial Law and the Accounting sequence.

Taxation Institute of Australia: will admit as members graduates who have passed the Accounting and Commercial Law sequences including Taxation Law.

Securities Institute of Australia: admits graduates as affiliates.

The information above is summarised from details supplied by the examining bodies mentioned. It should not be relied upon as a complete statement. In particular, certain of the exemptions mentioned operate only from specified dates. In all cases enquiries and applications for exemption should be directed to the examining bodies concerned, not to the Faculty of Economics. Students seeking a signed record of courses passed at the University of Sydney for presentation to any of these organisations should consult the Student Centre in the Madsen Building. Symbols may have been used in the courses of study Frequency chapter in the handbook as a succinct way of presenting /wk per week teaching and assessment information. Because of the /fn per fortnight varied nature of the work described and occasional /sem per semester difficulties in interpretation and typesetting, such /yr :.. per year details are not construed as a firm undertaking. Students are advised to check details with the Examples departments concerned. The significance of symbols Classes used is as follows: Sem 1:1 class/wk one class work session each Hypothetical examples of symbols used week during Semester 1 Yr: (2 lec & 3 tut/ two lectures and three Title of course Double Dutch 1 prac)/wk tutorials or practicals weekly, Actual lecturers Assoc. Prof. Holland throughout the year Dr Nederlands Sem 2: 3 lec/wk & three lectures per week and Allied studies AKn HSC German 1 tut/fn one tutorial per fortnight, Class contact & ^ . j ^/^ a sgs Yr (3 lec & during Semester 2 course duration Exams, essays, etc. Assessment one 3hr exam, two Assessment 2000w essays/sem, 4 tut papers/sem one 3hr exam one 3-hour exam two 3hr exams/sem two 3-hour exams per semester Title of course 8766 Star Wars 5 one 2000w essay one 2000-word essay Actual lecturers Dr Lazer Ms Gunn one 3000w essay, one 3000-word essay for Allied studies Prereq 7653 Coreq Intro. Media two 2000w the course, two 2000- Manipulation essays/sem, 4 word essays per semester Class contact & Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 3 tut/ tut papers and four tutorial papers for course duration prac)/wk; the course Sem 2: (2 lec & 2 tut/prac) /wk (one 3000w & one 3000- and two 2000- Exams, essays, etc. Assessment one 3hr exam/ sem, two 2000w word essays per semester classwork essays)/sem Allied studies AKn assumed knowledge Prereq prerequisite (you must have passed the indicated prerequisite before you start the course) Coreq corequisite (you must enrol in this course at the same time unless you have already passed it) Type of class contact/assessment class class contact of any form lab laboratory lec lecture prac practical tut tutorial exam examination tut paper ,. tutorial paper

Duration hr hour Sem 1 Semester 1 Sem 2 Semester 2 Yr. throughout the year

Linguistics 16J St Paul's College 4 12N Departments, schools and buildings-main campus Link Bldg 250 Sancta Sophia College 5 1F Lost Property 14F Scholarships 16F Academic & Executive Services 16E Continuing Education, Centre for 13B Mackie Bldg 13B Schools Liaison 11E Accounting 17P Goppleson Postgraduate Medical Institute 9K MacLaurin Hall 16G Science Faculty Office 19L Administrative Policy & Strategic Planning DiVisionj6E Counselling Service 13G Macleay Bldg &Museum 16D Security & Blag Services 14F Administrative Support Services Division 16E Crop Sciences 13F Madsen Bldg •it! Selle House 10B Aeronautical Engineering 26M Darlington House H66 14S Mail Room (Internal) ' 20T Semitic Studies 17F Agricultural Chemistry & Soil Science 10D Development Office 160 Main Bldg 17F Senate Room 16G Agricultural Economics 11D Disability & Welfare Services 13G Mandelbaum House 18U Services Bldg 20T Agriculture Faculty Office 11C Econometrics 17P Manning House 14H Seymour Theatre Centre 24M Alma Street Glasshouse 23N Economic History 17P Margaret Telfer Bldg 13A Shepherd St Parking Station 27M Anaesthesia 7K Economics, Dept & Faculty Office 17P Marketing, Dept of 16Q Sir Hermann Black Gallery 19N Anderson Stuart Bldg 171 Edgeworth David Bldg 19J Marketing & Publications 11E Social & Policy Studies in Education 13G Anatomy & Histology 171 Education Bldg & Faculty Office 13G Mathematics & Statistics 19L Social Work & Social Policy 151 Animal Science 7F Educational Development & Evaluation 15K McMaster Laboratory CSIRO 7D Solicitor, University 16E Anthropology 16F Educational Psych., Measurement & Technology 13G McMillan, J.R.A., Bldg 11C Sports: Archaeology, Classics & Ancient History 16F Edward Ford Bldg 15K Mechanical & Aeronautical Engineering Bdg 25N Noel Martin Recreation Centre 20R Architectural & Design Science 22M Electrical Engineering 240 Mechanical Engineering 25N Sports Union 7G Architecture, Dept & Faculty Office 22M Employment Service, Casual 13C Media Office 16E Swimming Pool 20R Archives 19H Engineering Faculty Office 250 Medicine 7K Tennis courts 20D Art Workshop 20M English 12E Medicine, Dept of 7K Ward, H.K., Gymnasium 7G Arts Faculty Office 16F Equal Employment Opportunity Unit 16S Medicine Faculty Office 15K Women's Sports Association 121 Asset Management 13A Evelyn Williams Bldg 6E Merewether Bldg 17P Stephen Roberts Theatre 20J Asian Studies 14F Experimental Medicine 7K Microbiology 20P Stewart, J.D., Bldg 8E Attendant's Lodge 160 External Relations Division 16E Mills, R.C., Bldg 151 Stores 20T Badham Bldg & Library 14E Facilities Planning, Office of 20T Mungo MacCallum Bldg 15G Student Centre* 17L Banks (see Financial institutions) Financial institutions: Music 24M Student Services* 13G Baxter's Lodge 22E Commonwealth 14C Nicholson Museum 16G SRC 19N Behavioural Sciences in Medicine 7K Credit Union 14D Obstetrics & Gynaecology 9K SUPRA 4R Biochemistry 20P National Australia 15E Occupational Health 15K Surgery 7K Biological Sciences 16D National Australia 19N Old Geology Bldg 15D SydU-tech. 19U Blackburn Bldg 7K Financial Assistance 13G Old School Bldg 21P Systems Development 13A Bookshops: Finance, Dept of 16Q Old Teachers' College Bldg 12G Teaching & Curriculum Studies 13G Medical 7K Financial Management & Reporting 13A Operations Accounting 13A Tin Sheds Gallery ' 20M SRC Secondhand 19N Financial Services Division 16E Pathology 7K Trades & Grounds Serrvices 20T University Co-operative 16J Fine Arts 151 Performance Studies (entrance Manning Rd) 12F Traffic Office 14F Bosch 1A (lecture theatres) 8L Fisher Library 19G Personnel Services 13A Transient Bldg 16J Bosch 1B Bldg 7M Footbridge Theatre 14C Pharmacology 7M Union, University of Sydney Botany 16D French Studies 15F Pharmacy 15E Wentworth Building 19N Brennan, C, Bldg 15F Garage, University 21T Philosophy 17G Holme Building 14D Business Liaison Office 13D Geography 16Q Photowise Imaging 20T Manning House 14H Business Services 19U Geology & Geophysics 19J Physics 13J Unistaff 19U Campus Services 20T Germanic Studies 15F Physiology 171 University Collection 19H Careers Centre 13B Government & Public Administration^ 17P Planning Support Office 16E University of Sydney Club 15G Carslaw Bldg 19L Great Hall 18E Post Office 15E Urban & Regional Planning 22M Cashiers 13A Greek, Modern 14F Printing Services, University 20T Veterinary Anatomy 8E Celtic Studies 12E Griffith Taylor Bldg 14F Properties & Investments 13A Veterinary Clinic 6E Central Services 22E Gunn, R.M.C., Bldg 7F Psychological Medicine 4K Veterinary Clinical Sciences 6E Centre for English Teaching 17L Health Service Psychology .. 14F Veterinary Pathology 7E Centre for Teaching & Learning 19L Holme Bldg 14C Purchasing 20T Veterinary Science Faculty Office 8D Chancellor's Committee Shop 17F Wentworth Bldg 19N Publications Unit 16E Vice-Chancellor's Office 16E Chaplains' Centre 10G History 15G Public Health & Community Medicine 15K Wallace Theatre 11E Chemical Engineering 22Q History & Philosophy of Science 19L Quadrangle 17F War Memorial Gallery 17E Chemistry 17K Holme Bldg 14C Queen Elizabeth II Research Institute 9K Watt, R.D., Bldg 11D Child Care: Industrial Relations, Dept of 16Q Regiment, University 14R Wentworth Bldg 19N Boundary Lane 16U Infectious Diseases 7K Religion, School of Studies in 12E Wesley College 6 11L Carillon Avenue 9Q Information Technology Services 19U Research & Scholarships 16E Western Avenue Underground Parking Station 8N Laurel Tree House (Glebe) 16B Institute Bldg 16Q Revenue Services 13A Wilkinson Bldg 22M Union (Darlington) 21S International Office & International Student Services 13A Risk Management 13A Women's College 7 110 Civil & Mining Engineering 24R International House 23L Rose Street Bldg 24P Women's Studies 15S Clark Bldg 17T Italian 151 Ross Street Bldg 10D Woolley Bldg, John 12E Clock Tower 17F Koori Centre 12G Russell, Peter Nicol, Bldg 23P Yeoman Bedell's Office 17E Community & Alumni Relations 19H Language Centre 14F St Andrew's College 2 50 Zoology 12D Computer Science, Basser Dept 17L Learning Assistance Centre 13G St John's College 3 3H • Student Centre (17L): • academic transcripts • admissions • enrolments • examinations • graduations • handbook sales • HECS enquiries • travel concessions

• Student Services (13G): • accommodation • counselling • financial assistance • special services (disabilities, etc.) Notes